Toep A1000

YASKAWA AC Drive A1000
High Performance Vector Control Drive

Quick Start Guide
Type: CIMR-AAA , CIMR-ABA ,
CIMR-ADA , CIMR-ATA
Models: 200 V Class: 0.4 to 110 kW
400 V Class: 0.4 to 355 kW
To properly use the product, read this manual thoroughly and retain
for easy reference, inspection, and maintenance. Ensure the end user
receives this manual.
Receiving 1
Mechanical Installation 2
Electrical Installation 3
Start-Up Programming &
Operation 4
Troubleshooting 5
Periodic Inspection &
Maintenance 6
Specifications A
Parameter List B
MANUAL NO. TOEP C710616 21C Standards Compliance C
Copyright © 2008 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION.
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior
written permission of Yaskawa. No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information
contained herein. Moreover, because Yaskawa is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the
information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in
the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, Yaskawa assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions.
Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this
publication.
2 YASKAWA ELECTRIC TOEP C710616 21C YASKAWA AC Drive - A1000 Quick Start Guide
■ Quick Reference
Easily Set Parameters for Specific Applications
Preset parameter defaults are available for setting up applications. Refer to Application Selection
on page 63.
Run a Motor One-Frame Larger

This drive can operate a motor one frame size larger when running variable torque loads such as fans and pumps. Refer to C6-01: Drive Duty
Mode Selection on page 72.
Drive a Synchronous PM Motor
A1000 can operate synchronous PM motors. Refer to Subchart A-3: Operation with Permanent
Magnet Motors on page 62.
Perform Auto-Tuning
Automatic tuning sets motor parameters. Refer to Auto-Tuning on page 91.
Maintenance Check Using Drive Monitors

Use drive monitors to check the if fans, capacitors, and other components may require maintenance. Refer to Performance Life Monitors
Maintenance Monitors on page 120.
Fault Display and Troubleshooting

Refer to Drive Alarms, Faults, and Errors on page 99.
Standards Compliance
Refer to European Standards on page 181 and Refer to UL Standards on page 187.
YASKAWA ELECTRIC TOEP C710616 21C YASKAWA AC Drive - A1000 Quick Start Guide 3
Table of Contents
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
i. Preface & General Safety ................................................................................................. 7
Preface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
General Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1. Receiving......................................................................................................................... 17
Model Number and Nameplate Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2. Mechanical Installation .................................................................................................. 19
Mechanical Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3. Electrical Installation...................................................................................................... 26
Standard Connection Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Main Circuit Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Terminal Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Digital Operator and Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Top Protective Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Main Circuit Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Control I/O Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Terminal A2 Analog Input Signal Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Connect to a PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Wiring Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4. Start-Up Programming & Operation ............................................................................. 53
Using the Digital Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
The Drive and Programming Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Start-Up Flowcharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Powering Up the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Application Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Basic Drive Setup Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Auto-Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
No-Load Operation Test Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Test Run with Load Connected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Test Run Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
5. Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................. 99
Drive Alarms, Faults, and Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Fault Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Alarm Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Operator Programming Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Auto-Tuning Fault Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Copy Function Related Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
6. Periodic Inspection & Maintenance ........................................................................... 118
Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Periodic Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
A. Specifications ............................................................................................................... 124
Heavy Duty and Normal Duty Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Table of Contents
Three-Phase 200 V Class Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125

Three-Phase 400 V Class Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Drive Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Drive Watt Loss Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
B. Parameter List ............................................................................................................... 131
A: Initialization Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
b: Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
C: Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
d: References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
E: Motor Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
F: Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
H: Multi-Function Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
L: Protection Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
n: Special Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
o: Operator Related Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
q: DriveWorksEZ Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
r: DriveWorksEZ Connection Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
T: Motor Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
U: Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
C. Standards Compliance ................................................................................................. 181
European Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
UL Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Safe Disable Input Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Revision History .........................................................................................................................194
i Preface & General Safety

◆ Preface
Yaskawa manufactures products used as components in a wide variety of industrial systems and equipment. The selection
and application of Yaskawa products remain the responsibility of the equipment manufacturer or end user. Yaskawa
accepts no responsibility for the way its products are incorporated into the final system design. Under no circumstances
should any Yaskawa product be incorporated into any product or design as the exclusive or sole safety control. Without
exception, all controls should be designed to detect faults dynamically and fail safely under all circumstances. All
systems or equipment designed to incorporate a product manufactured by Yaskawa must be supplied to the end user with
appropriate warnings and instructions as to the safe use and operation of that part. Any warnings provided by Yaskawa
must be promptly provided to the end user. Yaskawa offers an express warranty only as to the quality of its products in
conforming to standards and specifications published in the Yaskawa manual. NO OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESSED
OR IMPLIED, IS OFFERED. Yaskawa assumes no liability for any personal injury, property damage, losses, or claims
arising from misapplication of its products.
This manual is designed to ensure correct and suitable application of Variable A1000-Series Drives. Read this manual
before attempting to install, operate, maintain, or inspect a drive and keep it in a safe, convenient location for future
reference. Be sure you understand all precautions and safety information before attempting application.
■ Applicable Documentation
The following manuals are available for A1000 series drives:
A1000 Series AC Drive Quick Start Guide (this book)

DIGITAL OPERATOR JVOP-182
REV DRV FOUT

ALM
This guide is packaged together with the product. It contains basic information required to install and
wire the drive, in addition to an overview of fault diagnostics, maintenance, and parameter settings.
It is meant to get the drive ready for a trial run with the application and for basic operation.
LO
ESC
RE
RESET ENTER
RUN STOP
CIMR-AA2A0021FAA
200V 3Phase 5.5kW/3.7kW
S/N:
WARNING
●
●
Risk of electric shock.
Read manual before installing.
Wait 5 minutes for capacitor
discharge after disconnecting
AVERTISSMENT NPJT31470-1
●
●
Risque de décharge électrique.
Lire le manuel avant l'installation.
Attendre 5 minutes après la coupure
de l'alimentation, pour permettre
A1000 Series AC Drive Technical Manual
power supply. la décharge des condensateurs.
To conform to requirements,
This manual is included on the CD-ROM packaged with the product (Yaskawa AC Drive Manuals,
● ● Pour répondre aux exigences , s
make sure to ground the supply assurer que le neutre soit relié
neutral for 400V class. à la terre, pour la série 400V.
YEC_com
● After opening the manual switch ● Après avoir déconnécte la protection
between the drive and motor, entre le driver et le moteur, veuillez
please wait 5 minutes before patienter 5 minutes avain d’effectuer
inspecting, performing une opération de montage ou de
maintenance or wiring the drive. câblage du variateur.
Hot surfaces Surfaces Chaudes
●
Top and Side surfaces may ● Dessus et cotés du boitier Peuvent
become hot. Do not touch. devenir chaud. Ne Pas toucher.
危険
けが．感電のおそれがあります。
● ● 据え付け、運転の前には必ず取扱説明書を読むこと。
TOBCC71061621), and is also available for download on our documentation website, e-

●
● 通電中および電源遮断後5分以内はフロントカバー
を外さない事。
●
● 400V級インバータの場合は、電源の中性点が接地
されていることを確認すること。( 対応）
● 保守・点検、配線を行う場合は、出力側開閉器を
●
遮断後5分待って実施してください。
高温注意
mon
● インバータ上部、両側面は高温になります。
● 触らないでください。
mechatronics.com. This manual provides detailed information on parameter settings, drive

functions, and MEMOBUS/Modbus specifications. Use this manual to expand drive functionality
and to take advantage of higher performance features.
◆ General Safety
■ Supplemental Safety Information
General Precautions
• The diagrams in this manual may be indicated without covers or safety shields to show details. Restore covers or
shields before operating the drive and run the drive according to the instructions described in this manual.
• Any illustrations, photographs, or examples used in this manual are provided as examples only and may not apply to
all products to which this manual is applicable.
• The products and specifications described in this manual or the content and presentation of the manual may be
changed without notice to improve the product and/or the manual.
• When ordering a new copy of the manual due to damage or loss, contact your Yaskawa representative or the nearest
Yaskawa sales office and provide the manual number shown on the front cover.
• If nameplate becomes worn or damaged, order a replacement from your Yaskawa representative or the nearest
Yaskawa sales office.
WARNING
Read and understand this manual before installing, operating or servicing this drive. The drive must be installed
according to this manual and local codes.
The following conventions are used to indicate safety messages in this manual. Failure to heed these messages could
result in serious or possibly even fatal injury or damage to the products or to related equipment and systems.
DANGER
Indicates a hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
Indicates a hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
WARNING! will also be indicated by a bold key word embedded in the text followed by an italicized safety message.
CAUTION
Indicates a hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION! will also be indicated by a bold key word embedded in the text followed by an italicized safety message.
NOTICE
Indicates a property damage message.
NOTICE: will also be indicated by a bold key word embedded in the text followed by an italicized safety message.
■ Safety Messages
DANGER
Heed the safety messages in this manual.
Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury.
The operating company is responsible for any injuries or equipment damage resulting from failure to heed the warnings
in this manual.
Electrical Shock Hazard
Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on.
Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury.
Before servicing, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power
supply is turned off. After shutting off the power, wait for at least the amount of time specified on the drive before
touching any components.
WARNING
Sudden Movement Hazard
System may start unexpectedly upon application of power, resulting in death or serious injury.
Clear all personnel from the drive, motor and machine area before applying power. Secure covers, couplings, shaft
keys and machine loads before applying power to the drive.
When using DriveWorksEZ to create custom programming, the drive I/O terminal functions change from
factory settings and the drive will not perform as outlined in this manual.
Unpredictable equipment operation may result in death or serious injury.
Take special note of custom I/O programming in the drive before attempting to operate equipment.
Electrical Shock Hazard
Do not attempt to modify or alter the drive in any way not explained in this manual.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Yaskawa is not responsible for any modification of the product made by the user. This product must not be modified.
Do not allow unqualified personnel to use equipment.
Maintenance, inspection, and replacement of parts must be performed only by authorized personnel familiar with
installation, adjustment and maintenance of AC drives.
Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the power is on.
Fire Hazard
Do not use an improper voltage source.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire.
Verify that the rated voltage of the drive matches the voltage of the incoming power supply before applying power.
Crush Hazard
Do not use this drive in lifting applications without installing external safety circuitry to prevent accidental
dropping of the load.
The drive does not possess built-in load drop protection for lifting applications.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury from falling loads.
Install electrical and/or mechanical safety circuit mechanisms independent of drive circuitry.
CAUTION
Crush Hazard
Do not carry the drive by the front cover.
Failure to comply may result in minor or moderate injury from the main body of the drive falling.
NOTICE
Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the drive and circuit boards.
Failure to comply may result in ESD damage to the drive circuitry.
Do not perform a withstand voltage test on any part of the drive.
Failure to comply could result in damage to the sensitive devices within the drive.
Do not operate damaged equipment.
Failure to comply could result in further damage to the equipment.
Do not connect or operate any equipment with visible damage or missing parts.
Install adequate branch circuit short circuit protection per applicable codes.
Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive.
The drive is suitable for circuits capable of delivering not more than 100,000 RMS symmetrical Amperes, 240 Vac
maximum (200 V Class) and 480 Vac maximum (400 V Class).
Do not expose the drive to halogen group disinfectants.
Failure to comply may cause damage to the electrical components in the drive.
Do not pack the drive in wooden materials that have been fumigated or sterilized.
Do not sterilize the entire package after the product is packed.
■ Application Notes
Selection
Installing a Reactor
An AC or DC reactor can be used for the following:
• to suppress harmonic current.
• to smooth peak current that results from capacitor switching.
• when the power supply is above 600 kVA.
• when the drive is running from a power supply system with thyristor converters.
Note: A DC reactor is built in to the drive models 2A0110 to 2A0415 and 4A0058 to 4A0675.
Figure 1
4000 Power supply harmonics

reactor required
Power Supply
Capacity (kVA)
600
Reactor
unnecessary
0
60 400
Drive Capacity (kVA)
Figure 1 Installing a Reactor

Drive Capacity
For specialized motors, make sure that the motor rated current is less than rated output current for the drive. When
running more than one motor in parallel from a single drive, the capacity of the drive should be larger than 1.1 times of
the total motor rated current.
Starting Torque
The overload rating for the drive determines the starting and accelerating characteristics of the motor. Expect lower
torque than when running from line power. To get more starting torque, use a larger drive or increase both the motor and
drive capacity.
Emergency Stop
When the drive faults out, the output is shut off. This, however, does not stop the motor immediately. Some type of
mechanical brake may be needed if it is necessary to halt the motor faster than the Fast Stop function is able to.
Options
The B1, B2, +1, +2, and +3 terminals are used to connect optional devices. Connect only A1000-compatible devices.
Repetitive Starting/Stopping
Cranes (hoists), elevators, punching presses, and other such applications with frequent starts and stops often exceed
150% of their rated current values. Heat stress generated from repetitive high current can shorten the life span of the
IGBTs. The expected lifesaving for the IGBTs is about 8 million start and stop cycles with a 4 kHz carrier frequency and
a 150% peak current.
Yaskawa recommends lowering the carrier frequency, particularly when audible noise is not a concern. The user can also
choose to reduce the load, increase the acceleration and deceleration times, or switch to a larger drive. This will help keep
peak current levels under 150%. Be sure to check the peak current levels when starting and stopping repeatedly during
the initial test run, and make adjustments accordingly.
For crane-type applications using an inching function in which the motor is quickly started and stopped, Yaskawa
recommends the following to ensure motor torque levels:
• Select a large enough drive so that peak current levels remain below 150% of the drive rated current.
• The drive should be one frame size larger than the motor.
Installation
Enclosure Panels
Keep the drive in a clean environment by either selecting an area free of airborne dust, lint, and oil mist, or install the
drive in an enclosure panel. Be sure to leave the required space between drives to provide for cooling, and that proper
measures are taken so that the ambient temperature remains within allowable limits. Keep flammable materials away
from the drive. If the drive must be used in an area where it is subjected to oil mist and excessive vibration, protective
designs are available. Contact Yaskawa or your Yaskawa agent for details.
Installation Direction
The drive should be installed upright as specified in the manual. For more information on installation, Refer to
Mechanical Installation on page 19.
Settings
Motor Code
If using OLV/PM designed for permanent magnet motors, make sure that the proper motor code has been set to
parameter E5-01 before performing a trial run.
Upper Limits
The drive is capable of running the motor up to 400 Hz. Due to the danger of accidentally of operating at high speed, be
sure to set the upper limit for the frequency. The default setting for the maximum output frequency is 60 Hz.
DC Injection Braking
Motor overheat can result if there is too much current used during DC Injection Braking, or if the time for DC Injection
Braking is too long.
Acceleration/Deceleration Times
Acceleration and deceleration times are affected by how much torque the motor generates, the load torque, and the inertia
moment. Set a longer accel/decel time when Stall Prevention is enabled. The accel/decel times are lengthened for as long
as the Stall Prevention function is operating. For faster acceleration and deceleration, install one of the braking options
available or increase the capacity of the drive.
Compliance with Harmonic Suppression Guidelines
A1000 conforms to strict guidelines in Japan covering harmonic suppression for power conversion devices. Defined in
JEM-TR201 and JEM-TR226 and published by the Japan Electrical Manufacturers’ Association, these guidelines define
the amount of harmonic current output acceptable for new installation. Instructions on calculation harmonic output are
available at www.e-mechatronics.com.
General Handling
Wiring Check
Never connect the power supply lines to output terminals U/T1, V/T2, or W/T3. Doing so will destroy the drive. Be sure
to perform a final check of all sequence wiring and other connections before turning the power on. Make sure there are
no short circuits on the control terminals (+V, AC, etc.), as this could damage the drive.
Selecting a Circuit Breaker or Leakage Circuit Breaker

Yaskawa recommends installing Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCB) to the power supply side. The ELCB should be
designed for use with an AC drive (e.g. Type B according to IEC 60755).
Select a MCCB (Molded Case Circuit Breaker) or ELCB with a rated current that is 1.5 to 2 times higher than the rated
current of the drive in order to avoid nuisance trips caused by harmonics in the drive input current.
Magnetic Contactor Installation
Use a magnetic contactor (MC) to ensure that power to the drive can be completely shut off when necessary. The MC
should be wired so that it opens when a fault output terminal is triggered.
Avoid switching a magnetic contactor on the power supply side more frequently than once every 30 minutes. Frequent
switching can cause damage to the drive.
Inspection and Maintenance
Capacitors in the drive take time to discharge even after the power has been shut off. After shutting off the power, wait
for at least the amount of time specified on the drive before touching any components.
The heatsink can become quite hot during operation, and proper precautions should be taken to prevent burns. When
replacing the cooling fan, shut off the power and wait at least 15 minutes to be sure that the heatsink has cooled down.
Even when the power has been shut off for a drive running a PM motor, voltage continues to be generated at the motor
terminals while the motor coasts to stop. Take the precautions described below to prevent shock and injury:
• Applications where the machine can still rotate even though the drive has fully stopped should have a load switch
installed to the output side of the drive. Yaskawa recommends manual load switches from the AICUT LB Series by
AICHI Electric Works Co., Ltd.
• Do not allow an external force to rotate the motor beyond the maximum allowable speed, also when the drive has been
shut off.
• Wait for at least the time specified on the warning label after opening the load switch on the output side before
inspecting the drive or performing any maintenance.
• Do not open and close the load switch while the motor is running, as this can damage the drive.
• If the motor is coasting, make sure the power to the drive is turned on and the drive output has completely stopped
before closing the load switch.
Wiring
All wire ends should use ring terminals for UL/cUL compliance. Use only the tools recommended by the terminal
manufacturer for crimping.
Transporting the Drive
Never steam clean the drive.
During transport, keep the drive from coming into contact with salts, fluorine, bromine, phthalate ester, and other such
harmful chemicals.
■ Notes on Motor Operation
Using a Standard Motor
Low Speed Range
The cooling fan of a standard motor is usually designed to sufficiently cool the motor at the rated speed. As the self-
cooling capability of such a motor reduces with the speed, applying full torque at low speed will possibly damage the
motor. To prevent motor damage from overheat, reduce the load torque as the motor slows.
Figure 2 shows the allowable load characteristics for a Yaskawa standard motor. A motor designed specifically for
operation with a drive should be used when 100% continuous torque is needed at low speeds.
Figure 2
25% ED (or 15 min)

40% ED (or 20 min)
60% ED (or 40 min)
100
90
80
70
Torque 60
(%) 50
Continuous operation
YEC_common 3 6 20 60
Frequency (Hz)
Figure 2 Allowable Load Characteristics for a Yaskawa Motor

Insulation Tolerance
Consider voltage tolerance levels and insulation in applications with an input voltage of over 440 V or particularly long
wiring distances. Contact Yaskawa or your Yaskawa agent for consultation.
High Speed Operation
Problems may occur with the motor bearings and dynamic balance of the machine when operating a motor beyond its
rated speed. Contact the motor or machine manufacturer.
Torque Characteristics
Torque characteristics differ compared to operating the motor directly from line power. The user should have a full
understanding of the load torque characteristics for the application.
Vibration and Shock
A1000 lets the user choose between high carrier PWM control and low carrier PWM. Selecting high carrier PWM can
help reduce motor oscillation.
Take particular caution when using a variable speed drive for an application that is conventionally run from line power at
a constant speed. If resonance occurs shock-absorbing rubber should be installed around the base of the motor and the
Jump frequency selection should be enabled to prevent continuous operation in the resonant frequency range.
Audible Noise
Noise created during run varies by the carrier frequency setting. When using a high carrier frequency, audible noise from
the motor is comparable to the motor noise generated when running from line power. Operating above the rated r/min,
however, can create unpleasant motor noise.
Using a Synchronous Motor
• Contact Yaskawa or your Yaskawa agent if you plan to use any other synchronous motor not endorsed by Yaskawa.
• A single drive is not capable of running multiple synchronous motors at the same time. Use a standard induction motor
for such setups.
• At start, a synchronous motor may rotate slightly in the opposite direction of the Run command depending on
parameter settings and rotor position.
• The amount of starting torque that can be generated differs by each control mode and by the type of motor being used.
Set up the motor with the drive after verifying the starting torque, allowable load characteristics, impact load tolerance,
and speed control range.
Contact Yaskawa or your Yaskawa agent if you plan to use a motor that does not fall within these specifications.
• In Open Loop Vector Control for PM motors, braking torque is less than 125% when running between 20% to 100%
speed, even with a braking resistor. Braking torque drops to less than half when running at less than 20% speed.
• In Open Loop Vector Control for PM motors, the allowable load inertia moment is approximately 50 times higher than
the motor inertia moment or less. Contact Yaskawa or your Yaskawa agent concerning applications with a larger inertia
moment.
• When using a holding brake in Open Loop Vector Control for PM motors, release the brake prior to starting the motor.
Failure to set the proper timing can result in speed loss. Not for use with conveyor, transport, or hoist type applications.
• To restart a coasting motor rotating at over 200 Hz while in the V/f control mode, use the Short Circuit Braking
function to first bring the motor to a stop. Short Circuit Braking requires a special braking resistor. Contact Yaskawa or
your Yaskawa agent for details.
Speed Search can be used to restart a coasting motor rotating slower than 200 Hz. If the motor cable is relatively long,
however, the motor should instead be stopped using Short Circuit Braking, which forces the motor to stop by creating a
short-circuit in the motor windings.
■ Applications with Specialized Motors
Applications with Specialized Motors
Multi-Pole Motor
Because the rated current will differ from a standard motor, be sure to check the maximum current when selecting a
drive. Always stop the motor before switching between the number of motor poles. If a regen overvoltage fault occurs or
if overcurrent protection is triggered, the motor will coast to stop.
Submersible Motor
Because motor rated current is greater than a standard motor, select the drive capacity accordingly. Be sure to use a large
enough motor cable to avoid decreasing the maximum torque level on account of voltage drop caused by a long motor
cable.
Explosion-Proof Motor
Both the motor and drive need to be tested together to be certified as explosion-proof. The drive is not designed for
explosion proof areas.
Furthermore, if an encoder is attached to an explosion-proof motor make sure the encoder is explosion-proof too. Use an
insulating signal converter for connecting the encoder signal lines to the drives speed feedback option card.
Geared Motor
To avoid gear damage when operating at low speeds or very high speeds, make sure that both the gear and lubricant are
rated for the desired speed range. Consult with the manufacturer for applications that require operation outside the rated
speed range of the motor or gear box.
Single-Phase Motor
Variable speed drives are not designed for operation with single phase motors. Using capacitors to start the motor causes
excessive current to flow and can damage drive components. A split-phase start or a repulsion start can end up burning
out the starter coils because the internal centrifugal switch is not activated. A1000 is for use with three-phase motors
only.
Uras Vibrator
Uras vibrator is a vibration motor that gets power from centrifugal force by rotating unbalanced weights on both ends of
the shaft. After considering the points below, consult with a your Yaskawa representative to determine the best solution
for the application.
• Uras vibrator should be used within the drive rated frequency.
• Use V/f Control.
• Increase the acceleration time five to fifteen times longer than would normally be used due to the high amount of load
inertia of an Uras vibrator. Increase drive capacity for applications that require an acceleration time of less than 5 s.
• Drive may have trouble starting due to undertorque that results from erratic torque (static friction torque at start).
Motor with Brake
Caution should be taken when using a drive to operate a motor with a built-in holding brake. If the brake is connected to
the output side of the drive, it may not release at start due to low voltage levels. A separate power supply should be
installed for the motor brake. Motors with a built-in brake tend to generate a fair amount of noise when running at low
speeds.
Notes on Power Transmission Parts (belts, chains, gear boxes, ...)
Installing a drive in a machine that was directly connected to the power supply allows to adjust the machine speed.
Continuous operation above or below the rated speed can wear on lubrication material in gear boxes and other power
transmission parts. In order to avoid machine damage make sure lubrication is sufficient within the whole speed range.
Note that operation above the rated speed can increase the noise generated by the machine.
■ Drive Label Warnings

Always heed the warning information listed in Figure 3 in the position shown in Figure 4.
Figure 3
WARNING
Risk of electric shock.
●
Read manual before installing. YEC_com
●
Wait 5 minutes for capacitor
discharge after disconnecting mon
power supply.
●
To conform to requirements,
make sure to ground the supply
neutral for 400V class.
● After opening the manual switch
between the drive and motor,
please wait 5 minutes before
inspecting, performing
maintenance or wiring the drive.
Hot surfaces
●
Top and Side surfaces may
become hot. Do not touch.
Figure 3 Warning Information
Figure 4
DIGITAL OPERATOR JVOP-182 ALM
REV DRV FOUT
YEC_common
LO
ESC
RE
RESET ENTER
RUN STOP
CIMR-AA2A0021FAA
200V 3Phase 5.5kW/3.7kW
S/N:
WARNING AVERTISSMENT NPJT31470-1

Risk of electric shock. Risque de décharge électrique.
● Read manual before installing. ● Lire le manuel avant l'installation.
● Wait 5 minutes for capacitor ● Attendre 5 minutes après la coupure
discharge after disconnecting de l'alimentation, pour permettre
power supply. la décharge des condensateurs.
● To conform to requirements, ● Pour répondre aux exigences , s
make sure to ground the supply assurer que le neutre soit relié
neutral for 400V class. à la terre, pour la série 400V.
● After opening the manual switch ● Après avoir déconnécte la protection
between the drive and motor, entre le driver et le moteur, veuillez
please wait 5 minutes before patienter 5 minutes avain d’effectuer
inspecting, performing une opération de montage ou de
Warning Label
maintenance or wiring the drive. câblage du variateur.
Hot surfaces Surfaces Chaudes
●
Top and Side surfaces may ● Dessus et cotés du boitier Peuvent
become hot. Do not touch. devenir chaud. Ne Pas toucher.
危険
けが．感電のおそれがあります。
● ● 据え付け、運転の前には必ず取扱説明書を読むこと。
●
● 通電中および電源遮断後5分以内はフロントカバー
を外さない事。
●
● 400V級インバータの場合は、電源の中性点が接地
されていることを確認すること。( 対応）
● 保守・点検、配線を行う場合は、出力側開閉器を
遮断後5分待って実施してください。
高温注意
● インバータ上部、両側面は高温になります。
● 触らないでください。
Figure 4 Warning Information Position
■ Warranty Information
Warranty Period
This drive is warranted for 12 months from the date of delivery to the customer or 18 months from the date of shipment
from the Yaskawa factory, whichever comes first.
Scope of Warranty
Inspections
Customers are responsible for periodic inspections of the drive. Upon request, a Yaskawa representative will inspect the
drive for a fee. If the Yaskawa representative finds the drive to be defective due to Yaskawa workmanship or materials
and the defect occurs during the warranty period, this inspection fee will be waived and the problem remedied free of
charge.
Repairs
If a Yaskawa product is found to be defective due to Yaskawa workmanship or materials and the defect occurs during the
warranty period, Yaskawa will provide a replacement, repair the defective product, and provide shipping to and from the
site free of charge.
However, if the Yaskawa Authorized Service Center determines that the problem with the drive is not due to defective
workmanship or materials, the customer will be responsible for the cost of any necessary repairs. Some problems that are
outside the scope of this warranty are:
Problems due to improper maintenance or handling, carelessness, or other reasons where the customer is determined to
be responsible.
Problems due to additions or modifications made to a Yaskawa product without Yaskawa’s understanding.
Problems due to the use of a Yaskawa product under conditions that do not meet the recommended specifications.
Problems caused by natural disaster or fire.
After the free warranty period elapses.
Replenishment or replacement of consumables or expendables.
Defective products due to packaging or fumigation.
Malfunction or problems caused by program that has been made by customers using DriveWorksEZ.
Other problems not due to defects in Yaskawa workmanship or materials.
Warranty service is only applicable within Japan. However, after-sales service is available for customers outside of Japan
for a reasonable fee.
Contact your local Yaskawa representative for more information.
Exceptions
Any inconvenience to the customer or damage to non-Yaskawa products due to Yaskawa’s defective products whether
within or outside of the warranty period are NOT covered by warranty.
Restrictions
A1000 was not designed or manufactured for use in devices or systems that may directly affect or threaten human lives
or health.
Customers who intend to use the product described in this manual for devices or systems relating to transportation, health
care, space aviation, atomic power, electric power, or in underwater applications must first contact their Yaskawa
representatives or the nearest Yaskawa sales office.
This product has been manufactured under strict quality-control guidelines. However, if this product is to be installed in
any location where failure of this product could involve or result in a life-and-death situation or loss of human life or in a
facility where failure may cause a serious accident or physical injury, safety devices must be installed to minimize the
likelihood of any accident.
1 Receiving
1 Receiving
◆ Model Number and Nameplate Check
Please perform the following tasks after receiving the drive:
• Inspect the drive for damage.
If the drive appears damaged upon receipt, contact the shipper immediately.
• Verify receipt of the correct model by checking the information on the nameplate.
• If you have received the wrong model or the drive does not function properly, contact your supplier.
■ Nameplate
Figure 5
YEC_common
Normal Duty Amps / Heavy Duty Amps
AC drive model MODEL : CIMR-AA2A0021FAA

MAX APPLI. MOTOR : 5.5kW / 3.7kW REV : A
Input specifications INPUT : AC3PH 200-240V 50/60Hz 24A/18.9A
IND.CONT.EQ.
Output specifications OUTPUT : AC3PH 0-240V 0-400Hz 21A/17.5A 7J48 B
MASS : 3.5 kg PRG : 1010 Software version
Lot number O/N :
Serial number S/N :
FILE NO : E131457 IP20

TYPE 1 ENCLOSURE PASS
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN
Enclosure type
Figure 5 Nameplate Information
CIMR - A A 2 A 0004 F A A
Drive A1000 Customized Enclosure Design
No. No. Type
Series Specifications Revision
A Standard model A IP00 Order
No. Region
Code NEMA
F Type 1
U USA
A Japan
Environmental
B China No.
Specification <1>
C Europe A Standard
Receiving
K Gas-resistant
T Asia
M Humidity- and
dust-resistant
No. Voltage Class N Oil-resistant
YEC_common 2 3-phase, 200-240 Vac S Vibration-resistant
1
4 3-phase, 380-480 Vac
Refer to the following page.
1 Receiving
Three-Phase 200 V
Normal Duty Heavy Duty

Max. Motor Rated Output Max. Motor Rated Output
No. No.
Capacity kW Current A Capacity kW Current A
0004 0.75 3.5 0004 0.4 3.2
0006 1.1 6.0 0006 0.75 5
0008 1.5 8.0 0008 1.1 6.9
0010 2.2 9.6 0010 1.5 8
0012 3.0 12 0012 2.2 11
0018 3.7 17.5 0018 3.0 14.0
0021 5.5 21 0021 3.7 17.5
0030 7.5 30 0030 5.5 25
0040 11 40 0040 7.5 33
0056 15 56 0056 11 47
0069 18.5 69 0069 15 60
0081 22 81 0081 18.5 75
0110 30 110 0110 22 85
0138 37 138 0138 30 115
0169 45 169 0169 37 145
0211 55 211 0211 45 180
0250 75 250 0250 55 215
0312 90 312 0312 75 283
0360 110 360 0360 90 346
0415 110 415 0415 110 415
Three-Phase 400 V
Normal Duty Heavy Duty

Max. Motor Rated Output Max. Motor Rated Output
No. No.
Capacity kW Current A Capacity kW Current A
0002 0.75 2.1 0002 0.4 1.8
0004 1.5 4.1 0004 0.75 3.4
0005 2.2 5.4 0005 1.5 4.8
0007 3.0 6.9 0007 2.2 5.5
0009 3.7 8.8 0009 3.0 7.2
0011 5.5 11.1 0011 3.7 9.2
0018 7.5 17.5 0018 5.5 14.8
0023 11 23 0023 7.5 18
0031 15 31 0031 11 24
0038 18.5 38 0038 15 31
0044 22 44 0044 18.5 39
0058 30 58 0058 22 45
0072 37 72 0072 30 60
0088 45 88 0088 37 75
0103 55 103 0103 45 91
0139 75 139 0139 55 112
0165 90 165 0165 75 150
0208 110 208 0208 90 180
0250 132 250 0250 110 216
0296 160 296 0296 132 260
0362 185 362 0362 160 304
0414 220 414 0414 185 370
0515 250 515 0515 220 450
0675 355 675 0675 315 605
<1> Drives with these specifications do not guarantee complete protection for the environmental conditions indicated.
2 Mechanical Installation
◆ Mechanical Installation
This section outlines specifications, procedures, and the environment for proper mechanical installation of the drive.
■ Installation Environment
To help prolong the optimum performance life of the drive, install the drive in an environmental matching the
specifications below.
Table 1 Installation Environment
Environment Conditions
Installation Area Indoors
-10°C to +40°C (IP20/NEMA Type 1 enclosure)
-10°C to +50°C (IP00 enclosure)
Drive reliability improves in environments without wide temperature fluctuations.
Ambient Temperature
When using the drive in an enclosure panel, install a cooling fan or air conditioner in the area to ensure that the air
temperature inside the enclosure does not exceed the specified levels.
Do not allow ice to develop on the drive.
Humidity 95% RH or less and free of condensation
Storage Temperature -20 to +60°C
Install the drive in an area free from:
• oil mist and dust
• metal shavings, oil, water or other foreign materials
• radioactive materials
Surrounding Area • combustible materials (e.g., wood)
• harmful gases and liquids
• excessive vibration
• chlorides
• direct sunlight
Altitude 1000 m, up to 3000 m with derating
10 to 20 Hz at 9.8 m/s2
Vibration 20 to 55 Hz at 5.9 m/s2 (Models CIMR-A2A0004 to 2A0211 and 4A0002 to 4A0165) or,
2.0 m/s2 (Models CIMR-A2A0250 to 2A0415 and 4A0208 to 4A0675)
Orientation Install the drive vertically to maintain maximum cooling effects.
NOTICE: Avoid placing drive peripheral devices, transformers, or other electronics near the drive as the noise created can lead to
erroneous operation. If such devices must be used in close proximity to the drive, take proper steps to shield the drive from noise.
NOTICE: Prevent foreign matter such as metal shavings and wire clippings from falling into the drive during installation. Failure to
comply could result in damage to the drive. Place a temporary cover over the top of the drive during installation. Remove the
temporary cover before startup, as the cover will reduce ventilation and cause the drive to overheat.
Mechanical
Installation
■ Installation Orientation and Spacing

Install the drive upright as illustrated in Figure 6 to maintain proper cooling.
Figure 6
OK Not Good Not Good
Figure 6 Correct Installation Orientation
Single Drive Installation

Figure 7 shows the installation distance required to maintain sufficient space for airflow and wiring.
Figure 7
YEC_common Side Clearance Top/Bottom Clearance
A C
D
B B
C
D
A
A – 50 mm minimum C – 120 mm minimum

B – 30 mm minimum D – Airflow direction
Figure 7 Correct Installation Spacing
Note: IP20/NEMA Type 1 enclosure and IP00 enclosure models require the same amount of space above and below the drive for
installation.
Multiple Drive Installation (Side-by-Side Installation)

Models CIMR-A2A0004 through 0081 and 4A0002 through 0044 can take advantage of Side-by-Side installation.
When installing multiple drives into the same enclosure panel, mount the drives according to Figure 7.
When mounting drives with the minimum clearance of 2 mm according to Figure 8, derating must be considered and
parameter L8-35 must be set to 1. Refer to Parameter List on page 131.
Figure 8
YEC_common Line up the tops of the drives.

Side Clearance Top/Bottom Clearance
A C A D
B
B D
A A
A – 50 mm minimum C – 2 mm minimum
B – 30 mm minimum D – 120 mm minimum
Figure 8 Space Between Drives (Side-by-Side Mounting)
Note: When installing drives of different heights in the same enclosure panel, the tops of the drives should line up. Leave space
between the top and bottom of stacked drives for easy cooling fan replacement if required.
When drives with IP20/NEMA Type 1 enclosures are mounted side by side, the top protective covers of all drives must
be removed as shown in Figure 9. Refer to Top Protective Cover on page 33 to remove and reattach the top protective
cover.
Figure 9
Mechanical
Installation
Figure 9 IP20/NEMA Type 1 Side-by-Side Mounting in Enclosure
IP20/NEMA Type 1 Enclosure Drives

Note: IP20/NEMA Type 1 enclosure drives are equipped with a top cover. Removing this cover voids NEMA Type 1 protection but
still keeps IP20 conformity.
W1 4-d
1.5
4-d
W1
1.5
H1
H0
H1
H
H
t1 t1
D1
H2
H2
H3
W D1 W D
D
Figure 1 Figure 2
W1 4-d
t2
H0
H
H1
YEC_common
H2
H3
t1
D1
Max.8 W Max.8 D
Figure 3
Table 2 Dimensions for IP20/NEMA Type 1 Enclosure: 200 V Class

Dimensions (mm)
Drive Model
CIMR-A2A Weight
Figure W H D W1 H0 H1 H2 H3 D1 t1 t2 d (kg)
0004 140 260 147 122 – 248 6 – 38 5 – M5 3.1
0006 140 260 147 122 – 248 6 – 38 5 – M5 3.1
0008 140 260 147 122 – 248 6 – 38 5 – M5 3.2
0010 140 260 147 122 – 248 6 – 38 5 – M5 3.2
0012 140 260 147 122 – 248 6 – 38 5 – M5 3.2
1
0018 140 260 164 122 – 248 6 – 55 5 – M5 3.5
<1>
0021 140 260 164 122 – 248 6 – 55 5 – M5 3.5
0030 140 260 167 122 – 248 6 – 55 5 – M5 4.0
0040 140 260 167 122 – 248 6 – 55 5 – M5 4.0
0056 180 300 187 160 – 284 8 – 75 5 – M5 5.6
0069 220 350 197 192 – 335 8 – 78 5 – M6 8.7
2
0081 220 365 197 192 350 335 8 15 78 5 – M6 9.7
<1>
0110 254 534 258 195 400 385 7.5 134 100 2.3 2.3 M6 23
0138 279 614 258 220 450 435 7.5 164 100 2.3 2.3 M6 28
0169 329 730 283 260 550 535 7.5 180 110 2.3 2.3 M6 41
3
0211 329 730 283 260 550 535 7.5 180 110 2.3 2.3 M6 42
<2>
0250 456 960 330 325 705 680 12.5 255 130 3.2 3.2 M10 83
0312 456 960 330 325 705 680 12.5 255 130 3.2 3.2 M10 88
0360 504 1168 350 370 800 773 13 368 130 4.5 4.5 M12 108
<1> Removing the top protective cover from a IP20/NEMA Type 1 drive voids NEMA Type 1 protection but still keeps IP20 conformity.
<2> Special order required. Contact your Yaskawa sales representative.
Table 3 Dimensions for IP20/NEMA Type 1 Enclosure: 400 V Class

Dimensions (mm)
Drive Model
CIMR-A4A Weight
Figure W H D W1 H0 H1 H2 H3 D1 t1 t2 d (kg)
0002 140 260 147 122 – 248 6 – 38 5 – M5 3.2
0004 140 260 147 122 – 248 6 – 38 5 – M5 3.2
0005 140 260 147 122 – 248 6 – 38 5 – M5 3.2
0007 140 260 164 122 – 248 6 – 55 5 – M5 3.4
0009 140 260 164 122 – 248 6 – 55 5 – M5 3.5
1
0011 140 260 164 122 – 248 6 – 55 5 – M5 3.5
<1>
0018 140 260 167 122 – 248 6 – 55 5 – M5 3.9
0023 140 260 167 122 – 248 6 – 55 5 – M5 3.9
0031 180 300 167 160 – 284 8 – 55 5 – M5 5.4
0038 180 300 187 160 – 284 8 – 75 5 – M5 5.7 Mechanical
Installation
0044 220 350 197 192 – 335 8 – 78 5 – M6 8.3
0058 254 465 258 195 400 385 7.5 65 100 2.3 2.3 M6 23
0072 279 515 258 220 450 435 7.5 65 100 2.3 2.3 M6 27
0088 329 630 258 260 510 495 7.5 120 105 2.3 3.2 M6 39 2
0103 329 630 258 260 510 495 7.5 120 105 2.3 3.2 M6 39
0139 3 329 730 283 260 550 535 7.5 180 110 2.3 2.3 M6 45
0165 <2> 329 730 283 260 550 535 7.5 180 110 2.3 2.3 M6 46
0208 456 960 330 325 705 680 12.5 255 130 3.2 3.2 M10 87
0250 504 1168 350 370 800 773 13 368 130 4.5 4.5 M12 106
0296 504 1168 350 370 800 773 13 368 130 4.5 4.5 M12 112
0362 504 1168 350 370 800 773 13 368 130 4.5 4.5 M12 117
<1> Removing the top protective cover from a IP20/NEMA Type 1 drive voids NEMA Type 1 protection but still keeps IP20 conformity.
<2> Special order required. Contact your Yaskawa sales representative.
IP00 Enclosure Drives

W1 4-d
t2
H1
H
t1
D1
H2
Max 10 W Max 10 D
YEC_common Figure 1
4-d
W1
t2
H1
t1
H2
D1
Max 7.7 W Max 7.7 D
Figure 2
YEC_common
4-d
W1
t2
H1
H
t1
H2
D1
D
Max 6 W Max 6
Figure 3 YEC_common
Table 4 Dimensions for IP00 Enclosure: 200 V Class

Dimensions (mm)
Drive Model
CIMR-A2A Weight
Figure W H D W1 H1 H2 D1 t1 t2 d (kg)
0110 250 400 258 195 385 7.5 100 2.3 2.3 M6 21
0138 275 450 258 220 435 7.5 100 2.3 2.3 M6 25
0169 325 550 283 260 535 7.5 110 2.3 2.3 M6 37
0211 325 550 283 260 535 7.5 110 2.3 2.3 M6 38
1
0250 450 705 330 325 680 12.5 130 3.2 3.2 M10 76
0312 450 705 330 325 680 12.5 130 3.2 3.2 M10 80
0360 500 800 350 370 773 13 130 4.5 4.5 M12 98
0415 500 800 350 370 773 13 130 4.5 4.5 M12 99
Table 5 Dimensions for IP00 Enclosure: 400 V Class

Dimensions (mm)
Drive Model
CIMR-A4A Weight
Figure W H D W1 H1 H2 D1 t1 t2 d (kg)
0058 250 400 258 195 385 7.5 100 2.3 2.3 M6 21
0072 275 450 258 220 435 7.5 100 2.3 2.3 M6 25
0088 325 510 258 260 495 7.5 105 2.3 3.2 M6 36
0103 325 510 258 260 495 7.5 105 2.3 3.2 M6 36
0139 325 550 283 260 535 7.5 110 2.3 2.3 M6 41
1
0165 325 550 283 260 535 7.5 110 2.3 2.3 M6 42
0208 450 705 330 325 680 12.5 130 3.2 3.2 M10 79
0250 500 800 350 370 773 13 130 4.5 4.5 M12 96
0296 500 800 350 370 773 13 130 4.5 4.5 M12 102
0362 500 800 350 370 773 13 130 4.5 4.5 M12 107
0414 2 500 950 370 370 923 13 135 4.5 4.5 M12 125
0515 670 1140 370 440 1110 15 150 4.5 4.5 M12 216
3
0675 670 1140 370 440 1110 15 150 4.5 4.5 M12 221
Mechanical
Installation
3 Electrical Installation
◆ Standard Connection Diagram
Connect the drive and peripheral devices as shown in Figure 10. It is possible to set and run the drive via the digital
operator without connecting digital I/O wiring. This section does not discuss drive operation; Refer to Start-Up
Programming & Operation on page 53 for instructions on operating the drive.
NOTICE: Inadequate wiring could result in damage to the drive. Install adequate branch circuit short circuit protection per applicable
codes. The drive is suitable for circuits capable of delivering not more than 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 240 Vac maximum
(200 V Class) and 480 Vac maximum (400 V Class).
NOTICE: When the input voltage is 440 V or higher or the wiring distance is greater than 100 meters, pay special attention to the
motor insulation voltage or use a drive duty motor. Failure to comply could lead to motor insulation breakdown.
NOTICE: Do not connect AC control circuit ground to drive enclosure. Improper drive grounding can cause control circuit malfunction.
NOTICE: The minimum load for the multi-function relay output MA-MB-MC is 10 mA. If a circuit requires less than 10 mA (reference
value), connect it to a photocoupler output (P1, P2, PC). Improper application of peripheral devices could result in damage to the
photocoupler output of the drive.
Figure 10
<4>
Terminals -, +1, +2, B1, B2 are FU
for connection options. Never DC reactor <1> r1
(option) Thermal relay
connect power supply lines to (option) <2> FV
Wiring sequence should shut off U X s1
these terminals M
power to the drive when a fault Braking resistor FW
2MCCB Jumper t1
output is triggered. <14> (option) <3> Cooling fan
r1
s1
ELCB (MCCB)
t1
Fuse +2 +1 − B1 B2
MC
Three-phase R
R/L1 U
Main Circuit U/T1
power supply S S/L2 V
200 to 240 VT V/T2 M
T/L3
50/60 Hz Drive W/T3
W
If running from a 400 V power
supply, a step-down transformer
is needed to reduce the voltage
YEC_common
to 200 V. Control Circuit <5> Ground
MC MB 2MCCB THRX OFF ON MC
Forward Run / Stop S1 PGB3 TB1
SA
MC
<6> A+
Braking resistor unit A
Thermal relay trip contact Reverse Run / Stop S2
THRX B+ PG
1 2 B
SA External fault S3
TRX Z+
Fault reset S4 Z
MC MA SA
TRX SD
Multi-speed step 1 S5 FE
Fault relay
contact Multi-speed step 2 S6 TB2
Multi-function IP
digtial inputs
(default setting) Jog speed S7 IG
AO
External Baseblock A track monitor
S8 IG
BO
B track monitor
Sink / Source mode IG
selection jumper S3 ZO
SC (default: Sink) <7>
IG
CN5-C
Option board
+24 V connectors CN5-B
MA Fault relay output
CN5-A 250 Vac, max. 1 A
Shield ground terminal MB
30 Vdc, max 1 A
RP Pulse Train Input (max 32 kHz) MC (min. 5 Vdc, 10 mA)
<8>
+V Power supply +10.5 Vdc, max. 20 mA
M1 Multi-function relay output
2 kΩ (During Run)
A1 Analog Input 1 DIP Switch S1 M2 250 Vac, max. 1 A
(Frequency Reference Bias) 30 Vdc, max 1 A
Multi-function 0 to +10 Vdc (20 kΩ) V I (min. 5 Vdc, 10 mA)
analog/ pulse
train inputs
A2 Analog Input 2
(Frequency Reference Bias)
0 to +10 Vdc (20 kΩ) P1 Multi-function photo coupler output 1
4 to 20 mA / 0 to 20 mA (250 Ω) <9> (Zero Speed)
A3 Analog Input 3 48 Vdc, max 50 mA
(Aux. frequency reference)
AC 0 to +10 Vdc (20 kΩ) P2 Multi-function photo coupler output 2
(Speed Agree 1)
0V PC 48 Vdc, max 50 mA
<8> −V Power supply, -10.5 Vdc, max. 20 mA
Termination resistor MP Multi-function pulse train output
(120 Ω, 1/2 W) (Output frequency)
AC 0 to 32 kHz (2.2 kΩ)
DIP
Switch S2 0V
R+
FM
R <10> Multi-function analog output 1
− +
MEMOBUS/Modbus S+ FM (Output frequency)
comm. RS485/422 -10 to +10 Vdc (2mA)
Safety
max. 115.2 kBps S <13>
switch IG
S2 AM Multi-function analog output 2
Safe Disable inputs H1 AC − + (Output current)
<11> AM -10 to +10 Vdc (2mA)
S1 H2 0V <13>
E (G)
Open Wire EDM
jumper
Safety relay / DM+ (Safety Electronic Device Monitor) shielded line
controller <12>
HC twisted-pair shielded line
DM−
control circuit terminal
main circuit terminal
Figure 10 Drive Standard Connection Diagram (example: CIMR-A2A0040) Electrical Installation
<1> Remove the jumper when installing a DC reactor. Models CIMR-A2A0110 through 2A0415 and 4A0058 through 4A0675 come with a
built-in DC reactor.
<2> When installing a dynamic braking option, a thermal relay sequence should also be set up to shut off power to the drive in case overheat
occurs.
<3> The drive’s protection function for the internal braking transistor needs to be disabled (L8-55 = 0) if using a regen unit such as a regen
converter or some type of dynamic braking options (and therefore not the internal braking transistor). If left enabled, a braking resistor fault 3
(rF) may result. Make sure Stall Prevention is disabled (L3-04 = 0) whenever using a regenerative converter, a regenerative unit or a dynamic
braking option. If left enabled, the drive may not stop within the specified deceleration time.
<4> Self-cooling motors do not require wiring that would be necessary with motors using a cooling fan.
<5> Supplying power to the control circuit separately from the main circuit requires a 24 V power supply (option).
<6> For control modes that do not use a motor speed feedback signal, PG option card wiring is not necessary.
<7> This figure shows an example of a sequence input to S1 through S8 using a non-powered relay or an NPN transistor. Use jumper S3 to select
sink or source, and an internal or external power supply.
<8> The maximum output current capacity for the +V and -V terminals on the control circuit is 20 mA. Never short terminals +V, -V, and AC, as
this can cause erroneous operation or damage the drive.
<9> Set DIP switch S1 to select between a voltage or current input signal to terminal A2. The default setting is for current input.
<10> Enable the termination resistor in the last drive in a MEMOBUS network by setting DIP switch S2 to the ON position.
<11> The sink/source setting for the Safe Disable input is the same as with the sequence input. Jumper S3 has the drive set for an external power
supply. When not using the Safe Disable input feature, remove the jumper shorting the input and connect an external power supply. Refer to
Figure 42 for instructions.
<12> Disconnect the wire jumper between H1 - HC and H2 - HC when utilizing the Safe Disable input.
<13> Monitor outputs work with devices such as analog frequency meters, ammeters, voltmeters, and wattmeters. They are not intended for use as
a feedback-type of signal.
<14> Note that if the drive is set to trigger a fault output whenever the fault restart function is activated (L5-02 = 1), then a sequence to interrupt
power when a fault occurs will result in shutting off the power to the drive as the drive attempts to restart itself. The default setting for L5-02
is 0 (fault output not active during restart attempt).
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Do not close the wiring for the control circuit unless the multifunction input terminal
parameters are properly set. Improper sequencing of run/stop circuitry could result in death or serious injury from moving equipment.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Ensure start/stop and safety circuits are wired properly and in the correct state before
energizing the drive. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury from moving equipment. When programmed for 3-Wire
control, a momentary closure on terminal S1 may cause the drive to start.
WARNING! When 3-Wire sequence is used, set the drive to 3-Wire sequence before wiring the control terminals and ensure
parameter b1-17 is set to 0 (drive does not accept a run command at power up (default). If the drive is wired for 3-Wire sequence but
set up for 2-Wire sequence (default) and if parameter b1-17 is set to 1 (drive accepts a Run command at power up), the motor will
rotate in reverse direction at power up of the drive and may cause injury.
WARNING! When the application preset function is executed (or A1-06 is set to any value other than 0) the drive I/O terminal functions
change. This may cause unexpected operation and potential damage to equipment or injury.
WARNING! When using the automatic fault restart function while the wiring is made to shut off the power supply when a drive fault
occurs, make sure the drive is set not to trigger a fault output during fault restart (L5-02=0, default). Otherwise the fault restart function
can not work properly.
◆ Main Circuit Connection Diagram

Refer to diagrams in this section when wiring the drive’s main circuit. Connections may vary based on drive capacity.
The DC power supply for the main circuit also provides power to the control circuit.
NOTICE: Do not use the negative DC bus terminal “-” as a ground terminal. This terminal is at high DC voltage potential. Improper
wiring connections could damage the drive.
■ Three-Phase 200 V Class (CIMR-A2A0004 to 0081)

Three-Phase 400 V Class (CIMR-A4A0002 to 0044)
Figure 11
Braking Resistor Unit

DC reactor (option)
YEC_common (option)
B1 B2
+1
+2
Jumper
− Drive
3 Phase power supply R/L1 U/T1

200 to 240 Vac, 50 to 60 Hz S/L2 V/T2 Motor
380 to 480 Vac, 50 to 60 Hz
T/L3 W/T3
Figure 11 Connecting Main Circuit Terminals
■ Three-Phase 200 V Class (CIMR-A2A0110, 0138)

Three-Phase 400 V Class (CIMR-A4A0058, 0072)
Figure 12

YEC_common (option)
+1 B1 B2
Use terminals +1 and −
for DC power supply
−
Drive
3 Phase power supply R/L1 U/T1

380 to 480 Vac, 50 to 60 Hz
T/L3 W/T3
■ Three-Phase 200 V Class (CIMR-A2A0169 to 0415)

Three-Phase 400 V Class (CIMR-A4A0088 to 0675)
Figure 13

(option)
Use terminals +1 and −
YEC_common for DC power supply
Braking Unit
(option)
+1 +3 −
−
Drive
R/L1 U/T1
3 Phase power supply
380 to 480 Vac, 50 to 60 Hz T/L3 W/T3
◆ Terminal Cover
Follow the procedure below to remove the terminal cover for wiring and to reattach the terminal cover after wiring is
complete.
■ CIMR-A2A0004 to 0081, 4A0002 to 0044 (IP20/NEMA Type 1 Enclosure)
Removing the Terminal Cover
1. Loosen the terminal cover screw.
Figure 14
YEC_common
Figure 14 Removing the Terminal Cover on an IP20/NEMA Type 1 Enclosure Drive
2. Push in on the hook located on the bottom of the terminal cover, and gently pull forward. This should remove the
terminal cover.
Figure 15
Electrical Installation
YEC_common
Figure 15 Removing the Terminal Cover on an IP20/NEMA Type 1 Enclosure Drive
Reattaching the Terminal Cover

Power lines and signal wiring should pass through the opening provided. Refer to Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal on
page 42 and Wiring the Control Circuit Terminal on page 46 for details on wiring.
After all wiring to the drive and other devices is complete, reattach the terminal cover.
Figure 16
Connect ground wiring first,

followed by the main circuit,
and then wire the control circuit.
Power lines and signal wiring
YEC_common
exit through the opening provided.
Figure 16 Reattaching the Terminal Cover on an IP20/NEMA Type 1 Enclosure Drive
■ CIMR-A2A0110 to 0415, 4A0058 to 0675 (IP00 Enclosure)

Removing the Terminal Cover
1. Loosen the screws <1> on the terminal cover, then pull down on the cover.
CAUTION! Do not completely remove the cover screws, just loosen them. If the cover screws are removed completely, the terminal
cover may fall off causing an injury.
<1> The following drives have three screws on the top of terminal cover.
-CIMR-A2A0250 to 2A0415
-CIMR-A4A0208 to 4A0675
Figure 17
YEC_common
Figure 17 Removing the Terminal Cover on an IP00 Enclosure Drive

2. Pull forward on the terminal cover to free it from the drive.
Figure 18
YEC_common
Figure 18 Removing the Terminal Cover on an IP00 Enclosure Drive
Reattaching the Terminal Cover

Once wiring to the terminal board and other devices is complete, double check all connections and finally reattach the
terminal cover. Refer to Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal on page 42 and Wiring the Control Circuit Terminal on
page 46 for details on wiring.
Figure 19
Connect ground wiring first,

YEC_common
followed by the main circuit,
and then wire the control circuit.
Figure 19 Reattaching the Terminal Cover on an IP00 Enclosure Drive
◆ Digital Operator and Front Cover

The digital operator can be detached from the drive for remote operation, or when the front cover has to be opened to
install an option card.
NOTICE: Be sure the digital operator has been removed prior to opening the front cover or reattaching it. Leaving the digital operator
plugged into the drive when removing the front cover can result in erroneous operation caused by a poor connection. Before
reattaching the operator make sure the front cover has been firmly fastened back into place.
■ Removing/Reattaching the Digital Operator

Removing the Digital Operator
While pinching inwards on the hook located on the right side of the digital operator, pull forward and remove the
operator from the drive.
Figure 20
YEC_common
Figure 20 Removing the Digital Operator

Reattaching the Digital Operator
Insert the digital operator into the opening in the front cover while aligning it with the notches on the left side of the
opening. Next press gently on the right side of the operator until it clicks into place. Electrical Installation
Figure 21
YEC_common 3
Figure 21 Reattaching the Digital Operator
■ Removing/Reattaching the Front Cover

Removing the Front Cover
2A0004 to 2A0081 and 4A0002 to 4A0044
After removing the terminal cover and the digital operator, loosen the screw that affixes the front cover (model CIMR-
A2A0056, 4A0031, 4A0038 do not use a screw to affix the front cover). Pinch inwards on hooks found on each side of
the front cover, then pull forward to remove it from the drive.
Figure 22
YEC_common
Figure 22 Remove the Front Cover (2A0004 to 2A0081 and 4A0002 to 4A0044)
2A0110 to 2A0415 and 4A0058 to 4A0675
1. Remove the terminal cover and the digital operator.
2. Loosen the installation screw on the front cover.
3. Use a straight-edge screwdriver to loosen the hooks on each side of the cover that hold it in place.
Figure 23
YEC_common
Hook Hook
Front cover Free hooks on both

installation screw sides of the cover
4. First unhook the left side of the front cover, then swing the left side towards you as shown in the figure below
until the cover comes off.
Figure 24
YEC_common
Reattaching the Front Cover

2A0004 to 2A0081 and 4A0002 to 4A0044
Reverse the instructions given in Remove the Front Cover (2A0004 to 2A0081 and 4A0002 to 4A0044) on page 32 to
reattach the front cover. Pinch inwards on the hooks found on each side of the front cover while guiding it back into the
drive. Make sure it clicks firmly into place.
2A0110 to 2A0415 and 4A0058 to 4A0675
1. Slide the front cover so that the hooks on the top connect to the drive.
Figure 25
YEC_c
ommon
Figure 25 Reattach the Front Cover (2A0110 to 2A0415 and 4A0058 to 4A0675)
2. Once the hooks have connected to the drive, press firmly on the cover to make sure it locks into place.
◆ Top Protective Cover

Drive models CIMR-A2A0004 to 0081 and 4A0002 to 0058 are designed with NEMA Type 1 specifications, and have
a top protective cover on the top. Removing this top protective cover voids the NEMA Type 1 conformance but still
keeps a protection degree in accordance with IP20 enclosure.
■ Removing the Top Protective Cover
Insert the tip of a straight-edge screwdriver into the small openings located on the front edge of the top protective cover.
Gently apply pressure as shown in the figure below to free the cover from the drive.
Note: Removing the top protective cover from a IP20/NEMA Type 1 enclosure drive voids the NEMA Type 1 protection but still keeps
IP20 conformity.
Figure 26
YEC_common
Figure 26 Removing the Top Protective Cover
■ Reattaching the Top Protective Cover

Align the small protruding hooks on the sides of the top protective cover with the corresponding mounting holes on the
top of the drive. Pinch the hooks inward so that the they connect with the mounting holes and fasten the top protective
cover back into place.
Figure 27
Top Protective Cover

Mounting Holes
YEC_common
Figure 27 Reattaching the Top Protective Cover
◆ Main Circuit Wiring

This section describes the functions, specifications, and procedures required to safely and properly wire the main circuit
in the drive.
NOTICE: Do not solder the ends of wire connections to the drive. Soldered wiring connections can loosen over time. Improper wiring
practices could result in drive malfunction due to loose terminal connections.
NOTICE: Do not switch the drive input to start or stop the motor. Frequently switching the drive on and off shortens the lifetime of the
DC bus charge circuit and the DC bus capacitors, and can cause premature drive failures. For the full performance life, refrain from
switching the drive on and off more than once every 30 minutes.
■ Main Circuit Terminal Functions

Table 6 Main Circuit Terminal Functions
Terminal Type
200 V 2A0004 to 2A0081 2A0110, 2A0138 2A0169 to 2A0415
Class Model Function Page
CIMR-
400 V A 4A0002 to 4A0044 4A0058 to 4A0072 4A0088 to 4A0675
Class
R/L1
S/L2 Main circuit power supply input Connects line power to the drive 27
T/L3
U/T1
V/T2 Drive output Connects to the motor 27
W/T3
B1 Available for connecting a braking
Braking resistor not available –
B2 resistor or a braking resistor unit option
+2 • DC reactor connection not available
+1 (+1, +2) (remove the For connection
shorting bar between • of the drive to a DC power supply
• DC power supply • DC power supply
+1 and +2) (terminals +1 and – are not EU or UL
input input (+1, –) –
– • DC power supply approved)
(+1, –) • Braking unit
input • of dynamic braking options
(+1, –) connection (+3, –)
• of a DC reactor
+3 not available
For 200 V class: 100 Ω or less
Grounding terminal 42
For 400 V class: 10 Ω or less
■ Protecting Main Circuit Terminals

Insulation Cap
Use insulation caps when wiring the drive with crimp terminals. Take particular care to ensure that wiring does not touch
neighboring terminals or the surrounding case.
Insulation Barrier
Insulation barriers are packaged with drive models CIMR-A4A0414 through 0675 to provide added protection
between terminals. Yaskawa recommends using the insulation barriers provided to ensure proper wiring. See Figure 28
for instructions on where the insulation barriers should be placed.
Figure 28
Insulation Barrier
Figure 28 Installing insulation barriers
■ Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque

Select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals from Table 7 through Table 8.
Note: 1. Wire gauge recommendations based on drive continuous current ratings (ND) using 75°C 600 Vac vinyl-sheathed wire assuming
ambient temperature within 40°C and wiring distance less than 100 m.
2. Terminals +1, +2, +3, –, B1 and B2 are for connecting optional devices such as a DC reactor or braking resistor. Do not connect other
nonspecific devices to these terminals.
• Consider the amount of voltage drop when selecting wire gauges. Increase the wire gauge when the voltage drop is
greater than 2% of motor rated voltage. Ensure the wire gauge is suitable for the terminal block. Use the following 3
formula to calculate the amount of voltage drop:
Line drop voltage (V) = 3 × wire resistance (Ω/km) × wire length (m) × current (A) × 10-3
• Refer to instruction manual TOBPC72060000 for braking unit or braking resistor unit wire gauges.
• Use terminal +1 and the negative terminal when connecting a braking resistor, regenerative converter, or a regen unit.
• Refer to UL Standards Compliance on page 187 for information on UL compliance.
Three-Phase 200 V Class

Table 7 Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications (Three-Phase 200 V Class)
For Asia <1> For U.S.A <2> For Europe and China <3>
Tightening
Model Recommended Applicable Recommended Applicable Recommended Applicable Screw
Terminal Torque
CIMR-A Gauge Gauge Gauge Gauge Gauge Gauge Size Nxm (lb.in.)
mm2 mm2 AWG, kcmil AWG, kcmil mm2 mm2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2 2 to 5.5 14 14 to 10 2.5 2.5 to 6
2A0004 U/T1, V/T2, W/
2 2 to 5.5 14 14 to 10 2.5 2.5 to 6
2A0006 T3 1.2 to 1.5
M4
2A0008 –, +1, +2 2 2 to 5.5 – 14 to 10 – 2.5 to 6 (10.6 to 13.3)
2A0010 B1, B2 2 2 to 5.5 – 14 to 10 – 2.5 to 6
2 2 to 5.5 10 14 to 10 2.5 2.5 to 6
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2 2 to 5.5 12 14 to 10 2.5 2.5 to 6
U/T1, V/T2, W/
2 2 to 5.5 14 14 to 10 2.5 2.5 to 6
T3 1.2 to 1.5
2A0012 M4
–, +1, +2 2 2 to 5.5 – 14 to 10 – 2.5 to 6 (10.6 to 13.3)
B1, B2 2 2 to 5.5 – 14 to 10 – 2.5 to 6
3.5 2 to 5.5 10 14 to 10 2.5 2.5 to 6
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 3.5 2 to 5.5 10 12 to 10 2.5 2.5 to 6
U/T1, V/T2, W/
3.5 2 to 5.5 10 14 to 10 2.5 2.5 to 6
T3 1.2 to 1.5
2A0018 M4
–, +1, +2 3.5 2 to 5.5 – 14 to 10 – 2.5 to 6 (10.6 to 13.3)
B1, B2 2 2 to 5.5 – 14 to 10 – 2.5 to 6
3.5 2 to 5.5 10 14 to 10 2.5 2.5 to 6
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 5.5 3.5 to 5.5 10 12 to 10 4 2.5 to 6
U/T1, V/T2, W/
3.5 3.5 to 5.5 10 12 to 10 2.5 2.5 to 6
T3 1.2 to 1.5
2A0021 M4
–, +1, +2 5.5 3.5 to 5.5 – 12 to 10 – 4 to 6 (10.6 to 13.3)
B1, B2 2 2 to 5.5 – 14 to 10 – 2.5 to 6
3.5 3.5 to 5.5 10 12 to 10 4 4 to 6
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 14 5.5 to 14 8 10 to 6 6 4 to 16
U/T1, V/T2, W/
8 5.5 to 14 8 10 to 6 6 4 to 16 1.2 to 1.5
T3 M4
(10.6 to 13.3)
2A0030 –, +1, +2 14 5.5 to 14 – 10 to 6 – 6 to 16
B1, B2 3.5 2 to 5.5 – 14 to 10 – 4 to 6
2 to 2.5
5.5 5.5 to 8 8 10 to 8 6 6 to 10 M5
(17.7 to 22.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 14 14 6 8 to 6 10 6 to 16
U/T1, V/T2, W/
14 8 to 14 8 8 to 6 10 6 to 16 1.2 to 1.5
T3 M4
(10.6 to 13.3)
2A0040 –, +1, +2 14 14 – 6 – 16
B1, B2 5.5 3.5 to 5.5 – 12 to 10 – 4 to 6
2 to 2.5
5.5 5.5 to 8 8 10 to 8 10 6 to 10 M5
(17.7 to 22.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 22 14 to 22 4 6 to 4 16 16 to 25
U/T1, V/T2, W/ 4 to 6
14 14 to 22 4 6 to 4 16 16 to 25 M6
T3 (35.4 to 53.1)
–, +1, +2 22 14 to 22 – 6 to 4 – 16 to 25
2A0056
2 to 2.5
B1, B2 14 5.5 to 14 – 10 to 6 – 6 to 10 M5
(17.7 to 22.1)
4 to 6
8 8 to 14 6 8 to 6 16 10 to 16 M6
(35.4 to 53.1)
Tightening
Terminal Torque
mm2 mm2 AWG, kcmil AWG, kcmil mm 2 mm 2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 30 22 to 30 3 4 to 3 25 16 to 25

U/T1, V/T2, W/ 9 to11
22 14 to 30 3 4 to 3 16 16 to 25 M8
T3 (79.7 to 97.4)
–, +1, +2 30 22 to 30 – 4 to 3 – 25
2A0069
2 to 2.5
B1, B2 14 8 to 14 – 8 to 6 – 10 to 16 M5
(17.7 to 22.1)
4 to 6
8 8 to 22 6 6 to 4 16 16 to 25 M6
(35.4 to 53.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 38 30 to 38 2 3 to 2 35 25 to 35
U/T1, V/T2, W/ 9 to11
30 22 to 38 2 3 to 2 25 25 to 35 M8
T3 (79.7 to 97.4)
–, +1, +2 38 30 to 38 – 3 to 2 – 25 to 35
2A0081
2 to 2.5
B1, B2 14 14 – 6 – 16 M5
(17.7 to 22.1)
4 to 6
14 14 to 22 6 6 to 4 16 16 to 25 M6
(35.4 to 53.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 38 30 to 50 1/0 3 to 1/0 35 25 to 50
U/T1, V/T2, W/
38 30 to 50 1/0 3 to 1/0 35 25 to 50
T3 9 to 11
2A0110 M8
–, +1 60 38 to 60 – 2 to 1/0 – 35 to 50 (79.7 to 97.4)
B1, B2 22 14 to 50 – 6 to 1/0 – 16 to 50
14 14 to 38 6 6 to 4 16 16 to 25
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 60 50 to 60 2/0 1 to 2/0 50 35 to 70
U/T1, V/T2, W/
60 50 to 60 2/0 1 to 2/0 50 35 to 70 18 to 23
T3 M10
(159 to 204)
2A0138 –, +1 80 60 to 80 – 1/0 to 3/0 – 50 to 70
B1, B2 30 22 to 60 – 4 to 2/0 – 25 to 70
9 to 11
22 22 to 38 4 4 25 25 M8
(79.7 to 97.4)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 80 60 to 100 4/0 2/0 to 4/0 70 50 to 95
U/T1, V/T2, W/
80 60 to 100 4/0 3/0 to 4/0 70 50 to 95 18 to 23
T3 M10
(159 to 204)
2A0169 –, +1 50 × 2P 50 to 100 – 1 to 4/0 – 35 to 95
+3 60 50 to 100 – 1/0 to 4/0 – 50 to 95
9 to 11
22 22 to 60 4 4 to 2 35 25 to 35 M8
(79.7 to 97.4)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 100 80 to 100 1/0 × 2P 1/0 to 2/0 95 70 to 95
U/T1, V/T2, W/
50 × 2P 50 to 60 1/0 × 2P 1/0 to 2/0 95 70 to 95 18 to 23
T3 M10
(159 to 204) Electrical Installation
2A0211 –, +1 50 × 2P 50 to 100 – 1 to 4/0 – 35 to 95
+3 80 60 to 100 – 1/0 to 4/0 – 50 to 95
9 to 11
22 22 to 60 4 4 to 1/0 50 25 to 50 M8
(79.7 to 97.4)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 80 × 2P 38 to 150 3/0 × 2P 3/0 to 300 95 × 2P 95 to 150
U/T1, V/T2, W/ 32 to 40
80 × 2P 38 to 150 3/0 × 2P 3/0 to 300 95 × 2P 95 to 150 M12
T3 (283 to 354) 3
–, +1 80 × 2P 80 to 150 – 3/0 to 300 – 70 to 150
2A0250
18 to 23
+3 80 × 2P 30 to 150 – 2 to 300 – 35 to 150 M10
(159 to 204)
32 to 40
22 22 to 150 3 3 to 300 95 95 to 150 M12
(283 to 354)
Tightening
Terminal Torque

U/T1, V/T2, W/ 32 to 40
80 × 2P 70 to 200 3/0 × 2P 3/0 to 300 95 × 2P 95 to 150 M12
T3 (283 to 354)
–, +1 150 × 2P 80 to 150 – 3/0 to 300 – 70 to 150
2A0312
18 to 23
+3 80 × 2P 80 to 150 – 3/0 to 300 – 70 to 150 M10
(159 to 204)
32 to 40
38 38 to 150 2 2 to 300 95 95 to 150 M12
(283 to 354)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 100 × 2P 80 to 325 250 × 2P 4/0 to 600 240 95 to 300
U/T1, V/T2, W/ 32 to 40
100 × 2P 80 to 325 4/0 × 2P 4/0 to 600 240 95 to 300 M12
T3 (283 to 354)
–, +1 150 × 2P 125 to 325 – 250 to 600 – 125 to 300
2A0360
18 to 23
+3 80 × 2P 80 to 325 – 3/0 to 600 – 70 to 300 M10
(159 to 204)
32 to 40
38 38 to 200 1 1 to 350 120 120 to 240 M12
(283 to 354)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 125 × 2P 100 to 325 350 × 2P 250 to 600 120 × 2P 95 to 300
U/T1, V/T2, W/ 32 to 40
125 × 2P 125 to 325 300 × 2P 300 to 600 300 95 to 300 M12
T3 (283 to 354)
–, +1 200 × 2P 150 to 325 – 300 to 600 – 150 to 300
2A0415
18 to 23
+3 100 × 2P 80 to 325 – 3/0 to 600 – 70 to 300 M10
(159 to 204)
32 to 40
60 60 to 200 1 1 to 350 120 120 to 240 M12
(283 to 354)
<1> Gauges listed here are for use in Japan.
<2> Gauges listed here are for use in the United States.
<3> Gauges listed here are for use in Europe and China.
Table 8 Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications (Three-Phase 400 V Class)
Tightening
Terminal Torque
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2 2 to 5.5 14 14 to 10 2.5 2.5 to 6

U/T1, V/T2, W/
2 2 to 5.5 14 14 to 10 2.5 2.5 to 6
4A0002 T3 1.2 to 1.5
M4
4A0004 –, +1, +2 2 2 to 5.5 – 14 to 10 – 2.5 to 6 (10.6 to 13.3)
B1, B2 2 2 to 5.5 – 14 to 10 – 2.5 to 6
2 2 to 5.5 12 14 to 12 2.5 2.5 to 4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2 2 to 5.5 14 14 to 10 2.5 2.5 to 6
U/T1, V/T2, W/
4A0005 2 2 to 5.5 14 14 to 10 2.5 2.5 to 6
T3 1.2 to 1.5
4A0007 M4
–, +1, +2 2 2 to 5.5 – 14 to 10 – 2.5 to 6 (10.6 to 13.3)
4A0009
B1, B2 2 2 to 5.5 – 14 to 10 – 2.5 to 6
3.5 2 to 5.5 10 14 to 10 2.5 2.5 to 6
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2 2 to 5.5 12 14 to 10 2.5 2.5 to 6
U/T1, V/T2, W/
2 2 to 5.5 14 14 to 10 2.5 2.5 to 6
T3 1.2 to 1.5
4A0011 M4
–, +1, +2 2 2 to 5.5 – 14 to 10 – 2.5 to 6 (10.6 to 13.3)
B1, B2 2 2 to 5.5 – 14 to 10 – 2.5 to 6
3.5 2 to 5.5 10 14 to 10 2.5 2.5 to 6
Tightening
Terminal Torque
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 3.5 2 to 14 10 12 to 6 2.5 2.5 to 16

U/T1, V/T2, W/
3.5 2 to 14 10 12 to 6 2.5 2.5 to 16 1.2 to 1.5
T3 M4
(10.6 to 13.3)
4A0018 –, +1, +2 3.5 2 to 14 – 12 to 6 – 4 to 16
B1, B2 2 2 to 5.5 – 12 to 10 – 4 to 6
2 to 2.5
3.5 2 to 5.5 10 14 to 10 2.5 2.5 to 6 M5
(17.7 to 22.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 5.5 3.5 to 14 10 10 to 6 4 2.5 to 16
U/T1, V/T2, W/
5.5 3.5 to 14 10 10 to 6 4 2.5 to 16 1.2 to 1.5
T3 M4
(10.6 to 13.3)
4A0023 –, +1, +2 5.5 3.5 to 14 – 12 to 6 – 4 to 16
B1, B2 2 2 to 5.5 – 12 to 10 – 4 to 6
2 to 2.5
3.5 3.5 to 5.5 10 12 to 10 4 4 to 6 M5
(17.7 to 22.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 14 5.5 to 14 8 8 to 6 6 6 to 16
U/T1, V/T2, W/ 2 to 2.5
8 5.5 to 8 8 10 to 6 6 6 to 16 M5
T3 (17.7 to 22.1)
–, +1, +2 14 5.5 to 14 – 10 to 6 – 6 to 16
4A0031
2 to 2.5
B1, B2 3.5 2 to 8 – 10 to 8 – 6 to 10 M5
(17.7 to 22.1)
4 to 6
5.5 5.5 to 8 8 10 to 8 6 6 to 10 M6
(35.4 to 53.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 14 14 6 8 to 6 10 10 to 16
U/T1, V/T2, W/ 2 to 2.5
14 8 to 14 8 8 to 6 6 6 to 16 M5
T3 (17.7 to 22.1)
–, +1, +2 14 14 – 6 – 6 to 16
4A0038
2 to 2.5
B1, B2 5.5 3.5 to 8 – 10 to 8 – 6 to 10 M5
(17.7 to 22.1)
4 to 6
8 5.5 to 14 6 10 to 6 10 6 to 16 M6
(35.4 to 53.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 14 14 to 22 6 6 to 4 16 16 to 25
U/T1, V/T2, W/ 4 to 6
14 14 to 22 6 6 to 4 16 16 to 25 M6
T3 (35.4 to 53.1)
–, +1, +2 14 14 to 22 – 6 to 4 – 16 to 25
4A0044
2 to 2.5
B1, B2 8 5.5 to 8 – 10 to 8 – 6 to 10 M5
(17.7 to 22.1)
4 to 6
8 8 to 14 6 8 to 6 16 10 to 16 M6
(35.4 to 53.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 14 14 4 6 to 4 16 10 to 16
U/T1, V/T2, W/ Electrical Installation
14 14 4 6 to 4 16 10 to 16
T3 9 to 11
4A0058 M8
–, +1 22 14 to 38 – 6 to 1 – 16 to 35 (79.7 to 97.4)
B1, B2 14 8 to 14 – 8 to 4 – 10 to 16
8 8 to 14 6 8 to 6 16 10 to 16
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 22 14 to 22 3 4 to 3 16 16 to 25
U/T1, V/T2, W/
22 14 to 22 3 4 to 3 25 16 to 25 3
T3 9 to 11
4A0072 M8
–, +1 30 22 to 38 – 4 to 1 – 25 to 35 (79.7 to 97.4)
B1, B2 14 14 to 22 – 6 to 3 – 16 to 25
14 14 to 22 6 6 16 16 to 25
Tightening
Terminal Torque
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 30 22 to 50 2 3 to 1/0 25 16 to 50

U/T1, V/T2, W/
30 22 to 50 2 3 to 1/0 25 25 to 50
T3 9 to 11
4A0088 M8
–, +1 38 30 to 50 – 3 to 1/0 – 25 to 50 (79.7 to 97.4)
+3 22 14 to 50 – 6 to 1/0 – 16 to 50
22 14 to 22 4 6 to 4 16 16 to 25
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 38 30 to 50 1/0 2 to 1/0 35 25 to 50
U/T1, V/T2, W/
38 30 to 50 1 2 to 1/0 35 25 to 50
T3 9 to 11
4A0103 M8
–, +1 60 30 to 50 – 3 to 1/0 – 25 to 50 (79.7 to 97.4)
+3 30 22 to 50 – 4 to 1/0 – 25 to 50
22 14 to 22 4 6 to 4 16 16 to 25
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 60 38 to 100 3/0 1/0 to 4/0 50 35 to 95
U/T1, V/T2, W/
60 50 to 100 2/0 1/0 to 4/0 50 35 to 95
T3 18 to 23
4A0139 M10
–, +1 100 60 to 100 – 1/0 to 4/0 – 50 to 95 (159 to 204)
+3 50 30 to 100 – 3 to 4/0 – 25 to 95
22 22 4 4 25 25
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 80 60 to 100 4/0 3/0 to 4/0 70 50 to 95
U/T1, V/T2, W/
80 80 to 100 4/0 3/0 to 4/0 70 70 to 95
T3 18 to 23
4A0165 M10
–, +1 50 × 2P 50 to 100 – 1 to 4/0 – 35 to 95 (159 to 204)
+3 60 50 to 100 – 1/0 to 4/0 – 50 to 95
22 22 to 30 4 4 to 2 35 25 to 35
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 150 30 to 150 300 2 to 300 95 35 to 95
U/T1, V/T2, W/
150 30 to 150 300 2 to 300 95 35 to 95
T3 18 to 23
4A0208 M10
–, +1 80 × 2P 38 to 150 – 1 to 250 – 35 to 150 (159 to 204)
+3 80 22 to 80 – 3 to 3/0 – 25 to 70
22 22 to 150 4 4 to 300 50 50 to 150
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 150 38 to 325 400 1 to 600 120 95 to 300
U/T1, V/T2, W/
150 38 to 325 400 1/0 to 600 120 95 to 300
T3 18 to 23
4A0250 M10
–, +1 200 80 to 325 – 3/0 to 600 – 70 to 300 (159 to 204)
+3 125 38 to 325 – 1 to 325 – 35 to 300
22 22 to 200 2 2 to 350 70 70 to 240
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 200 80 to 325 500 2/0 to 600 185 95 to 300
U/T1, V/T2, W/ 32 to 40
200 80 to 325 500 2/0 to 600 185 95 to 300 M12
T3 (283 to 354)
–, +1 325 80 to 325 – 3/0 to 600 – 70 to 300
4A0296
18 to 23
+3 150 38 to 325 – 1 to 325 – 35 to 300 M10
(159 to 204)
32 to 40
30 30 to 200 2 2 to 350 95 95 to 240 M12
(283 to 354)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 250 80 to 325 4/0 × 2P 3/0 to 600 240 95 to 300
U/T1, V/T2, W/ 32 to 40
250 80 to 325 4/0 × 2P 3/0 to 600 240 95 to 300 M12
T3 (283 to 354)
–, +1 325 100 to 325 – 4/0 to 600 – 95 to 300
4A0362
18 to 23
+3 200 80 to 325 – 3/0 to 600 – 70 to 300 M10
(159 to 204)
32 to 40
30 30 to 200 1 1 to 350 120 120 to 240 M12
(283 to 354)
Tightening
Terminal Torque
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 100 × 2P 80 to 150 300 × 2P 4/0 to 300 95 × 2P 95 to 150

U/T1, V/T2, W/
125 × 2P 80 to 150 300 × 2P 4/0 to 300 95 × 2P 95 to 150
T3 32 to 40
4A0414 M12
–, +1 150 × 2P 80 to 150 – 3/0 to 300 – 70 to 150 (283 to 354)
+3 80 × 2P 80 to 150 – 3/0 to 300 – 70 to 150
38 38 to 100 1 1 to 3/0 95 35 to 95
U/T1, V/T2, W/
150 × 2P 80 to 150 4/0 × 4P 3/0 to 300 150 × 2P 95 to 150
T3 32 to 40
4A0515 M12
–, +1 60 × 4P 60 to 150 – 1/0 to 300 – 70 to 150 (283 to 354)
+3 100 × 2P 60 to 150 – 1/0 to 300 – 70 to 150
60 50 to 150 1/0 1/0 to 300 150 50 to 150
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 80 × 4P 80 to 150 300 × 4P 4/0 to 300 95 × 4P 95 to 150
U/T1, V/T2, W/
80 × 4P 80 to 150 300 × 4P 4/0 to 300 95 × 4P 95 to 150
T3 32 to 40
4A0675 M12
–, +1 125 × 4P 60 to 150 – 1/0 to 300 – 70 to 150 (283 to 354)
+3 60 × 4P 60 to 150 – 1/0 to 300 – 70 to 150
60 70 to 150 2/0 2/0 to 300 95 × 2P 60 to 150
<1> Gauges listed here are for use in Japan.
<2> Gauges listed here are for use in the United States.
<3> Gauges listed here are for use in Europe and China.
■ Main Circuit Terminal and Motor Wiring

This section outlines the various steps, precautions, and checkpoints for wiring the main circuit terminals and motor
terminals.
NOTICE: When connecting the motor to the drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3, the phase order for the drive and motor
should match. Failure to comply with proper wiring practices may cause the motor to run in reverse if the phase order is backward.
NOTICE: Do not connect phase-advancing capacitors or LC/RC noise filters to the output circuits. Failure to comply could result in
damage to the drive, phase-advancing capacitors, LC/RC noise filters or ground fault circuit interrupters.
NOTICE: Do not connect the AC power line to the output motor terminals of the drive. Failure to comply could result in death or serious
injury by fire as a result of drive damage from line voltage application to output terminals.
Cable Length Between Drive and Motor

Voltage drop along the motor cable may cause reduced motor torque when the wiring between the drive and the motor is
too long, especially at low frequency output. This can also be a problem when motors are connected in parallel with a
fairly long motor cable. Drive output current will increase as the leakage current from the cable increases. An increase in
leakage current may trigger an overcurrent situation and weaken the accuracy of the current detection.
Adjust the drive carrier frequency according to Table 9. If the motor wiring distance exceeds 100 m because of the
system configuration, reduce the ground currents. Refer to C6-02: Carrier Frequency Selection on page 73.
Table 9 Cable Length Between Drive and Motor
Cable Length 50 m or less 100 m or less Greater than 100 m
Carrier Frequency 15 kHz or less 5 kHz or less 2 kHz or less
3
Note: When setting carrier frequency in a drive running multiple motors, calculate the cable length as the total distance of wiring to all
motors that are connected.
Ground Wiring
Follow the precautions to wire the ground for one drive or a series of drives.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and
minimize the length of the ground wire. Improper equipment grounding may cause dangerous electrical potentials on equipment
chassis, which could result in death or serious injury.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Be sure to ground the drive ground terminal (200 V class: Ground to 100 Ω or less, 400 V class:
Ground to 10 Ω or less). Improper equipment grounding could result in death or serious injury by contacting ungrounded electrical
equipment.
NOTICE: Do not share the ground wire with other devices such as welding machines or large-current electrical equipment. Improper
equipment grounding could result in drive or equipment malfunction due to electrical interference.
NOTICE: When using more than one drive, ground multiple drives according to instructions. Improper equipment grounding could
result in abnormal operation of drive or equipment.
Refer to Figure 29 when using multiple drives. Do not loop the ground wire.
Figure 29
OK OK Not Good
Figure 29 Multiple Drive Wiring

Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Shut off the power supply to the drive before wiring the main circuit terminals. Failure to comply
may result in death or serious injury.
Wire the main circuit terminals after the terminal board has been properly grounded.
Models CIMR-A2A0004 through 0081 and 4A0002 through 0044 have a cover placed over the DC bus and braking
circuit terminals prior to shipment to help prevent miswiring. Cut away covers as needed for terminals using wire cutters.
Figure 30
A – Protecting Cover
Figure 30 Protecting Cover to Prevent Miswiring (CIMR-A2A0056)
Main Circuit Connection Diagram
Refer to Main Circuit Connection Diagram on page 28 when wiring terminals on the drive’s main power circuit.
WARNING! Fire Hazard. The braking resistor connection terminals are B1 and B2. Do not connect braking resistors to any other
terminals. Improper wiring connections could cause the braking resistor to overheat and cause death or serious injury by fire. Failure to
comply may result in damage to the braking circuit or drive.
■ Control Circuit Terminal Block Functions

Drive parameters determine which functions apply to the multi-function digital inputs (S1 to S8), multi-function digital
outputs (M1, M2), multi-function photocoupler outputs (P1, P2), multi-function analog inputs (A1 to A3), and multi-
function analog monitor output (FM, AM). The default setting is listed next to each terminal in Figure 10.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Always check the operation and wiring of control circuits after being wired. Operating a drive
with untested control circuits could result in death or serious injury.
WARNING! Confirm the drive I/O signals and external sequence before starting test run. Setting parameter A1-06 may change the I/O
terminal function automatically from the factory setting. Refer to Application Selection on page 63. Failure to comply may result in
death or serious injury.
Input Terminals
Table 10 lists the input terminals on the drive. Text in parenthesis indicates the default setting for each multi-function
input.
Table 10 Control Circuit Input Terminals

Type No. Terminal Name (Function) Function (Signal Level) Default Setting Page
Multi-function input 1 (Closed: Forward run,
S1
Open: Stop)
Multi-function input 2 (Closed: Reverse run,
S2
Open: Stop)
S3 Multi-function input 3 (External fault, N.O.) Photocoupler
S4 Multi-function input 4 (Fault reset) 24 Vdc, 8 mA
Multi- Set the S3 jumper to select between sinking, sourcing mode, and
Function Multi-function input 5 (Multi-step speed 154
S5 the power supply. Refer to Sinking/Sourcing Mode Switch for Digital Inputs
Digital Inputs reference 1)
on page 48.
Multi-function input 6 (Multi-step speed
S6
reference 2)
S7 Multi-function input 7 (Jog reference)
S8 Multi-function input 8 (External baseblock)
SC Multi-function input common Multi-function input common
H1 Safe Disable input 1 24 Vdc, 8 mA
One or both open: Output disabled
Both closed: Normal operation
Internal impedance: 3.3 kΩ
Off time of at least 1 ms
Safe Disable Disconnect the wire jumpers shorting terminals H1, H2, and HC
H2 Safe Disable input 2 191
Inputs to use the Safe Disable inputs. Set the S3 jumper to select between
sinking, sourcing mode, and the power supply as explained for
multi-function input terminals in Sinking/Sourcing Mode Switch for
Digital Inputs on page 48. <1>
HC Safe Disable function common Safe disable function common

Input frequency range: 0 to 32 kHz
Multi-function pulse train input (Frequency Signal Duty Cycle: 30 to 70% 161
RP
reference) High level: 3.5 to 13.2 Vdc, low level: 0.0 to 0.8 Vdc 189
Input impedance: 3 kΩ
+V Power supply for analog inputs 10.5 Vdc (max allowable current 20 mA) 189
-V Power supply for analog inputs -10.5 Vdc (max allowable current 20 mA) –
Multi-function analog input 1 (Frequency
Analog Inputs A1 -10 to 10 Vdc, 0 to 10 Vdc (input impedance: 20 kΩ) 65
reference bias)
/ Pulse Train
-10 to 10 Vdc, 0 to 10 Vdc (input impedance: 20 kΩ)
Input 65
Multi-function analog input 2 (Frequency 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA (input impedance: 250 Ω)
A2 66
reference bias) Voltage or current input must be selected by DIP switch S1 and
85
H3-09
Multi-function analog input 3 (auxiliary
A3 -10 to 10 Vdc, 0 to 10 Vdc (input impedance: 20 kΩ) 65
frequency reference)
AC Frequency reference common 0V 65
E (G) Ground for shielded lines and option cards – –
<1> Setting jumper S3 for an external power supply makes the wire link between terminals H1, H2, and H2 ineffective. Remove the wire link and Electrical Installation
connect an external power supply that can supply terminals H1, H2, and HC continuously.
Output Terminals
Table 11 lists the output terminals on the drive. Text in parenthesis indicates the default setting for each multi-function
output.
Table 11 Control Circuit Output Terminals
Type No. Terminal Name (Function) Function (Signal Level) Default Setting Page
MA N.O.
30 Vdc, 10 mA to 1 A; 250 Vac, 10 mA to 1 A
Fault Relay MB N.C. output 81
Minimum load: 5 Vdc, 10 mA
MC Fault output common
Multi- M1
Function 30 Vdc, 10 mA to 1 A; 250 Vac, 10 mA to 1 A
Multi-function digital output (During run) 81
Digital M2 Minimum load: 5 Vdc, 10 mA
Output <1>
Multi- P1 Photocoupler output 1 (Zero speed)
Function P2 Photocoupler output 2 (Speed agree 1) 48 Vdc, 2 to 50 mA <2> 81
Photocoupler
Output PC Photocoupler output common
MP Pulse train output (Output frequency) 32 kHz (max) 161
Monitor FM Analog monitor output 1 (Output frequency)

-10 to +10 Vdc or 0 to +10 Vdc 160
Output AM Analog monitor output 2 (Output current)
AC Monitor common 0V –
Safety DM+ Safety monitor output
Outputs status of Safe Disable function. Closed when both
Monitor 191
DM- Safety monitor output common Safe Disable channels are closed. Up to +48 Vdc 50 mA
Output
<1> Refrain from assigning functions to terminals M1 and M2 that involve frequent switching, as doing so may shorten relay performance life.
Switching life is estimated at 200,000 times (assumes 1 A, resistive load).
<2> Connect a flywheel diode as shown in the Figure 31 when driving a reactive load such as a relay coil. Make sure the diode rating is greater than
the circuit voltage.
Figure 31
C
A D
YEC_common
A – External power, 48 V max. C – Coil

B – Suppression diode D – 50 mA or less
Figure 31 Connecting a Suppression Diode
Serial Communication Terminals
Table 12 Control Circuit Terminals: Serial Communications
Type No. Signal Name Function (Signal Level)
R+ Communications input (+) RS-485/422
R- Communications input (-) MEMOBUS/Modbus communication: Use MEMOBUS/Modbus
MEMOBUS/Modbus a RS-485 or RS-422 cable to connect the communication
Communication S+ Communications output (+) drive. protocol
<1>
S- Communications output (-) 115.2 kbps (max.)
IG Shield ground 0V
<1> Enable the termination resistor in the last drive in a MEMOBUS network by setting DIP switch S2 to the ON position. For more information on
the termination resistor, see Control I/O Connections on page 48.
■ Terminal Configuration
Control circuit terminals should are arranged as shown in Figure 32.
Figure 32
A B C YEC_common
DM− S−
DM+ S+
H2 R−
H1 R+ MP
HC IG RP E
E(G) FM AC AM P1 P2 PC SC MA MB MC
SC A1 A2 A3 +V AC -V M1 M2 E(G)
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8
A – Terminal Block (TB 6) D – Terminal Block (TB 1)

B – Terminal Block (TB 5) E – Terminal Block (TB 2)
C – Terminal Block (TB 4)
Figure 32 Control Circuit Terminal Arrangement
Terminal board arrangement appears below. The exact location of the labeling may vary by model.
Figure 33
YEC_common
Inside of the Terminal Cover Under the Terminal Board
(CIMR-A2A0004 to 2A0081, 4A0002 to 4A0044) (CIMR-A2A0110 to 2A0415, 4A0072 to 4A0675)
Figure 33 Control Circuit Terminal Arrangement
Wire Size and Torque Specifications

Select appropriate wire type and gauges from Table 13. For simpler and more reliable wiring, use crimp ferrules on the
wire ends. Refer to Table 14 for ferrule terminal types and sizes.
Table 13 Wire Gauges and Torque Specifications
Bare Wire Terminal Ferrule-Type Terminal
Tightening
Terminal Screw Torque Applicable wire Recomm. Applicable wire
Terminal size size Recomm.
Block Size Nxm mm2 Wire Type
(lb.in.) mm2 mm2 mm2 (AWG)
(AWG)
(AWG) (AWG)
FM, AC, AM, P1,
P2, PC, SC, A1,
0.8 to 1.0 0.5 to 2 0.75
A2, A3, +V, -V, M3.5
(7.1 to 8.6) (20 to 14) (18)
TB1, TB2 S1-S8, MA, MB, – –
MC, M1, M2
0.8 to 1.0 0.5 to 2 1.25 Shielded line,
E (G) M3.5
(7.1 to 8.6) (20 to 14) (12) etc.
Standard 0.25 to
HC, H1, H2,
1.0
TB4, TB5, DM+, DM-, IG, 0.22 to 0.25 0.75 0.25 to 0.5 0.5
M2 (24 to 17)
TB6 R+, R-, S+, S-, RP, (1.9 to 2.2) (18) (24 to 20) (20)
Single 0.25 to 1.5
MP
(24 to 16)
Ferrule-Type Wire Terminals

Prepare wire ends with insulated sleeves before connecting to the drive. See Table 14 for dimensions. Yaskawa
recommends CRIMPFOX ZA-3, a crimping tool manufactured by PHOENIX CONTACT.
Figure 34
d1
6 mm
YEC_common
L
d2
Figure 34 Ferrule Dimensions

Table 14 Ferrule Terminal Types and Sizes
Size mm2 (AWG) Type L (mm) d1 (mm) d2 (mm) Manufacturer
0.25 (24) AI 0.25-6YE 10.5 0.8 2
0.34 (22) AI 0.34-6TQ 10.5 0.8 2 PHOENIX CONTACT
0.5 (20) AI 0.5-6WH 14 1.1 2.5
■ Wiring the Control Circuit Terminal

This section describes the proper procedures and preparations for wiring the control terminals.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not remove covers or touch the circuit boards while the power is on. Failure to comply could
result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE: Separate control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring (terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, -, +1, +2) and
other high-power lines. Improper wiring practices could result in drive malfunction due to electrical interference.
NOTICE: Separate wiring for digital output terminals MA, MB and MC from wiring to other control circuit lines. Improper wiring
practices could result in drive or equipment malfunction or nuisance trips.
NOTICE: Use a class 2 power supply (UL standard) when connecting to the control terminals. Improper application of peripheral
devices could result in drive performance degradation due to improper power supply.
NOTICE: Insulate shields with tape or shrink tubing to prevent contact with other signal lines and equipment. Improper wiring practices
could result in drive or equipment malfunction due to short circuit.
NOTICE: Connect the shield of shielded cable to the appropriate ground terminal. Improper equipment grounding could result in drive
or equipment malfunction or nuisance trips.
Wire the control circuit only after terminals have been properly grounded and main circuit wiring is complete. Refer to
Figure 35 for details. Prepare the ends of the control circuit wiring as shown in Figure 37. Refer to Wire Size and
Torque Specifications on page 46.
NOTICE: Do not tighten screws beyond the specified tightening torque. Failure to comply may result in erroneous operation, damage
the terminal block, or cause a fire.
NOTICE: Use shielded twisted-pair cables as indicated to prevent operating faults. Improper wiring practices could result in drive or
equipment malfunction due to electrical interference.
Connect control wires as shown in the following figure:

Figure 35
B
A
Preparing wire D
terminal ends
C
YEC_common
TB6 TB5 TB4
A – Loosen screw to insert wire. C – Avoid fraying wire strands when stripping
Wire in the following order: insulation from wire. Strip length 5.5 mm.
TB4, TB5, TB6
B – Single wire or stranded wire D – Blade depth of 0.4 mm or less
Blade width of 2.5 mm or less
Figure 35 Terminal Board Wiring Guide
Use the space above TB2 to wire TB4 through TB6 as illustrated in Figure 36.
Figure 36
YEC_common
Figure 36 Terminal Board Wiring
When setting the frequency by analog reference from an external potentiometer, use shielded twisted-pair wires (treating
wire ends as shown in Figure 37 and connect the shield to the ground terminal of the drive.
Figure 37
F C
A D
3
B E
A – Drive side D – Control device side

B – Connect shield to ground terminal of E – Shield sheath (insulate with tape)
drive.
C – Insulation F – Shield
Figure 37 Preparing the Ends of Shielded Cables
NOTICE: The signal lines between the drive and the operator station or peripheral equipment should not exceed 50 meters when
using an analog signal from a remote source to supply the frequency reference. Failure to comply could result in poor system
performance.
◆ Control I/O Connections

■ Sinking/Sourcing Mode Switch for Digital Inputs
Set jumper S3 to select between sinking/sourcing mode, and internal or external power supply. Signal levels are the same
for terminals S1 through S8 and the safety inputs. The drive is preset to sinking mode.
Figure 38
YEC_common
Figure 38 Jumper S3
Sink Mode (0 V Common), Internal Power Supply
When controlling the digital inputs by NPN transistors (0 V common/sinking mode) or contacts using the drive internal
power supply, position the jumper S3 for sinking as shown in Figure 39.
Figure 39
S7
S8
YEC_common
IP24 V
SC (24 V)
Figure 39 Sinking Mode (0 V Common), Internal Power Supply

Source Mode (+24 V Common), Internal Power Supply
When controlling digital inputs by PNP transistors (+24 V common/sourcing mode) or contact inputs using the drive
internal power supply, set jumper S3 for sourcing as shown in Figure 40.
Figure 40
S7
S8
IP24 V
SC (24 V)
YEC_common
Figure 40 Source Mode (+24 V Common), Internal Power Supply
Sink/Source Mode, External Power Supply

When using an external voltage source for controlling the digital inputs, set jumper S3 as shown in Figure 41. Here, the
inputs can be used for either sinking or sourcing.
Figure 41
YEC_common
S7 S7
S8 S8
IP24 V IP24 V
SC (24 V) SC (24 V)
+24 V +24 V
Source Mode (+24 V Common) External Power Supply Sink Mode (0 V Common) External Power Supply
Figure 41 Sink/Source Mode, External Power Supply

Power Supply Inputs Instead of the Safe Disable Feature
Refer to Figure 42 to wire the input terminals for an external power supply instead of the Safe Disable feature.
Figure 42
S8 S8
IP24 V IP24 V
SC (24 V) SC (24 V)
+24 V +24 V
H1 H1
H2 H2
HC HC
YEC_common
Source Mode Sink Mode
Figure 42 Power Supply Inputs Instead of the Safe Disable Feature
■ Using the Pulse Train Output

The pulse train output terminal MP can either supply power but can also be used with external power supply. Peripheral
devices should be connected in accordance with the specifications listed below. Failure to do so can cause unexpected
drive operation, and can damage the drive or connected circuits.
Using Power from the Pulse Output Terminal (Source Mode)
The high voltage level of the pulse output terminal depends on the load impedance.
Load Impedance RL (kΩ) Output Voltage VMP (V) (insulated)
1.5 kΩ 5V
4 kΩ 8V
10 kΩ 10 V 3
Note: The load resistance needed in order to get a certain high level voltage VMP can be calculated by: RL = VMP 2 / (12 - VMP)
Figure 43
Load Impedance
MP
VMP RL
AC
Figure 43 Pulse Output Connection Using Internal Voltage Supply
Using External Power Supply (Sink Mode)

The high voltage level of the pulse output signal depends on the external voltage applied. The voltage must be between
12 and 15 Vdc. The load resistance must be adjusted so that the current is lower than 16 mA.
External Power Supply (V) Load Impedance (kΩ)

12 to 15 Vdc ±10% 1.0 kΩ or higher
Figure 44
External Power Supply
Load Impedance
MP
Sink Current
AC
Figure 44 Pulse Output Connection Using External Voltage Supply
◆ Terminal A2 Analog Input Signal Selection

■ Terminal A2 Input Signal Selection
Terminal A2 can be used to input either a voltage or a current signal.
When using input A2 as a voltage input, set DIP switch S1 to “V” (left position) and set parameter H3-09 to 0 (0 to 10
Vdc) or to 1 (-10 to 10 Vdc).
To use current input at terminal A2, set the DIP switch S1 to “I” (default setting) and H3-09 = 2 or 3 (4 to 20 mA or 0 to
20 mA).
To set the DIP switch on the terminal board, use an appropriate sized tool with a tip of approximately 0.8 mm in width.
Figure 45
Dip Switch S1
V I
YEC_common
Figure 45 DIP Switch S1

Note: If terminals A1 and A2 are both set for frequency bias (H3-02 = 0 and H3-10 = 0), both input values will be combined to create
the frequency reference.
Table 15 DIP Switch S1 Settings
Setting Description
V (left position) Voltage input (-10 to +10 V)
I (right position) (default) Current input (4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA): default setting
Table 16 Parameter H3-09 Details
Setting Default
No. Parameter Name Description Range Setting
Selects the signal level for terminal A2.
0: 0 to 10 Vdc
H3-09 Terminal A2 signal level selection 1: -10 to 10 Vdc 0 to 3 2
2: 4 to 20 mA
3: 0 to 20 mA
◆ Connect to a PC
This drive is equipped with a USB port (type-B).
The drive can connect to the USB port of a PC using a USB 2.0, AB type cable (sold separately). DriveWizard Plus can
then be used to monitor drive performance and manage parameter settings. Contact Yaskawa for more information on
DriveWizard Plus.
Figure 46
USB Cable
(Type-AB)
(Type-B) (Type-A)
PC
YEC_common
Figure 46 Connecting to a PC (USB)
◆ Wiring Checklist
No. Item Page

Drive, peripherals, option cards
1 Check drive model number to ensure receipt of correct model. 17
2 Make sure you have the correct braking resistors, DC reactors, noise filters, and other peripheral devices. –
3 Check the option card model number. –
Installation area and physical setup
4 Ensure that the area surrounding the drive complies with specifications. 19
Power supply voltage, output voltage Electrical Installation
5 The voltage from the power supply should be within the input voltage specification range of the drive. 75
17
6 The voltage rating for the motor should match the drive output specifications.
172
17
7 Verify that the drive is properly sized to run the motor.
172
Main circuit wiring 3
8 Confirm proper branch circuit protection as specified by national and local codes. 26
9 Properly wire the power supply to drive terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3. 28
Properly wire the drive and motor together.
10 The motor lines and drive output terminals R/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 should match in order to produce the 41
desired phase order. If the phase order is incorrect, the drive will rotate in the opposite direction.
11 Use 600 Vac vinyl-sheathed wire for the power supply and motor lines. 35
No. Item Page

Use the correct wire gauges for the main circuit. Refer to Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque on page 35. 35
• When using comparatively long motor cable, calculate the amount of voltage drop.
12 Motor rated voltage (V) x 0.02 ≥ 35
3 x wire resistance (Ω/km) x cable length (m) x motor rated current (A) x 10 -3
• If the cable between the drive and motor exceeds 50 m, adjust the carrier frequency set to C6-02 accordingly. 41
13 Properly ground the drive. Review page 42. 42
Tightly fasten all terminal screws (control circuit terminals, grounding terminals).
14 35
Refer to Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque on page 35.
Set up overload protection circuits when running multiple motors from a single drive.
Power supply Drive MC1 OL1

M1
MC2 OL2
MC1 - MCn ... magnetic contactor
15 M2 OL 1 - OL n ... thermal relay –
MCn OLn
Mn
Note: Close MC1 through MCn before operating the drive (MC1 through MCn cannot be switched off during
run).
If using a dynamic braking option, install a magnetic contactor. Properly install the resistor, and ensure that
16 –
overload protection shuts off the power supply.
Verify phase advancing capacitors, input noise filters, or ground fault circuit interrupters are NOT installed on
17 –
the output side of the drive.
Control circuit wiring
18 Use twisted-pair line for all drive control circuit wiring. 46
19 Ground the shields of shielded wiring to the GND terminal. 46
If using a 3-wire sequence, properly set parameters for multi-function contact input terminals S1 through S8,
20 –
and properly wire control circuits.
21 Properly wire any option cards. 46
Check for any other wiring mistakes.
22 –
Only use a multimeter to check wiring.
Properly fasten the control circuit terminal screws in the drive.
23 35
Refer to Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque on page 35.
24 Pick up all wire clippings. –
25 Ensure that no frayed wires on the terminal block are touching other terminals or connections. –
26 Properly separate control circuit wiring and main circuit wiring. –
27 Analog signal line wiring should not exceed 50 m. –
28 Safe Disable input wiring should not exceed 30 m. –
4 Start-Up Programming & Operation

◆ Using the Digital Operator
Use the digital operator to enter run and stop commands, display data, edit parameters, as well as display fault and alarm
information.
■ Keys and Displays
Figure 47
14 13 12
DIGITAL OPERATOR JVOP-182 ALM 11
YEC_common
REV DRV FOUT
10
LO
ESC
1 RE 8
2 RESET ENTER 7
9
RUN STOP
3 4 5 6
Figure 47 Keys and Displays on the Digital Operator
No. Display Name Function

• Returns to the previous display.
1 ESC
ESC Key • Moves the cursor one space to the left.
• Pressing and holding this button will return to the Frequency Reference display.
• Moves the cursor to the right.
2 RESET Key
RESET • Resets the drive to clear a fault situation.
Starts the drive in the LOCAL mode.
The Run LED
• is on, when the drive is operating the motor.
3 RUN RUN Key
• flashes during deceleration to stop or when the frequency reference is 0.
• flashes quickly the drive is disabled by a DI, the drive was stopped using a fast stop
DI or a run command was active during power up.
Scrolls up to display the next item, selects parameter numbers and increments setting
4 Up Arrow Key
values.
Scrolls down to display the next item, selects parameter numbers and increments
5 Down Arrow Key
setting values.
6 STOP STOP Key <1> Stops drive operation.
• Enters parameter values and settings.

7 ENTER Key
Start-Up Programming
ENTER • Selects a menu item to move between displays.

Switches drive control between the operator (LOCAL) and the control circuit
8 LO
RE
LO/RE Selection Key <2> terminals (REMOTE). The LED is on when the drive is in the LOCAL mode
& Operation
(operation from keypad).
9 RUN Light Lit while the drive is operating the motor. Refer to page 55 for details.
RUN
Lit while the operator is selected to run the drive (LOCAL mode). Refer to page 55 for 4
10 LO LO/RE Light
RE details.
No. Display Name Function

11 ALM LED Light
12 FOUT LED Light

Refer to LED Screen Displays on page 54.
13 DRV LED Light
14 REV LED Light
<1> The STOP key has highest priority. Pressing the STOP key will always cause the drive to stop the motor, even if a Run command is active at
any external Run command source. To disable the STOP key priority, set parameter o2-06 to 0.
<2> The LO/RE key can only switch between LOCAL and REMOTE when the drive is stopped. To disable the LO/RE key to prohibit switching
between LOCAL and REMOTE, set parameter o2-01 to 0.
■ LED Screen Displays

Table 17 LED Screen Displays
Display Lit Flashing Off
• When an alarm occurs
• oPE detected
The drive has detected an alarm or error Normal state (no fault or alarm)
• When a fault or error occurs during
Auto-Tuning
Motor is rotating in reverse – Motor is rotating forward
• The drive is in the Programming Mode
• The drive is in the Drive Mode
When DriveWorksEZ is used <1> • The drive will not accept a Run
• During Auto-Tuning
command
When the display shows the output When a display other than the output
–
frequency frequency monitor is shown.
DIGITAL OPERATOR JVOP-182 ALM DIGITAL OPERATOR JVOP-182

ALM
ALM DIGITAL OPERATOR JVOP-182 ALM
As illustrated in REV DRV

DRV FOUT REV DRV FOUT REV DRV FOUT
this manual
<1> Refer to the DriveWorksEZ instruction manual for further information.
■ LO/RE LED and RUN LED Indications

Table 18 LO/RE LED and RUN LED Indications
LED Lit Flashing Flashing Quickly Off
When source of the Run Run command to be given from a
command is assigned to the – – device other than the digital
digital operator (LOCAL) operator (REMOTE)
• While the drive is set for
LOCAL, a Run command
was entered to the input
terminals after which the
drive was then switched to
REMOTE.
• A Run command was
entered via the input
terminals while not in the
Drive Mode.
• During deceleration to stop
• During deceleration when a
• When a Run command is
During run Fast Stop command was During stop
input and frequency reference
entered.
is 0 Hz
• The drive output is shut off
by the Safe Disable
function.
• While the drive was running
in the REMOTE mode, the
STOP key was pushed.
• The drive was powered up
with b1-17 = 0 (default)
while the Run command is
active.
Examples
& Operation
■ Menu Structure for Digital Operator

Figure 48
REV
DRV
DRV FOUT
Description of Key Operations
Turn the power on
<1>
Pressing RUN will start the motor.

Forward Selection Reverse Selection
DRIVE MODE
DRV light is on.
Output Frequency
Output Current
Note: “XX” characters are shown in this manual.

Output Voltage The drive will display the actual setting values.
XX
Monitor Display
X XX XX
XX XX XX
Verify Menu
PROGRAMMING MODE
XX XX XX
Drive cannot operate the motor.
X
DRV light is on.
Set Up Mode
XX XX XX
YEC_common
XX
Parameter Setting Mode
XX XX XX
X XX XX
Auto-Tuning
X XX XX XX
Figure 48 Digital Operator Menu and Screen Structure
<1> Reverse can only be selected when the drive is set for LOCAL.
◆ The Drive and Programming Modes

The drive has a Programming Mode to program the drive for operation, and a Drive Mode used to actually run the motor.
Drive Mode: In the Drive Mode, the user can start the motor and observe operation status with the monitors that are
available. Parameter settings cannot be edited or changed when in the Drive Mode.
Programming Mode: The Programming Mode allows access to edit, adjust, and verify parameters, as well as perform
Auto-Tuning. Unless set to allow a Run command, the drive will not accept a Run command when the digital operator is
in the Programming Mode.
■ Changing Parameter Settings or Values
This example explains changing C1-02 (Deceleration Time 1) from 10.0 seconds (default) to 20.0 seconds.
Step Display/Result
1. Turn on the power to the drive. The initial display appears. REV DRV
DRV FOUT
2. Press the or key until the Parameter Setting Mode screen appears.
3.
Press the key to enter the parameter menu tree.
Step Display/Result
4. Press or key to select the C parameter group.
5.
Press two times.
6. Press or key to select the parameter C1-02.
7.
Press to view the current setting value (10.0 s). Left digit flashes.
8.
Press until the desired number is selected. “1” flashes.
9. Press the key and enter 0020.0.
10.
Press and the drive will confirm the change.
11. The display automatically returns to the screen shown in Step 4.

12. Press the DRV

REV DRV FOUT
key until back at the initial display.
Setup Group Parameters

Table 19 lists parameters available by default in the Setup Group. When an Application Preset has been selected in
parameter A1-06 or the Application Selection display of the Setup Group, the parameters selected for the Setup Group
will change automatically. Refer to Application Selection on page 63.
If the desired parameter is not listed in the Setup Group, go to the Programming Mode.
Table 19 Setup Group Parameters
Parameter Name Parameter Name
A1-02 Control Method Selection E1-09 Minimum Output Frequency
b1-01 Frequency Reference Selection 1 E1-13 Base Voltage
b1-02 Run Command Selection 1 E2-01 Motor Rated Current
b1-03 Stopping Method Selection E2-11 Motor Rate Power
C1-01 Acceleration Time 1 E5-01 Motor Code Selection
C1-02 Deceleration Time 1 E5-02 Motor Rated Power
C6-01 Drive Duty Mode Selection E5-03 Motor Rated Current
C6-02 Carrier Frequency Selection E5-04 Number of Motor Poles
d1-01 Frequency Reference 1 E5-05 Motor Stator Resistance
d1-02 Frequency Reference 2 E5-06 Motor d-Axis Inductance
d1-03 Frequency Reference 3 E5-07 Motor q-Axis Inductance
d1-04 Frequency Reference 4 E5-09 Motor Induction Voltage Constant 1
d1-17 Jog Frequency Reference E5-24 Motor Induction Voltage Constant 2

E1-01 Input Voltage Setting H4-02 Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal FM Gain
E1-04 Maximum Output Frequency H4-05 Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal AM Gain
& Operation
E1-05 Maximum Voltage L1-01 Motor Overload Protection Function Selection

E1-06 Base Frequency L3-04 Stall Prevention Selection during Deceleration
Note: Parameter availability depends on the control mode set in A1-02 that is used to run the drive and motor. Consequently, some of
the parameters listed above may not be accessible in certain control modes. 4
■ Switching Between LOCAL and REMOTE
When the drive is set to accept the Run command from the digital operator RUN key, this is referred to as LOCAL mode.
When the drive is set to accept the Run command from an external device (via the input terminals, serial
communications, etc.) this is referred to as REMOTE mode.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. The drive may start unexpectedly if the Run command is already applied when switching from
LOCAL mode to REMOTE mode when b1-07 = 1, resulting in death or serious injury. Be sure all personnel are clear of rotating
machinery.
The operation can be switched between LOCAL and REMOTE either by using the LO/RE key on the digital operator or
a digital input.
Note: 1. After selecting LOCAL, the LO/RE light will remain lit.
2. The drive will not allow the user to switch between LOCAL and REMOTE during run.
Using the LO/RE Key on the Digital Operator
Step Display/Result
YEC_c DIGITAL OPERATOR JVOP-182 ALM
1. Turn on the power to the drive. The initial display appears. ommon
REV DRV
DRV FOUT
REV DRV
DRV FOUT
YEC_
Press . The LO/RE light will light up. The drive is now in LOCAL. com-
2.
LO
ESC
RE
mon
RESET ENTER
RUN STOP
To set the drive for REMOTE operation, press the key again.
Using Input Terminals S1 through S8 to Switch between LO/RE

The user can also switch between LOCAL and REMOTE modes using one of the digital input terminals S1 through S8
(set the corresponding parameter H1- to “1”).
When setting the multi-function input terminals,
Note: 1. Refer to Parameter List on page 131 for a list of digital input selections.
2. Setting H1- to 1 disables the LO/RE key on the digital operator.
◆ Start-Up Flowcharts
The flowcharts in this section summarize basic steps required to start the drive. Use the flowcharts to determine the most
appropriate start-up method for a given application. The charts are intended as a quick reference to help familiarize the
user with start-up procedures.
Flowchart Subchart Objective Page

A – Basic startup procedure and motor tuning 59
A-1 Simple motor setup using V/f mode 60
High-performance operation using Open Loop Vector (OLV) or Closed Loop Vector (CLV)
– A-2 61
motor control
A-3 Setting up the drive to run a permanent magnet (PM) motor 62
Note: To set up the drive using one of the Application Presets, refer to Application Selection on page 63.
■ Flowchart A: Basic Start-up and Motor Tuning

Flowchart A in Figure 49 describes a basic start-up sequence. This sequence varies slightly depending on the
application. Use drive default parameter settings in simple applications that do not require high precision.
Figure 49
START
Install and wire the drive as explained in Chapters 1, 2, and 3
Apply main power on to the drive

Adhere to safety messages concerning application of power
Application Presets YES

A1-06 used ?
NO
Set the control mode in parameter A1-02. Refer to
Application
Selection section
Set the basic parameters
C6-01 for heavy/normal duty mode selection
b1-01/02 for frequency reference and run command source selection
H1-, H2-, H3-, H4-, H6- for I/O terminal setting
d1- for multi-speed references if used
C1- and C2- for accel./decel. and S-curve time settings
L3-04 if dynamic braking options are used
L8-55 = 0 if a regen converter is used.
Control Mode
A1-02 =
0: V/f 2: OLV 5: OLV/PM

1: V/f w/PG 3: CLV 6: AOLV/PM
7: CLV/PM
To To To
Flowchart A-1 Flowchart A-2 Flowchart A-3
From Flowchart A-1, A-2, or A-3
Fine tune parameters. Adjust application settings (PID, ...) if necessary.
Check the machine operation and verify parameter settings.
Drive is ready to run the application.
Figure 49 Basic Start-up

Note: When the motor cable length has changed for more than 50 m after Auto-Tuning has been performed (e.g., after the drive has
been set up and then later installed in a different location), execute Stationary Auto-Tuning for resistance between motor lines
once the drive is installed in its final installation location.
Note: Auto-Tuning should be performed again after installing an AC reactor or other such components to the output side of the drive.
& Operation
■ Subchart A-1: Simple Motor Setup Using V/f Control

Flowchart A1 in Figure 50 describes simple motor setup for V/f Control, with or without PG feedback. V/f Control is
suited for more basic applications such as fans and pumps. This procedure illustrates Energy Savings and Speed
Estimation Speed Search.
Figure 50
From
Flowchart
A
Is there a YES
PG encoder
on the motor?
NO
࡮Set or verify the V/f pattern settings E1-.

Set or verify the V/f pattern
࡮Enter the number of motor poles to E2-04 (or E4-04 for motor 2).
settings E1-.
࡮Set the PG speed feedback parameters (F1-).
Energy Savings
(b8-01 = 1) or
Speed Estimation Speed Search NO
(b3-24 = 1) enabled
when b3-01 = 1
or L2-01 = 1,2 ?
YES
Perform Rotational YES
Auto-Tuning for V/f Control Is the motor cable longer than
(T1-01 = 3) 50 meters?
NO Perform Stationary Auto-Tuning for

Stator Resistance (T1-01 = 2)
Run the motor without load; check the rotation direction and operation.
Verify external signal commands to the drive work as desired.
Couple the load or machine to the motor.

Run the machine and check for desired operation.
Return to
Flowchart
A
Figure 50 Simple Motor Setup with Energy Savings or Speed Search
■ Subchart A-2: High Performance Operation Using OLV or CLV

Flowchart A2 in Figure 51 describes the setup procedure for high-performance with Open Loop Vector Control or
Closed Loop Vector Control. Appropriate for applications requiring high starting torque and torque limits.
Note: Although the drive sets parameters for the PG encoder during Auto-Tuning, sometimes the direction of the motor and direction
of the PG get reversed. Use parameter F1-05 to switch the direction of the PG so that it matches the motor direction.
Figure 51
From
Flowchart
A
Possible for motor to YES

rotate during tuning? <1>
NO YES
NO Is the load less than
30% of the rated load
for the motor?
<2>
Motor test report/ YES Perform Stationary Perform Rotating

data sheet available? Auto-Tuning 2 (T1-01 = 4) Auto-Tuning (T1-01 = 0)
NO
Perform Stationary
Auto-Tuning 1 (T1-01 = 1)
Run the motor without load; check the rotation direction and operation.
Verify external signal commands to the drive work as desired.
Connect the load to the motor.
Is there a PG NO
encoder on the
motor?
YES
Should the YES

drive set ASR gain
automatically?
NO
Does the application require YES

any of the following drive functions?
Feed Forward
KEB 2
Perform Inertia Tuning Perform ASR gain tuning.

NO
(T1-01 = 8) <3> (T1-01 = 9) <4>
Run the machine and check for desired
operation.
Return to
& Operation
Flowchart
A
<1> The load must be decoupled from the motor to properly perform Rotational Auto-Tuning.
<2> Rotational Auto-Tuning can still be performed if the load is 30% or less, though Stationary Auto-Tuning will probably yield better control
performance.
<3> Make sure the motor and load can run freely, i.e., if a brake is mounted, make sure it is released. 4
<4> ASR Gain Tuning automatically performs Inertia Tuning and sets parameters related to Feed Forward and the KEB Ride-Thru function.
Figure 51 Flowchart A2: High Performance Operation Using OLV or CLV
■ Subchart A-3: Operation with Permanent Magnet Motors

Flowchart A3 in Figure 52 describes the set-up procedure for running a PM motor in Open Loop Vector Control. PM
motors can be used for more energy-efficient operation in reduced or variable torque applications.
Note: 1. Although the drive sets parameters for the PG encoder during Auto-Tuning, sometimes the direction of the motor and direction of the
PG get reversed. Use parameter F1-05 to switch the direction of the PG so that it matches the motor direction.
2. The Z pulse must be realigned if the PG encoder is replaced. Set T2-01 to 3 to recalibrate the drive for the new encoder.
Figure 52
From
Flowchart
A
Motor test report/ data YES

sheet available?
NO
Perform PM Stationary <1> Input the motor data. <1>

Auto-Tuning (T2-01 = 1) (T2-01 = 0)
Is the motor cable longer YES

than 50 meters?
Perform PM Stationary
Auto-Tuning for Stator
NO Resistance (T2-01 = 2)
Run the motor without load; check the rotation direction and
operation.Verify external signal commands to the drive work as desired.
Connect the load to the motor.
Is there a PG NO
encoder on the
motor?
YES
YES
Should the drive set ASR gain
automatically?
NO
Does the application require YES

any of the following drive functions?
Feed Forward
KEB 2
Perform PM Inertia Tuning Perform ASR gain tuning.

NO (T2-01 = 8) <2> (T2-01 = 9). <3>
Run the machine and check for desired

operation.
Return to
Flowchart
A
<1> Enter the motor code to E5-01 when using a Yaskawa PM motor (SMRA Series, SSR1 Series, and SST4 Series). If using a motor from another
manufacturer, enter FFFF.
<2> Make sure the motor and load can run freely, i.e., if a brake is mounted, make sure it is released.
<3> ASR Gain Tuning automatically performs Inertia Tuning and sets parameters related to Feed Forward and the KEB Ride-Thru function.
Figure 52 Operation with Permanent Magnet Motors
◆ Powering Up the Drive

■ Powering Up the Drive and Operation Status Display
Powering Up the Drive
Review the following checklist before turning the power on.
Item to Check Description

Ensure the power supply voltage is correct:
200 V class: 3-phase 200 to 240 Vac 50/60 Hz
Power supply voltage 400 V class: 3-phase 380 to 480 Vac 50/60 Hz
Properly wire the power supply input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3).
Check for proper grounding of drive and motor.
Drive output terminals and
Properly wire drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 with motor terminals U, V, and W.
motor terminals
Control circuit terminals Check control circuit terminal connections.
Drive control terminal status Open all control circuit terminals (off).
Status of the load and
Decouple the motor from the load.
connected machinery
Status Display
When the power supply to the drive is turned on, the digital operator lights will appear as follows:
No. Name Description

Normal YEC_co DRV

The data display area displays the frequency reference. is lit.
REV DRV FOUT
Operation mmon
ALM
ALM
YEC_
DRV
REV DRV FOUT
Data displayed varies by the type of fault. Refer to Fault Displays, Causes, and
Fault com- Possible Solutions on page 100 for more information and possible solution. and
mon are lit.
External fault (example)
◆ Application Selection
Several Application Presets are available to facilitate drive setup for commonly used applications. Selecting one of these
Application Presets automatically assigns functions to the input and output terminals, and sets certain parameters to
values appropriate for the application that was selected. In addition, the parameters most likely to be changed are
assigned to the group of User Parameters, A2-01 through A2-16. User Parameters are part of the Setup Group, and
provide quicker access to by eliminating the need to scroll through multiple menus.
An Application Preset can either be selected from the Application Selection display in the Setup Group or in parameter
A1-06. The following presets can be selected:
Note: An Application Preset can only be selected if all drive parameters are on at their original default settings. It may be necessary to
initialize the drive by setting A1-03 to “2220” or “3330” prior to selecting an Application Preset.
WARNING! Confirm the drive I/O signals and external sequence before performing a test run. Setting parameter A1-06 may change
the I/O terminal function automatically from the default setting. Failure to comply may result in death or serious injury.
& Operation
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default

0: Disabled
1: Water supply pump
2: Conveyor 4
3: Exhaust fan
A1-06 Application Presets 0
4: HVAC
5: Compressor
6: Hoist
7: Crane
◆ Basic Drive Setup Adjustments

This section explains the basic settings required for initial drive operation. Checking these basic parameter settings
during start-up will help to ensure a successful drive start-up. If more information is required for parameters not listed in
this section, Refer to Parameter List on page 131 as required for a complete listing of drive parameters.
■ A1-02: Control Method Selection
Selects the Control Method (also referred to as the “control mode”) the drive uses to operate the motor. If the drive is set
up to run two motors, then A1-02 determines the control mode for motor 1.

A1-02 Control Method Selection 0, 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7 <1>
<1> Regional default settings

Setting 2: Japan (Model code: CIMR-AAA) and Asia (Model code: CIMR-ATA)
Setting 0: China (Model code: CIMR-ABA)
Control Modes for Induction Motors (IM)

Setting 0: V/f Control for Induction Motors
V/f Control is for simple speed control and multiple motor applications with low demands to dynamic response or speed
accuracy. This control mode should be used when the motor parameters are unknown and Auto-Tuning cannot be
performed. The speed control range is 1:40.
Setting 1:V/f Control with PG Speed Feedback
For general-purpose applications that do not require high dynamic response but high speed accuracy. This mode should
be used if the motor parameters are unknown and Auto-Tuning cannot be performed. The speed control range is 1:40.
Setting 2: Open Loop Vector Control
For general, variable-speed applications with a speed control range of 1:120 that require precise speed control, quick
torque response, and high torque at low speed without using a speed feedback signal from the motor.
Setting 3: Closed Loop Vector Control
For general, variable-speed applications that requiring precise speed control down to zero speed, fast torque response, or
precise torque control. A speed feedback signal from the motor is required. The speed control range is up to 1:1500.
Control Modes for Permanent Magnet Motors (SPM or IPM)
Setting 5: Open Loop Vector Control for PM
Use this mode for variable torque applications and take advantage of the energy saving capabilities of a PM motor. Using
this mode, the drive can control an SPM or IPM motor with a speed range of 1:20.
Setting 6: Advanced Open Loop Vector Control for PM
This control mode can be used to operate an IPM motor for constant torque applications. Using High Frequency
Injection, a speed control range as high as 1:100 is possible.
Setting 7: Closed Loop Vector Control for PM
This mode can be used for high precision control of a PM motor in constant torque or variable torque applications. The
speed control range reaches 1:1500. A speed feedback signal is required.
■ A1-03: Initialize Parameters
Resets parameters back to the original default values. After initialization, the setting for A1-03 automatically returns to 0.

A1-03 Initialize Parameters 0, 1110, 2220, 3330, 5550 0
Setting 1110: User Initialize

Drive parameters are reset to values selected by the user as User Settings. User Settings are stored when parameter o2-03
is set to “1: Set defaults”.
Note: A “user-initialization” resets all parameters to a user-defined set of default values that were previously saved to the drive. To
clear the user-defined default values, set parameter o2-03 to 2.
Setting 2220: 2-Wire Initialization
Resets all parameters back to their original default settings with digital inputs S1 and S2 configured as Forward run and
Reverse run, respectively.
Setting 3330: 3-Wire Initialization
The drive parameters are returned to factory default values with digital inputs S1, S2, and S5 configured as Run, Stop,
and Forward/Reverse respectively. Also refer to digital input functions, Setting 0: 3-Wire Sequence on page 81.
Setting 5550: oPE04 Reset
If parameters on a certain drive have been edited and then a different terminal block is installed with different settings
saved in its built-in memory, an oPE04 error will appear on the display. To use the parameter settings saved to the
terminal block memory, set A1-02 to 5550.
Notes on Parameter Initialization
The parameters shown in Table 20 will not be reset when the drive is initialized by setting A1-03 = 2220 or 3330.
Although the control mode in A1-02 is not reset when A1-03 is set to 2220 or 3330, it may change when an application
preset is selected.
Table 20 Parameters not Changed by Drive Initialization
No. Parameter Name
A1-00 Language Selection
A1-02 Control Method Selection
C6-01 Duty Selection
E1-03 V/f Pattern Selection
E5-01 Motor Code Selection (for PM motors)
F6-08 Comm. Parameter Reset
L8-35 Installation Selection
o2-04 Drive/kVA Selection
■ b1-01: Frequency Reference Selection 1

Use parameter b1-01 to select the frequency reference source 1 for the REMOTE mode.
Note: 1. If a Run command is input to the drive but the frequency reference entered is 0 or below the minimum frequency, the RUN indicator
LED on the digital operator will light and the STOP indicator will flash.
2. Press the LO/RE key to set the drive to LOCAL and use the operator keypad to enter the frequency reference.

b1-01 Frequency Reference Selection 1 0 to 4 1
Setting 0: Operator keypad

Using this setting, the frequency reference can be input by: Start-Up Programming
• switching between the multi-speed references in the d1- parameters.

• entering the frequency reference on the operator keypad.
Setting 1: Terminals (analog input terminals)
& Operation
Using this setting, an analog frequency reference can be entered as a voltage or current signal from terminals A1, A2, or
A3.
Voltage Input
Voltage input can be used at any of the three analog input terminals. Make the settings as described in Table 21 for the
4
input used.
Table 21 Analog Input Settings for Frequency Reference Using Voltage Signals
Parameter Settings
Signal
Terminal Signal Level Notes
Level Function Selection Gain Bias
Selection
0 to 10 Vd H3-01 = 0 H3-02 = 0
A1 -10 to +10 (Frequency Reference H3-03 H3-04 –
H3-01 = 1
Vdc Bias)
0 to 10 Vd H3-09 = 0 H3-10 = 0 Make sure to set DIP switch S1
A2 -10 to +10 (Frequency Reference H3-11 H3-12 on the terminal board to “V”
H3-09 = 1 Bias) for voltage input.
Vdc
0 to 10 Vd H3-05 = 0 H3-06 = 0
A3 -10 to +10 (Frequency Reference H3-07 H3-08 –
H3-05 = 1
Vdc Bias)
Figure 53
Drive Drive
＋V 10.5 V, 20 mA power supply ＋V 10.5 V, 20 mA power supply
0 to 10 V -10 to 10 V
2 kΩ A1 Analog Input 1 4 kΩ A1 Analog Input 1
A2 Analog Input 2 A2 Analog Input 2
A3 Analog Input 3 A3 Analog Input 3
AC Analog input common AC Analog input common
-V -10.5 V, 20 mA power supply -V -10.5 V, 20 mA power supply
Figure 53 Setting the Frequency Reference as a Voltage Signal at Terminal A1

Use the wiring example shown in Figure 53 for any other analog input terminals. When using input A2 make sure DIP
switch S1 is set for voltage input.
Current Input
Input terminal A2 can accept a current input signal. Refer to Table 22 to set terminal A2 for current input.
Table 22 Analog Input Settings for Frequency Reference Using a Current Signal
Parameter Settings
Signal
Terminal Signal Level Function Notes
Level Gain Bias
Selection Selection
4 to 20 mA H3-09 = 2 Make sure to set DIP switch S1
H3-10 = 0
A2 H3-11 H3-12 on the terminal board to “I” for
0 to 20 mA H3-09 = 3 (Frequency Bias)
current input.
Figure 54
DIP switch S1
V I Drive
+V 10.5 V, 20 mA power supply
A1 Analog Input 1
0 or 4 to 20 mA
A2 Analog Input 2
A3 Analog Input 3
AC Analog input common
-V -10.5 V, 20 mA power supply
Figure 54 Setting the Frequency Reference as a Current Signal to Terminal A2

DIP switch S1 must first be set for current input.
Switching between Main/Auxiliary Frequency References

The frequency reference input can be switched between the analog terminals A1, A2, and A3 using multi-speed inputs.
Refer to Multi-Step Speed Selection on page 74 for details on using this function.
Setting 2: MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications
This setting requires that the frequency reference is entered via the RS-485/422 serial communications port (control
terminals R+, R-, S+, S-).
Setting 3: Option card
This setting requires that the frequency reference is entered via an option board plugged into connector CN5-A on the
drives control board. Consult the manual supplied with the option board for instructions on integrating the drive with the
communication system.
Note: If the frequency reference source is set for an option PCB (b1-01 = 3), but an option board is not installed, an OPE05 Operator
Programming Error will be displayed on the digital operator and the drive will not run.
Setting 4: Pulse Train Input
If b1-01 is set to 4, the frequency reference must be provided by a pulse train signal to terminal RP. Follow the directions
below to make sure the pulse signal is working properly.
Verifying Pulse Train is Working Properly
• Make sure that b1-04 is set to 4 and H6-01 is set to 0.
• Set the pulse input scaling H6-02 to the pulse train frequency value that equals 100% of the frequency reference.
• Enter a pulse train signal to terminal RP and check if the correct frequency reference is displayed.
■ b1-02: Run Command Selection 1
Parameter b1-02 determines the Run command source 1 in the REMOTE mode.

b1-02 Run Command Selection 1 0 to 3 1
Setting 0: Operator
When the b1-02 = 0, the LO/RE light will switch on and the RUN key will enter a Run command to start the drive.
Setting 1: Control Circuit Terminal
This setting requires that the Run and Stop commands are entered from the digital input terminals. The following
sequences can be used:
• 2-wire sequence 1:
Two inputs (FWD/Stop-REV/Stop). Initializing the drive by setting A1-03 = 2220, presets the terminals S1 and S2 to
these functions. This is the default setting of the drive.
• 2-wire sequence 2:
Two inputs (Start/Stop-FWD/REV).
• 3-wire sequence:
Three inputs (Start-Stop-FWD/REV). Initialize the drive by setting A1-03 = 3330 presets the terminals S1, S2, and S5
to these functions. Also refer to Setting 0: 3-Wire Sequence on page 81.

Setting 2: MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications
& Operation
To issue a Run command via serial communications, set b1-02 to 2 and connect the RS-485/422 serial communication
cable to control terminals R+, R-, S+, and S- on the removable terminal block.
Setting 3: Option Card
To issue the Run command via the communication option board, set b1-02 to 3 and plug a communication option board 4
into the CN5-A port on the control PCB. Refer to the manual supplied with the option board for instructions on
integrating the drive into the communication system.
Note: If b1-02 is set to 3, but an option board is not installed in CN5-A, an oPE05 operator programming error will be displayed on the
digital operator and the drive will not run.
■ b1-03: Stopping Method Selection

Select how the drive stops the motor when the Run command is removed or when a Stop command is entered.

b1-03 Stopping Method Selection 0 to 3 0
Setting 0: Ramp to stop

When the Run command is removed, the drive will decelerate the motor to stop. The deceleration rate is determined by
the active deceleration time. The default deceleration time is set to parameter C1-02.
When the output frequency falls below the level set in parameter b2-01, the drive will start DC injection, Zero Speed
Control or Short Circuit Braking, depending on the selected control mode. Refer to b2-01: DC Injection Braking Start
Frequency on page 69 for details.
Setting 1: Coast to stop
When the Run command is removed, the drive will shut off its output and the motor will coast (uncontrolled
deceleration) to stop. The stopping time is determined by the inertia and the friction in the driven system.
Figure 55
Run
command ON OFF
Output
frequency
Drive output is shut off
Motor speed
Figure 55 Coast to Stop

Note: After a stop is initiated, any subsequent Run command entered will be ignored until the minimum baseblock time (L2-03) has
expired. Do not enter Run command until it has come to a complete stop. To start the motor back up before it has stopped
completely, use DC Injection at start (refer to b2-03 on page 133) or Speed Search (refer to b3: Speed Search on page 133).
Setting 2: DC Injection Braking to stop
When the Run command is removed, the drive will enter baseblock (turn off its output) for the minimum baseblock time
(L2-03). Once the minimum baseblock time has expired, the drive will brake the motor by injecting DC current into the
motor windings. The stopping time is significantly faster than when compared with simply coasting to stop. The level of
current used for DC Injection Braking is set by parameter b2-02 (default = 50%).
Note: This function is not available in the control modes for PM motors (A1-02 = 5, 6, 7).
Figure 56
Run
command ON OFF
Output with the current set in
frequency b2-02
Motor speed
Motor coasts
Minimum Baseblock
Time (L2-03)
Figure 56 DC Injection Braking to Stop
The time for DC Injection Braking is determined by the value set to b2-04 and by the output frequency at the time the
Run command is removed. It can be calculated by:
(b2-04) × 10 × Output frequency

DC Injection brake time = Max. output frequency (E1-04)
Figure 57
DC Injection braking time
b2-0410
b2-04
Output frequency when 100%

10%
Stop command was entered (Maximum output
frequency)
Figure 57 DC Injection Braking Time Depending on Output Frequency
Note: If an overcurrent (oC) fault occurs during DC Injection Braking to stop, lengthen the minimum baseblock time (L2-03) until the
fault no longer occurs.
Setting 3: Coast to Stop with Timer
When the Run command is removed, the drive will turn off its output and the motor will coast to stop. If a Run command
is input before the time t (value of C1-02) has expired, the drive will not start. A Run command activated during time t
must be cycled after t has expired in order to start the drive.
Figure 58
Run command ON OFF ON OFF ON
Output Drive output shut off

frequency
Run wait time t

Figure 58 Coast to Stop with Timer
The wait time t is determined by the output frequency when the Run command is removed and by the active deceleration
time.
Figure 59
Run wait time t
Active deceleration time
Min Baseblock Time (L2-03)

Min output Output frequency 100%

frequency when Stop command (Max output
was entered frequency)
& Operation
Figure 59 Run Wait Time Depending on Output Frequency
■ b2-01: DC Injection Braking Start Frequency

Parameter b2-01 is active when “Ramp to stop” is selected as the stopping method (b1-03 = 0).
4
No. Name Setting Range Default
b2-01 DC Injection Braking Start Frequency 0.0 to 10.0 Hz Determined by A1-02
The function triggered by parameter b2-01 depends on the control mode that has been selected.
V/f, V/f w/PG and OLV (A1-02 = 0, 1, 2)

For these control modes, parameter b2-01 sets the starting frequency for DC Injection Braking at stop. Once the output
frequency falls below the setting of b2-01, DC Injection Braking is enabled for the time set in parameter b2-04.
Figure 60
DC Injection
Braking
E1-09 Min. Frequency
b2-01 Zero Speed Level
Output Time
frequency
b2-04
Figure 60 DC Injection Braking at Stop for V/f, V/f w/PG and OLV
Note: If b2-01 is set to a smaller value than parameter E1-09 (minimum frequency), then DC Injection Braking will begin as soon as
the frequency falls to the value set to E1-09.
OLV/PM and AOLV/PM (A1-02 = 5, 6)
For these control modes, parameter b2-01 sets the starting frequency for Short-Circuit Braking at stop. Once the output
frequency falls below the setting of b2-01, Short-Circuit Braking is enabled for the time set in parameter b2-13. If DC
Injection Braking time is enabled at stop, then DC Injection Braking is performed for the time set in b2-04 after Short-
Circuit Braking is complete.
Figure 61
Short Circuit DC Injection

E1-09 Min. Frequency Braking Braking
Output Time
frequency
b2-13 b2-04
Figure 61 Short-Circuit Braking at Stop in OLV/PM and AOLV/PM
Note: If b2-01 is set to a smaller value than parameter E1-09 (minimum frequency), then DC Injection Braking will begin as soon as
the frequency falls to the value set to E1-09.
CLV and CLV/PM (A1-02 = 3, 7)
For these control modes, parameter b2-01 sets the starting frequency for Zero Speed Control (not position lock) at stop.
Once the output frequency falls below the setting of b2-01, Zero Speed Control is enabled for the time set in parameter
b2-04 if b1-05 = 0.
Figure 62
Zero Speed
E1-09 Min. Frequency Control
Output Time
frequency
b2-04
Figure 62 Zero Speed Control at Stop in CLV and CLV/PM
Note: If b2-01 is set to lower than the minimum frequency (E1-09), then Zero Speed Control begins at the frequency set to E1-09.
■ b3-01: Speed Search Selection at Start

Determines if Speed Search is automatically performed when a Run command is issued or not.

b3-01 Speed Search Selection at Start 0 or 1 Determined by A1-02
Setting 0: Disabled
When the Run command is entered, the drive starts operating at the minimum output frequency. If external Speed Search
1 or 2 is already enabled by a digital input, the drive will start operating with Speed Search.
Setting 1: Enabled
Speed Search is performed whenever the Run command is entered. The drive begins running the motor once Speed
Search is complete.
■ C1-01 to C1-08: Accel, Decel Times 1 to 4

Four different sets of acceleration and deceleration times can be set in the drive. They can be selected by digital inputs,
by the motor selection, or can be switched automatically. Acceleration time parameters always set the time to accelerate
from 0 Hz to the maximum output frequency (E1-04). Deceleration time parameters always set the time to decelerate
from maximum output frequency to 0 Hz. C1-01 and C1-02 are the default active accel/decel settings.

C1-01 Acceleration Time 1
C1-02 Deceleration Time 1
C1-03 Acceleration Time 2
C1-04 Deceleration Time 2
0.0 to 6000.0 s <1> 10.0 s
C1-05 Acceleration Time 3 (Motor 2 Accel Time 1)
C1-06 Deceleration Time 3 (Motor 2 Decel Time 1)
C1-07 Acceleration Time 4 (Motor 2 Accel Time 2)
C1-08 Deceleration Time 4 (Motor 2 Accel Time 2)
<1> The setting range for the acceleration and deceleration times is determined by the accel/decel time setting units in C1-10. For example, if the
time is set in units of 0.01 s (C1-10 = 0), the setting range becomes 0.00 to 600.00 s.
Switching Acceleration Times by Digital Input

Accel/decel times 1 are active by default if no input is set. The accel/decel times 2, 3, and 4 can be activated by digital
inputs (H1- = 7 and 1A) as explained in Table 23.
Table 23 Accel/Decel Time Selection by Digital Input
Accel/Decel Time Sel. 1 Accel/Decel Time Sel. 2 Active Times

H1- = 7 H1- = 1A Acceleration Deceleration
0 0 C1-01 C1-02
1 0 C1-03 C1-04
0 1 C1-05 C1-06
1 1 C1-07 C1-08
Figure 63 shows an operation example for changing accel/decel. times. The example below requires that the stopping
method be set for “Ramp to stop” (b1-03 = 0).
Figure 63
Decel Time 1 Decel Time 3

(C1-02) Decel Time 2 Decel Time 4
Accel Time 3 (C1-06)
Accel Time 1 Accel Time 2 (C1-04) (C1-05) (C1-08)
Output (C1-01) (C1-03) Accel Time 4 Decel Time 1
frequency (C1-07)
Decel Time 1 (C1-02)
(C1-02)
Time
ON OFF ON ON OFF ON
FWD (REV)
Run command
ON OFF ON
Accel/Decel Time Selection 1
(Terminals S1 to S8, H1- = “7”)
ON
& Operation
Accel/Decel Time Selection 2

(Terminals S1 to S8, H1- = “1A”)
Figure 63 Timing Diagram of Accel/Decel Time Change

Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Times by Motor Selection
When switching between motor 1 and 2 using a digital input (H1-= 16), parameters C1-01 to C1-04 become accel/ 4
decel time 1 and 2 for motor 1, while C1-05 to C1-08 become accel/decel time 1 and 2 for motor 2. Accel/decel times 1
and 2 can be switched for each motor using a digital inputs set to H1- = 7 like shown in Table 24.
Note: 1. The motor 2 selection function cannot be used when PM motor is used.
2. The digital input setting “Accel/Decel time 2 selection” (H1- = 1A) cannot be used together with motor 1/2 switching. Trying to
do so triggers an oPE03 error, indicating a contradictory multifunction input settings.
Table 24 Motor Switching and Accel/Decel Time Combinations

Motor 1 Selected (Terminal set to H1- Motor 2 Selected (Terminal set to H1-
Accel/Decel Time 1 (H1- = 7) =16 OFF) =16 ON)
Accel Decel Accel Decel
Open C1-01 C1-02 C1-05 C1-06
Closed C1-03 C1-04 C1-07 C1-08
Switching Accel/Decel Times by a Frequency Level

The drive can switch between different acceleration and deceleration times automatically. The drive will switch from
accel/decel time 4 in C1-07 and C1-08 to the default accel/decel time in C1-01 and C1-02 (C1-05 and C1-06 for motor 2)
when the output frequency exceeds the frequency level set in parameter C1-11. When it falls below this level, the accel/
decel times are switched back. Figure 64 shows an operation example.
Note: Acceleration and deceleration times selected by digital inputs have priority over the automatic switching by the frequency level
set to C1-11. For example, if accel/decel time 2 is selected, the drive will use this time only and not switch from accel/decel time
4 to the selected one.
Figure 64
Output Frequency
C1-11
Accel/Decel Time
Switch Frequency
C1-07 C1-01 C1-02 C1-08

setting setting setting setting
When the output frequency ≥ C1-11, drive uses Accel/Decel Time 1 (C1-01, -02)
When the output frequency < C1-11, drive uses Accel/Decel Time 2 (C1-07, -08)
Figure 64 Accel/Decel Time Switching Frequency
■ C6-01: Drive Duty Mode Selection

The drive has two different “duty modes” to select from based on the load characteristics. The drive rated current,
overload capacity, and maximum output frequency will change depending upon the duty mode selection. Use parameter
C6-01 to select Heavy Duty (HD) or Normal Duty (ND) for the application. The default setting is ND. Refer to Heavy
Duty and Normal Duty Ratings on page 124 for details about the rated current.

C6-01 Duty Mode Selection 0 or 1 0 (HD)
Table 25 Differences between Heavy and Normal Duty

Characteristics Heavy Duty Rating (HD) Normal Duty Rating (ND)
C6-01 0 1
Overload
150% Overload
120%
Rated Load
Rated Load 100%
100%
Performance
0 Motor Speed 100% 0 Motor Speed 100%
Use Normal Duty Rating for applications in which the

Use Heavy Duty Rating for applications requiring a high
torque requirements drop along with the speed. Examples
Application overload tolerance with constant load torque. Such
include fans and pumps where a high overload tolerance is
applications include extruders and conveyors.
not required.
Over load capability (oL2) 150% of drive rated Heavy Duty current for 60 s 120% of drive rated Normal Duty current for 60 s
Stall Prevention during
150% 120%
Acceleration (L3-02)
Stall Prevention during
150% 120%
Run (L3-06)
Default Carrier Frequency 2 kHz 2 kHz Swing PWM
Note: By changing the Duty Mode selection, the maximum size motor the drive can run changes, and the E2- parameters are
automatically set to appropriate values (E4- for motor 2). Parameters settings determined by motor capacity are recalculated
automatically when the Duty Mode selection is changed. This includes b8-04, L2-03, n5-02, L3-24, C5-17, and C5-37.
■ C6-02: Carrier Frequency Selection

Parameter C6-02 sets the switching frequency of the drive’s output transistors. Changes to the switching frequency helps
lower audible noise and also reduces leakage current.
Note: Increasing the carrier frequency above the default value automatically lowers the drive’s current rating.

Determined by A1-02, o2-04.
C6-02 Carrier Frequency Selection 1 to F
Reset when C6-01 is changed.
Note: The default setting for the carrier frequency differs based on the type of motor and the Duty Mode selection. The default is 2 kHz
when the drive is set for Heavy Duty performance, and defaulted to “Swing PWM1” when set for Normal Duty performance.
When using a PM motor, the default carrier frequency is 5.0 Hz.
Settings:
C6-02 Carrier Frequency C6-02 Carrier Frequency C6-02 Carrier Frequency

1 2.0 kHz 5 12.5 kHz (10.0 kHz) 9 Swing PWM 3
2 5.0 kHz (4.0 kHz) 6 15.0 kHz (12.0 kHz) A Swing PWM 4
3 8.0 kHz (6.0 kHz) 7 Swing PWM 1
F User defined (C6-03 to C6-05)
4 10.0 kHz (8.0 kHz) 8 Swing PWM 2
Note: 1. Swing PWM uses a carrier frequency of 2.0 kHz as a base, then applies a special PWM pattern to reduce the audible noise.
2. The value in parenthesis indicates the carrier frequency for AOLV/PM.
Guidelines for Carrier Frequency Parameter Setup
Symptom Remedy
Speed and torque are unstable at low speeds
Noise from the drive affects peripheral devices
Lower the carrier frequency.
Excessive leakage current from the drive
Wiring between the drive and motor is too long <1>
Audible motor noise is too loud Increase the carrier frequency or use Swing PWM. <2>
<1> The carrier frequency may need to be lowered if the motor cable is too long. Refer to the table below.
<2> In Normal Duty, the carrier frequency default is for Swing PWM (C6-02 = 7), the same as setting 2 kHz. Increasing the carrier frequency is fine
when the drive is set for Normal Duty, but remember that the drive rated current falls when the carrier frequency is increased.
Wiring Distance Up to 50 m Up to 100 m Greater than 100 m

1 to 2 (up to 5 kHz), 7 (Swing
Recommended setting value for C6-02 1 to F (up to 15 kHz) 1 (up to 2 kHz), 7 (Swing PWM)
PWM)
■ d1-01 to d1-17: Frequency Reference 1 to 16 and Jog Frequency Reference

Up to 17 preset frequency references (including the Jog reference) can be programmed in the drive. The drive lets the
user switch between these frequency references during run by using the digital input terminals. The drive uses the
acceleration and deceleration times that have been selected when switching between each frequency reference.
The Jog frequency must be selected by a separate digital input and overrides all other frequency references.
The multi-speed references 1, 2, and 3 can be provided by analog inputs.

& Operation

d1-01 to d1-16 Frequency Reference 1 to 16 0.00 to 400.00 Hz <1> <2> 0.00 Hz <2>
d1-17 Jog Frequency Reference 0.00 to 400.00 Hz <1> <2> 6.00 Hz <2>
<1> The upper limit is determined by the maximum output frequency (E1-04) and upper limit for the frequency reference (d2-01). 4
<2> Setting units are determined by parameter o1-03. The default is “Hz” (o1-03 = 0) in V/f, V/f w/PG, OLV, CLV, and OLV/PM control modes.
The default for AOLV/PM and CLV/PM control modes expresses the frequency reference as a percentage (o1-03 = 1).
Multi-Step Speed Selection

To use several speed references for a multi-step speed sequence, set the H1- parameters to 3, 4, 5, and 32. To assign
the Jog reference to a digital input, set H1- to 6.
Notes on using analog inputs as Multi-Speed 1, 2, and 3:
• The first frequency reference (Multi-Speed 1) comes from the source specified in b1-01. When using an analog input
terminal to supply the frequency reference, the frequency reference source must be assigned to the control terminals
(b1-01 = 1).
• When an analog input is set to “Auxiliary frequency 1” (H3-02, H2-06, or H2-10 = 2), then the value set to this input
will be used as the Multi-Step Speed 2 instead of the value set to parameter d1-02. If no analog inputs are set for
“Auxiliary frequency 1”, then d1-02 becomes the reference for Multi-Step Speed 2.
• When the an analog input is set to “Auxiliary frequency 2” (H3-02, H2-06, or H2-10 = 3), then the value set to this
input will be used as the Multi-Step Speed 3 instead of the value set to parameter d1-03. If no analog inputs are set for
“Auxiliary frequency 2”, then d1-03 becomes the reference for Multi-Step Speed 3.
The different speed references can be selected as shown in Table 26. Figure 65 illustrates the multi-step speed selection.
Table 26 Multi-Step Speed Reference and Terminal Switch Combinations
Multi-Step Multi-Step Multi-Step Multi-Step Jog Reference
Reference Speed Speed 2 Speed 3 Speed 4 H1-=6
H1-=3 H1-=4 H1-=5 H1-=32
Frequency Reference 1 (set in b1-01) OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Frequency Reference 2 (d1-02 or input terminal A1,
ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
A2, A3)
Frequency Reference 3 (d1-03 or input terminal A1,
OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
A2, A3)
Frequency Reference 4 (d1-04) ON ON OFF OFF OFF
Frequency Reference 5 (d1-05) OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
Frequency Reference 6 (d1-06) ON OFF ON OFF OFF
Frequency Reference 7 (d1-07) OFF ON ON OFF OFF
Frequency Reference 8 (d1-08) ON ON ON OFF OFF
Frequency Reference 9 (d1-09) OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
Frequency Reference 10 (d1-10) ON OFF OFF ON OFF
Frequency Reference 11 (d1-11) OFF ON OFF ON OFF
Frequency Reference 12 (d1-12) ON ON OFF ON OFF
Frequency Reference 13 (d1-13) OFF OFF ON ON OFF
Frequency Reference 14 (d1-14) ON OFF ON ON OFF
Frequency Reference 15 (d1-15) OFF ON ON ON OFF
Frequency Reference 16 (d1-16) ON ON ON ON OFF
Jog Frequency Reference (d1-17) <1> − − − − ON
<1> The Jog frequency overrides whatever frequency reference is being used.
Figure 65
d1-16
Frequency d1-15
reference
d1-14
d1-13
d1-12
d1-07
d1-06
d1-05
d1-04
d1-01
(A3)
d1-02
(A2)
d1-01
(A1)
d1-17
Time
FWD (REV) Run/Stop
ON
Multi-step Speed Ref. 1 ON ON ON ON ON ON
Multi-step Speed Ref. 2 ON ON ON ON
Multi-step Speed Ref. 3 ON ON
Multi-step Speed Ref. 4 ON
Jog Reference ON
Figure 65 Preset Reference Timing Diagram
■ E1-01: Input Voltage Setting

Set the input voltage parameter to the nominal voltage of the AC power supply. This parameter adjusts the levels of some
protective features of the drive (overvoltage, Stall Prevention, etc.).
NOTICE: Set parameter E1-01 to match the input voltage of the drive. Drive input voltage (not motor voltage) must be set in E1-01 for
the protective features to function properly. Failure to set the correct drive input voltage will result in improper drive operation.

E1-01 <1> Input Voltage Setting 155 to 255 V 200 V
<1> The setting range and default value shown here are for 200 V class drives. Double this for 400 V class units.
E1-01 Related Values

The input voltage setting determines the undervoltage detection level as well as DC bus levels used by the KEB function
and the overvoltage suppression function.
(Approximate Values)
Setting Value of ov Suppression /

Voltage Uv Detection Level Desired DC Bus Voltage
E1-01 Stall Prevention Level
(L2-05) during KEB (L2-11) (L3-17)
& Operation
200 V Class All settings 190 V 260 V 375 V

setting ≥ 400 V 380 V 500 V 750 V
400 V Class
setting < 400 V 350 V 460 V 750 V
Note: The braking transistor operation levels are valid for the drive internal braking transistor. If an external CDBR braking chopper is
used, refer to the instruction manual of that unit. 4
■ V/f Pattern Settings (E1-03)
The drive uses the V/f pattern that has been set to adjust the output voltage relative to the frequency reference. There are
15 different preset V/f patterns (setting 0 to E) to select from, each with varying voltage profiles, saturation levels
(frequency at which maximum voltage is reached), and maximum frequencies. Additionally, one custom V/f pattern is
available (setting F). The custom V/f pattern requires the user to create the pattern using parameters E1-04 through E1-
10.
■ E1-03: V/f Pattern Selection

The user can select the V/f pattern for the drive and motor from 15 predefined patterns, or create a custom V/f pattern.

E1-03 V/f Pattern Selection 0 to F <1> F <2>
<1> Parameter setting value is not reset to the default value during drive initialization (A1-03).
<2> Settings 0 through E are not available when using any of the vector control modes.
Setting a Predefined V/f Pattern (Setting 0 to E)

Choose the V/f pattern that best meets the application demands from the table below. These settings are available only in
V/f Control modes. Set the correct value to E1-03. Parameters E1-04 to E1-13 can only be monitored, not changed.
Note: 1. Setting an improper V/f pattern may result in low motor torque or increased current due to overexcitation.
2. Parameter E1-03 is not reset when the drive is initialized.
Table 27 Predefined V/f Patterns
Setting Specification Characteristic Application
0 50 Hz
1 60 Hz For general purpose applications. Torque remains
Constant torque
2 60 Hz (with 50 Hz base) constant regardless of changes to speed.
3 72 Hz (with 60 Hz base)
4 50 Hz, Heavy Duty 2
5 50 Hz, Heavy Duty 1 For fans, pumps, and other applications that require
Derated torque
6 50 Hz, Heavy Duty 1 torque derating relative to the load.
7 50 Hz, Heavy Duty 2
8 50 Hz, mid starting torque Select high starting torque when:
9 50 Hz, high starting torque • Wiring between the drive and motor exceeds 150 m
High starting torque
A 60 Hz, mid starting torque • A large amount of starting torque is required
B 60 Hz, high starting torque • An AC reactor is installed
C 90 Hz (with 60 Hz base)
Output voltage is constant when operating at greater
D 120 Hz (with 60 Hz base) Constant output
than 60 Hz.
E 180 Hz (with 60 Hz base)
The following tables show details on predefined V/f patterns.

The following graphs are for 200 V class drives. Double the values when using a 400 V class drive.
Predefined V/f Patterns for models CIMR-A2A0004 to 0021 and CIMR-A4A0002 to 0011
Table 28 Constant Torque Characteristics, Settings 0 to 3
Setting = 0 50 Hz Setting = 1 60 Hz Setting = 2 60 Hz Setting = 3 72 Hz
200 200 200 200

Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
15 15 15 15
9 9 9 9
0 1.3 2.5 50 0 1.5 3 60 0 1.5 3 50 60 0 1.5 3 60 72
Frequency (Hz) Frequency (Hz) Frequency (Hz) Frequency (Hz)
Table 29 Derated Torque Characteristics, Settings 4 to 7

200 200 200 200

Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
50 50
35 35
9 9
8 8
0 1.3 25 50 0 1.3 25 50 0 1.5 30 60 0 1.5 30 60
Table 30 High Starting Torque, Settings 8 to B

Setting = 8 50 Hz Setting = 9 50 Hz Setting = A 60 Hz Setting = B 60 Hz
200 200 200 200
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
24 24
19 19
13 15
11 11
0 1.3 2.5 50 0 1.3 2.5 50 0 1.5 3 60 0 1.5 3 60
Table 31 Rated Output Operation, Settings C to F

Setting = C 90 Hz Setting = D 120 Hz Setting = E 180 Hz Setting = F 60 Hz
200 200 200 200

Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
15 15 15 15
9 9 9 9
0 1.5 3 60 90 0 1.5 3 60 120 0 1.5 3 60 180 0 1.5 3 60
Predefined V/f Patterns for Models CIMR-A2A0030 to 0211 and CIMR-A4A0018 to 0103
The following graphs are for 200 V class drives. Double values when using a 400 V class drive.
Table 32 Rated Torque Characteristics, Settings 0 to 3
200 200 200 200

Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
14 14 14 14
7 7 7 7
0 1.3 2.5 50 0 1.5 3 60 0 1.5 3 50 60 0 1.5 3 60 72

200 200 200 200

Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
50 50
35 35
7 7
6 6
0 1.3 25 50 0 1.3 25 50 0 1.5 30 60 0 1.5 30 60

& Operation
200 200 200 200

Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
23 23
18
11
18
13 4
9 9
0 1.3 2.5 50 0 1.3 2.5 50 0 1.5 3 60 0 1.5 3 60
Table 35 Constant Output, Settings C to F
200 200 200 200
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
14 14 14 14
7 7 7 7
0 1.5 3 60 90 0 1.5 3 60 120 0 1.5 3 60 180 0 1.5 3 60
Predefined V/f Patterns for Models CIMR-A2A0250 to 0415 and CIMR-A4A0139 to 0675
The following graphs are for 200 V class drives. Double values when using a 400 V class drive.
Table 36 Rated Torque Characteristics, Settings 0 to 3
200 200 200 200
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
12 12 12 12
6 6 6 6
0 1.3 2.5 50 0 1.5 3 60 0 1.5 3 50 60 0 1.5 3 60 72

200 200 200 200
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
50 50
35 35
6 6
5 5
0 1.3 25 50 0 1.3 25 50 0 1.5 30 60 0 1.5 30 60

200 200 200 200
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
20 20
15 15
9 11
7 7
0 1.3 2.5 50 0 1.3 2.5 50 0 1.5 3 60 0 1.5 3 60
Table 39 Constant Output, Settings C to F

200 200 200 200
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
12 12 12 12
6 6 6 6
0 1.5 3 60 90 0 1.5 3 60 120 0 1.5 3 60 180 0 1.5 3 60
Setting a Custom V/f Pattern (Setting F: Default)

Setting parameter E1-03 to F allows to set up a custom V/f pattern by changing parameters E1-04 to E1-13.
When initialized, the default values for parameters E1-04 to E1-13 will be equal to V/f pattern 1 of the predefined
patterns.
■ V/f Pattern Settings E1-04 to E1-13

If E1-03 is set to a preset V/f pattern (i.e., set to any value besides F), then the user can refer to parameters E1-04 through
E1-13 to monitor the V/f pattern. To create a new V/f pattern, set E1-03 to F. Refer to Figure 66 for an example custom
V/f pattern.
Note: Certain E1- parameters might not be visible depending on the selected control mode. Refer to Parameter List on page 131
for details.

E1-04 Maximum Output Frequency 40.0 to 400.0 Hz <1> <2> <6>
E1-05 Maximum Voltage 0.0 to 255.0 V <3> <1> <3>
E1-06 Base Frequency 0.0 to [E1-04] <1> <2> <6>
E1-07 Middle Output Frequency 0.0 to [E1-04] <1> <6>
E1-08 Middle Output Frequency Voltage 0.0 to 255.0 V <3> <1> <3>
E1-09 Minimum Output Frequency 0.0 to [E1-04] <1> <2> <6>
E1-10 Minimum Output Frequency Voltage 0.0 to 255.0 V <3> <1> <3>
E1-11 Middle Output Frequency 2 0.0 to [E1-04] 0.0 Hz <5>

E1-12 Middle Output Frequency Voltage 2 0.0 to 255.0 V <3> 0.0 V <3> <4> <5>
E1-13 Base Voltage 0.0 to 255.0 V <3> 0.0 V <3> <4>
<1> Default setting is determined by the control mode.
<2> When using PM motors, the default setting is determined by the motor code set to E5-01.
<3> Values shown here are for 200 V class drives. Double values when using a 400 V class unit.
<4> The drive changes these settings when Auto-Tuning is performed (Rotational Auto-Tuning, Stationary Auto-Tuning 1, 2).
<5> Parameter ignored when E1-11 and E1-12 are set to 0.0.
<6> The default value shown here is for the following localized drives: Japan (Model code: CIMR-AAA), Asia (Model code: CIMR-ATA).
For default value of China localized drive (Model code: CIMR-ABA), refer to the A1000 Technical Manual.
Figure 66
Output Voltage (V)
Frequency (Hz)
Figure 66 V/f Pattern
Note: 1. The following condition must be true when setting up the V/f pattern: E1-09 ≤ E1-07 < E1-06 ≤ E1-11 ≤ E1-04
2. To make the V/f pattern a straight line below E1-06, set E1-09 = E1-07. In this case the E1-08 setting is disregarded.
3. E1-03 is unaffected when the parameters are initialized using parameter A1-03, but the settings for E1-04 through E1-13 are returned
to their default values.
Parameters E1-11, E1-12, and E1-13 should only be used to fine-tune the V/f pattern in the constant output range.
These parameters rarely need to be changed.
■ E2-01: Motor Rated Current
Set E2-01 to the full load amps (FLA) stamped on the motor nameplate. This value is used for motor protection and to
calculate torque limits. If Auto-Tuning completes successfully, the value entered to T1-04 will automatically be saved to
E2-01.
& Operation

10% to 200% of the drive rated Determined by C6-01
E2-01 Motor Rated Current and
current. o2-04
Note: This value's number of decimal places depends on the drive model and the Heavy/Normal duty selection in parameter C6-01. 4
The value will have two decimal places (0.01 A) if the drive is set for a Maximum Applicable Motor Capacity up to 11 kW (refer
to Table 60 and Table 61) and one decimal place (0.1 A) if the set Maximum Applicable Motor Capacity is higher than 11 kW.
Note: If the motor rated current in E2-01 is set lower than the motor no-load current in E2-03, than a parameter setting error will occur
(oPE02). E2-03 must be set correctly to prevent this error.
■ H1-01 to H1-08: Functions for Terminals S1 to S8

These parameters assign functions to the multi-function digital inputs. The various functions and their settings are listed
below in Table 40.
Setting
No. Parameter Name Default
Range
H1-01 Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S1 Function Selection 1 to 9F 40 (F) <1>: Forward Run Command (2-wire sequence)
H1-02 Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S2 Function Selection 1 to 9F 41 (F) <1>: Reverse Run Command (2-wire sequence)
H1-03 Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S3 Function Selection 0 to 9F 24: External Fault
H1-04 Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S4 Function Selection 0 to 9F 14: Fault Reset
H1-05 Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S5 Function Selection 0 to 9F 3 (0) <1>: Multi-Step Speed Reference 1
H1-06 Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S6 Function Selection 0 to 9F 4 (3) <1>: Multi-Step Speed Reference 2
H1-07 Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S7 Function Selection 0 to 9F 6 (4) <1>: Jog Reference Selection
H1-08 Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S8 Function Selection 0 to 9F 8: External Baseblock Command
<1> Number appearing in parenthesis is the default value after performing a 3-Wire initialization.
Table 40 Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal Settings

Setting Function Setting Function
0 3-wire sequence 34 PID soft starter cancel
1 Local/remote selection 35 PID input level selection
2 External reference 1/2 selection 40 Forward run command (2-wire sequence)
3 Multi-Step Speed Reference 1 41 Reverse run command (2-wire sequence)
4 Multi-Step Speed Reference 2 42 Run command (2-wire sequence 2)
5 Multi-Step Speed Reference 3 43 FWD/REV command (2-wire sequence 2)
6 Jog reference selection 44 Offset frequency 1
7 Accel/decel time selection 1 45 Offset frequency 2
8 Baseblock command (N.O.) 46 Offset frequency 3
9 Baseblock Command (N.C.) 47 Node setup
A Accel/decel ramp hold 60 DC Injection Braking command
B Drive overheat alarm (OH2) 61 External Speed Search command 1
C Analog terminal input selection 62 External Speed Search command 2
D PG encoder disable 63 Field Weakening
E ASR integral reset 65 KEB Ride-Thru 1 (N.C.)
F Through mode 66 KEB Ride-Thru 1 (N.O.)
10 Up command 67 Communications test mode
11 Down command 68 High Slip Braking
12 Forward jog 6A Drive enabled
13 Reverse jog 71 Speed/Torque Control switch
14 Fault reset 72 Zero Servo
15 Fast Stop (N.O.) 75 Up 2 command
16 Motor 2 selection 76 Down 2 command
17 Fast Stop (N.C.) 77 ASR gain switch
18 Timer function input 78 External torque reference polarity inversion
19 PID disable 7A KEB Ride-Thru 2 (N.C.)
1A Accel/decel time selection 2 7B KEB Ride-Thru 2 (N.O.)
1B Program lockout 7C Short Circuit Braking (N.O.)
1E Reference sample hold 7D Short Circuit Braking (N.C.)
20 to 2F External fault 7E Forward/reverse detection (V/f control with simple PG)
30 PID integral reset 90 to 97 DriveWorksEZ Digital input 1 to 8
31 PID integral hold 9F DriveWorksEZ disabled
32 Multi-step speed reference 4 – –
Setting 0: 3-Wire Sequence

When one of the digital inputs is programmed for 3-wire control, that input becomes a forward/reverse directional input,
S1 becomes the Run command input, and S2 becomes the Stop command input.
The drive will start the motor when the input S1 set for the Run command is closed for longer than 2 ms. The drive will
stop the operation when the Stop input S2 is released for a brief moment. Whenever the input programmed for 3 wire
sequence is open, the drive will be set for forward direction. If the input is closed, the drive is set for reverse direction.
Note: When 3-wire sequence is selected, the Run and Stop commands must be input via S1 and S2.
Figure 67
Stop Switch Run Switch DRIVE

(N.C.) (N.O.)
S1
Run Command (Runs when Closed)
S2
Stop Command (Stops when Open)
S5
FWD/REV (Multi-Function Input)
(H1-05 = 0)
SC
Sequence Input Common
Figure 67 3-Wire Sequence Wiring Diagram

Figure 68
2 ms min.
Can be either ON or OFF

Run command
Stop command OFF (stopped)
Forward/reverse OFF (forward) ON (reverse)

command
Motor speed
TIME
Stop Forward Reverse Stop Foward
Figure 68 3-Wire Sequence

Note: 1. The Run command must be closed for more than 2 ms.
2. If the Run command is active at power up and b1-17 = 0 (Run command at power up not accepted), the Run LED will flash to
indicate that protective functions are operating. If required by the application, set b1-17 to 1 to have the Run command issued
automatically as soon as the drive is powered up.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Ensure start/stop and safety circuits are wired properly and in the correct state before
energizing the drive. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury from moving equipment.
WARNING! The drive may start unexpectedly in reverse direction after power up if it is wired for 3-wire sequence but set up for 2-wire
sequence (default). Make sure b1-17 is set to “0” (drive does not accept a Run command active at power up). When initializing the
drive use 3-wire initialization. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury from moving equipment.
■ H2-01 to H2-03: Terminal M1-M2, P1-PC, and P2-PC Function Selection

The drive has three multi-function output terminals. Table 41 lists the functions available for theses terminals using H2-
01, H2-02, and H2-03.

& Operation
H2-01 Terminal M1-M2 Function Selection (relay) 0 to 192 0: During run

H2-02 Terminal P1-PC Function Selection (open-collector) 0 to 192 1: Zero Speed
H2-03 Terminal P2-PC Function Selection (open-collector) 0 to 192 2: Speed agree 1
4
Table 41 Multi-Function Digital Output Terminal Settings

Setting Function Setting Function
0 During run 1D During regeneration
1 Zero Speed 1E Restart enabled
2 Speed agree 1 1F Motor overload alarm (oL1)
3 User-set speed agree 1 20 Drive overheat pre-alarm (oH)
4 Frequency detection 1 22 Mechanical Weakening detection
5 Frequency detection 2 2F Maintenance period
6 Drive ready 30 During torque limit
7 DC bus undervoltage 31 During speed limit
8 During baseblock (N.O.) 32 During speed limit in Torque Control
9 Frequency reference source 33 Zero Servo complete
A Run command source 37 During frequency output
B Torque detection 1 (N.O.) 38 Drive enabled
C Frequency reference loss 39 Watt hour pulse output
D Braking resistor fault 3C LOCAL/REMOTE Status
E Fault 3D During Speed Search
F Through mode 3E PID feedback low
10 Minor fault 3F PID feedback high
11 Fault reset command active 4A During KEB operation
12 Timer output 4B During Short Circuit Braking
13 Speed agree 2 4C During Fast Stop
14 User-set speed agree 2 4D oH pre-alarm time limit
15 Frequency detection 3 4E Braking transistor fault (rr)
16 Frequency detection 4 4F Braking resistor overheat (rH)
17 Torque detection 1 (N.C.) 60 Internal cooling fan alarm
18 Torque detection 2 (N.O.) 61 Rotor Position Detection Completed
19 Torque detection 2 (N.C.) 90 DriveWorksEZ digital output 1
1A During reverse 91 DriveWorksEZ digital output 2
1B During baseblock (N.C.) 92 DriveWorksEZ digital output 3
1C Motor 2 selection 100 to 192 Functions 0 to 92 with inverse output
Setting 2: Speed agree 1 (fref/fout Agree 1)

Closes whenever the actual output frequency or motor speed (CLV, CLV/PM) is within the Speed Agree Width (L4-02)
of the current frequency reference regardless of the direction.
Status Description
Open Output frequency or motor speed does not match the frequency reference while the drive is running.
Closed Output frequency or motor speed is within the range of frequency reference ±L4-02.
Note: Detection works in both directions, forward and reverse.

Figure 69
Frequency
reference
Output Frequency L4-02

or Motor Speed
L4-02
Speed agree 1 OFF ON
Figure 69 Speed Agree 1 Time Chart
Setting 3: User-set speed agree 1 (fref/fset Agree 1)

Closes whenever the actual output frequency or motor speed (CLV, CLV/PM) and the frequency reference are within the
speed agree width (L4-02) of the programmed speed agree level (L4-01).
Status Description
Open Output frequency or motor speed and frequency reference are not both within the range of L4-01 ±L4-02.
Closed Output frequency or motor speed and the frequency reference are both within the range of L4-01 ±L4-02.
Note: Frequency detection works in both forward and reverse. The value of L4-01 is used as the detection level for both directions.
Figure 70
Output Frequency
or Motor Speed
Frequency L4-01 Output

reference frequency
+/- L4-02
L4-01
Frequency
reference +/- L4-02
User Set
OFF ON OFF ON
Speed Agree 1
Figure 70 User Set Speed Agree 1 Time Chart
■ H3-01: Terminal A1 Signal Level Selection

Selects the input signal level for analog input A1.

H3-01 Terminal A1 Signal Level Selection 0 to 1 0
Setting 0: 0 to 10 Vdc
The input level is 0 to 10 Vdc. The minimum input level is limited to 0%, so that a negative input signal due to gain and
bias settings will be simply read as 0%.
Setting 1: –10 to 10 Vdc
The input level is –10 to 10 Vdc. If the resulting voltage is negative after being adjusted by gain and bias settings, then
the motor will rotate in reverse.
■ H3-02: Terminal A1 Function Selection
Determines the function assigned to analog input terminal A1.

H3-02 Terminal A1 Function Selection 0 to 31 0
■ H3-03, H3-04: Terminal A1 Gain and Bias Settings

Parameter H3-03 sets the level of the selected input value that is equal to 10 Vdc input at terminal A1 (gain).
Parameter H3-04 sets the level of the selected input value that is equal to 0 V input at terminal A1 (bias).
& Operation
Both can be used to adjust the characteristics of the analog input signal to terminal A1.

4
H3-03 Terminal A1 Gain Setting -999.9 to 999.9% 100.0%
H3-04 Terminal A1 Bias Setting -999.9 to 999.9% 0.0%
Setting Examples
• Gain H3-03 = 200%, bias H3-04 = 0, terminal A1 as frequency reference input (H3-02 = 0):
An input 10 Vdc will be equivalent to a 200% frequency reference and 5 Vdc will be equivalent to a 100% frequency
reference. Since the drive output is limited by the maximum frequency parameter (E1-04), the frequency reference will
be equal to E1-04 above 5 Vdc.
Figure 71
H3-01 = 0 H3-01 = 1
Gain = 200 % Gain = 200 %
Frequecny 100%
reference E1-04
-10 V -5 V
100 % 0V 5V 10 V
E1-04
-100%
E1-04
Bias = 0 % Gain = -200 %

0V 5V 10 V
Figure 71 Frequency Reference Setting by Analog Input with Increased Gain

• Gain H3-03 = 100%, bias H3-04 = -25%, terminal A1 as frequency reference input:
An input of 0 Vdc will be equivalent to a -25% frequency reference.
When parameter H3-01 = 0, the frequency reference is 0% between 0 and 2 Vdc input.
When parameter H3-01 = 1, the motor will rotate in reverse between -10 and 2 Vdc input.
Figure 72
H3-01 = 0 H3-01 = 1
100 %
100%
Frequency H3-01 = 0
reference -10 V -6.0 V
2.0 V 10 V
-25% Analog Input
Voltage
0
2.0 V 10 V
Analog Input -100%
-25% Voltage E1-04
H3-01 = 1 -150%
Figure 72 Frequency Reference Setting by Analog Input with Negative Bias

Selects the input signal level for analog input A3.

H3-05 Terminal A3 Signal Level Selection 0, 1 0
The input level is 0 to 10 Vdc. See the explanation provided for H3-01. Refer to Setting 0: 0 to 10 Vdc on page 83.
Setting 1: –10 V to 10 Vdc
The input level is –10 to 10 Vdc. See the explanation provided for H3-01. Refer to Setting 1: –10 to 10 Vdc on page 83.

■ H3-07, H3-08: Terminal A3 Gain and Bias Setting

Parameter H3-07 sets the level of the selected input value that is equal to 10 Vdc input at terminal A3 (gain).
Parameter H3-08 sets the level of the selected input value that is equal to 0 V input at terminal A3 (bias).


Selects the input signal level for analog input A2. Be sure to also set DIP switch S1 on the terminal board accordingly for
a voltage input or current input.

H3-09 Terminal A2 Signal Level Selection 0 to 3 2
The input level is 0 to 10 Vdc. Refer to Setting 0: 0 to 10 Vdc on page 83
Setting 1: –10 to 10 Vdc
The input level is –10 to 10 Vdc. Refer to Setting 1: –10 to 10 Vdc on page 83.
Setting 2: 4 to 20 mA Current Input
The input level is 4 to 20 mA. Negative input values by negative bias or gain settings will be limited to 0%.
Setting 3: 0 to 20 mA Current Input
The input level is 0 to 20 mA. Negative input values by negative bias or gain settings will be limited to 0%.

■ H3-11, H3-12: Terminal A2 Gain and Bias Setting

Parameter H3-11 sets the level of the input value selected that is equal to 10 Vdc input or 20 mA input to terminal A2.
Parameter H3-12 sets the level of the input value selected that is equal to 0 V, 4 mA or 0 mA input at terminal A2.
Both can be used to adjust the characteristics of the analog input signal to terminal A2. The setting works in the same
way as parameters H3-03 and H3-04 for analog input A1.

■ H4-01, H4-04: Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal FM, AM Monitor Selection

Sets the desired drive monitor parameter U- to output as an analog value via terminal FM and AM. Refer to U1:
Operation Status Monitors on page 175 for a list of all monitors. The “Analog Output Level” column indicates if a
monitor can be used for analog output.
Example: Enter “103” for U1-03.

H4-01 Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal FM Monitor Selection 000 to 999 102
& Operation
H4-04 Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal AM Monitor Selection 000 to 999 103
A setting of 031 or 000 applies no drive monitor to the analog output. With this setting, terminal functions as well as FM
and AM output levels can be set by a PLC via a communication option or MEMOBUS/Modbus (through mode).
4
■ H4-02, H4-03: Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal FM Gain and Bias
H4-05, H4-06: Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal AM Gain and Bias
Parameter H4-02 and H4-05 set the terminal FM and AM output signal level equal to 100% of the monitor (gain).
Parameter H4-03 and H4-06 set the bias added to the monitor output for terminals FM and AM. Both are set as a
percentage, where 100% equals 10 Vdc analog output. The output voltage of both terminals is limited to 10 Vdc.
The output signal range can be selected between 0 to +10 Vdc or -10 to +10 Vdc using parameter H4-07 and H4-08.
Figure 73 illustrates how gain and bias settings work.

H4-02 Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal FM Gain -999.9 to 999.9% 100.0%
H4-03 Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal FM Bias -999.9 to 999.9% 0.0%
H4-05 Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal AM Gain -999.9 to 999.9% 50.0%
H4-06 Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal AM Bias -999.9 to 999.9% 0.0%
Using Gain and Bias to Adjust Output Signal Level

When viewing a gain setting parameter (H4-02 or H4-05) on the digital operator, the analog output will supply a voltage
signal equal to 100% of the monitor value (including changes made from bias and gain settings). When viewing a bias
setting parameter (H4-03 or H4-06), the analog output voltage will supply a signal equal to 0% monitor value (including
changes made from bias and gain settings).
Example 1: To have an output signal of 5 V at terminal FM when the monitored value is at 100%, set H4-02 to 50%.
Example 2: To have an output signal of 10 V at terminal FM when the monitored value is at 76.7%, set H4-02 to 150%.
Figure 73
H4-07, 08 = 0 H4-07, 08 = 1
15V
Gain = 150%
Output Voltage
Bias = 0%
10V
Gain = 100%
10 V Bias = 0%
Gain 150% 5V
Bias 0% Gain = 50%
Output Voltage Bias = 0%
-100%
Gain 100%
5V Bias 0% 100%
Monitor Value
-5 V
Gain 50%
Bias 0%
0V -10 V
0% Monitor Value 100%
-15 V
Figure 73 Analog Output Gain and Bias Setting Example 1 and 2
Example 3: To have an output signal of 3 V at terminal FM when the monitored value is at 0%, set H4-03 to 30%.
Figure 74
H4-07, 08 = 0 H4-07, 08 = 1
15 V
Gain = 100%
Output Voltage
Bias = 30%
10V
Gain = 100%
10 V Bias = 0%
5V
Bias 30%
Output Voltage Gain 100% -100%
100%
Bias 0% Monitor Value
3V Gain 100% -5 V
0V -10 V
0% Monitor Value 100%
-15 V
YEC_common
Figure 74 Analog Output Gain and Bias Setting Example 3
■ H4-07, H4-08: Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal FM, AM Signal Level Selection
Sets the voltage output level of U parameter (monitor parameter) data to terminal FM and terminal AM using parameters
H4-07 and H4-08.

H4-07 Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal FM Signal Level Selection 0, 1 0
H4-08 Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal AM Signal Level Selection 0, 1 0
Setting 0: 0 to 10 V
Setting 1: -10 V to 10 V
■ L3-01: Stall Prevention Selection during Acceleration
Stall Prevention during acceleration (L3-01) prevents tripping with overcurrent (oC), motor overload (oL1), or drive
overload (oL2) faults common when accelerating with heavy loads.
L3-01 determines the type of Stall Prevention the drive should used during acceleration.

L3-01 Stall Prevention Selection during Acceleration 0 to 2 <1> 1
<1> Setting 2 is not available for PM OLV.
Setting 0: Disabled
No Stall Prevention is provided. If the acceleration time is too short, the drive may not be able to get the motor up to
speed fast enough, thus tripping an overload fault.
Setting 1: Enabled
Enables Stall Prevention during acceleration. Operation varies, depending on the control mode.
• V/f Control, V/f Control with PG, and Open Loop Vector Control:
If the output current rises above the Stall Prevention level set in L3-02, then the drive stops accelerating. Acceleration
will not resume until the output current falls 15% below the setting in L3-02.
The Stall Prevention level is automatically reduced in the constant power range. Refer to L3-03: Stall Prevention
Limit during Acceleration on page 88.
Figure 75
Output current
Stall Prevention Level

During Acceleration
L3-02
L3-02
-15%
Time
Output frequency
& Operation
Controls the output frequency

to prevent the motor from stalling
Time
4
Figure 75 Stall Prevention During Acceleration for Induction Motors
• Open Loop Vector Control for PM:
If the output current remains above the Stall Prevention level set in L3-02 for the time set in L3-27, then the drive will
begin to decelerate using the deceleration time set in L3-22. Acceleration will not resume until the output current falls
15% below the setting in L3-02.
Figure 76
Output current
L3-02 15 % of L3-02
Time
Output frequency
L3-27
L3-27
Time
Deceleration
using L3-22
Figure 76 Stall Prevention During Acceleration for Permanent Magnet Motors
Setting 2: Intelligent Stall Prevention
When L3-02 = 2, the drive will disregard the selected acceleration time and try to accelerate in the minimum time. The
acceleration rate is adjusted so that the current does not exceed the value set in parameter L3-02.
■ L3-02: Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration
Sets the output current level at which the Stall Prevention during acceleration is activated.

L3-02 Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration 0 to 150% <1> <1>
<1> The upper limit and default value is determined by the duty rating and the carrier frequency derating selection (C6-01 and L8-38 respectively).
• Stalling may occur when the motor is rated at a smaller capacity than the drive and the Stall Prevention default settings
are used. Set L3-02 as appropriate if stalling occurs.
• When operating the motor in the constant power range, also set parameter L3-03.
■ L3-03: Stall Prevention Limit during Acceleration
The Stall Prevention level is automatically reduced when the motor is operated in the constant power range. L3-03 sets
the lower limit for this reduction as a percentage of the drive rated current.

L3-03 Stall Prevention Limit during Acceleration 0 to 100% 50%
Figure 77
Stall Prevention level during Acceleration
L3-02
L3-03
Output frequency
E1-06
Base frequency
Figure 77 Stall Prevention Level and Limit During Acceleration
■ L3-04: Stall Prevention Selection during Deceleration

Stall Prevention during deceleration can control the deceleration based on the DC bus voltage and prevent an overvoltage
fault caused by high inertia or rapid deceleration.

L3-04 Stall Prevention Selection During Deceleration 0 to 5 <1> 1
<1> Settings 3 through 5 are not available in OLV/PM. Settings 2 through 5 are not available in AOLV/PM and CLV/PM.
Setting 0: Disabled
When this setting is used, the drive decelerates according to the set deceleration time. With high inertia loads or rapid
deceleration, an overvoltage (ov) fault may occur. In this case use dynamic braking options or switch to another L3-04
selection.
Setting 1: General-purpose Stall Prevention
With this setting the drive tries to decelerate within the set deceleration time. When the DC bus voltage exceeds the Stall
Prevention level, the drive pauses deceleration. Deceleration continues as soon as the DC bus voltage drops below that
level. Stall Prevention may be triggered repeatedly to avoid an overvoltage fault. The DC bus voltage level for Stall
Prevention depends on the input voltage setting E1-01.
Drive Input Voltage Stall Prevention Level during Deceleration

200 V Class 377 Vdc
400 V Class 754 Vdc
Note: 1. This setting should not be used in combination with a Dynamic Braking Resistor or other dynamic braking options. If Stall
Prevention during deceleration is enabled, it will be triggered before the braking resistor option can operate.
2. This method may lengthen the total deceleration time compared to the set value. If this is not appropriate for the application consider
using a dynamic braking option.
Figure 78 illustrates the function of Stall Prevention during deceleration.

Figure 78
Output Frequency
Deceleration characteristics
when Stall Prevention was
triggered during deceleration
Time
specified deceleration time
Figure 78 Stall Prevention During Deceleration

Setting 2: Intelligent Stall Prevention
With this setting, the drive adjusts the deceleration rate so that the DC bus voltage is kept at the level set in parameter L3-
17. This way the shortest possible deceleration time is achieved while the motor is protected from stalling. The
deceleration time that has been selected is disregarded, but the achievable deceleration time cannot be smaller than 1/10
of the set deceleration time.
This function uses the following parameters for adjusting the deceleration rate:
• DC bus voltage gain (L3-20)
• Deceleration rate calculations gain (L3-21)
• Inertia calculations for motor acceleration time (L3-24)
• Load inertia ratio (L3-25)
Note: As the deceleration time is not constant, Intelligent Stall Prevention should not be used in applications where stopping accuracy
is a concern. Use dynamic braking options instead.

Setting 3: Stall Prevention with dynamic braking option
Enables the Stall Prevention function while using a dynamic braking resistor. Overvoltage problems in the DC bus can
& Operation
occur if Stall Prevention during deceleration is disabled (L3-04) in OLV and a dynamic braking option is installed. Set
L3-04 to 3 to remedy this situation.
Setting 4: Overexcitation Deceleration 1
4
Overexcitation Deceleration 1 (increasing the motor flux) is faster than deceleration with no Stall Prevention (L3-04 = 0).
Setting 5: Overexcitation Deceleration 2
Overexcitation Deceleration 2 slows down the motor while trying to maintain the DC bus voltage at the level set in
parameter L3-17. By doing this, the achievable deceleration time can even be shorter than with Overexcitation
Deceleration 1.
■ L3-05: Stall Prevention Selection during Run

Stall Prevention during run can prevent a motor from stalling by automatically reducing the speed when a transient
overload occurs while the motor is running at constant speed.
This parameter determines how Stall Prevention works during run.

L3-05 Stall Prevention Selection During Run 0 to 2 1
Note: 1. This function is available in V/f, V/f w/PG, and OLV/PM.

2. When output frequency is 6 Hz or less, Stall Prevention during run is disabled regardless of the setting in L3-05 and L3-06.
Setting 0: Disabled
Drive runs at the set frequency reference. A heavy load may cause the motor to stall and trip the drive with an oC or oL
fault.
Setting 1: Decelerate using C1-02
If the current exceeds the Stall Prevention level set in parameter L3-06, then the drive will decelerate at decel time 1 (C1-
02). Once the current level drops below the value of L3-06 minus 2% for 100 ms, the drive accelerates back to the
frequency reference at the active acceleration time.
Setting 2: Decelerate using C1-04
Same as setting 1 except the drive decelerates at decel time 2 (C1-04).
■ L3-06: Stall Prevention Level during Run
Sets the current level to trigger Stall Prevention during run. Depending on the setting of parameter L3-23, the level is
automatically reduced in the constant power range (speed beyond base speed).
The Stall Prevention level can be adjusted using an analog input.

L3-06 Stall Prevention Level During Run 30 to 150 <1> <1>
<1> The upper limit and default for this setting is determined by C6-01 and L8-38.
■ L7-01 to L7-04: Torque Limits

These parameters set the torque limits in each operation mode.

L7-01 Forward Torque Limit 0 to 300% 200%
L7-02 Reverse Torque Limit 0 to 300% 200%
L7-03 Forward Regenerative Torque Limit 0 to 300% 200%
L7-04 Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit 0 to 300% 200%
Note: If the multi-function analog input is programmed for “10: Forward torque limit”, “11: Reverse torque limit”, “12: Regenerative
torque limit”, or “15: General torque limit”, the drive uses the lower value in L7-01 through L7-04, or analog input torque limit.
Figure 79
positive torque reference
REV run regenerative FWD run motoring
10: Positive Torque Limit 10: Positive Torque Limit

12: Regenerative Torque Limit 15: Torque Limit
15: Torque Limit Parameter L7-01
Parameter L7-04
quadrant 2 quadrant 1
REV motor rotation FWD motor rotation
quadrant 3 quadrant 4
11: Negative Torque Limit
11: Negative Torque Limit 12: Regenerative Torque Limit
15: Torque Limit 15: Torque Limit
Parameter L7-03 Parameter L7-02
REV run motoring FWD run regenerative
negative torque reference YEC_QSGonly

Figure 79 Torque Limit Parameters and Analog Input Settings
◆ Auto-Tuning
■ Types of Auto-Tuning
The drive offers different types of Auto-Tuning for induction motors and permanent magnet motors. The type of Auto-
Tuning used differs further based on the control mode and other operating conditions. Refer to the tables below to select
the type of Auto-Tuning that bests suits the application. Directions on how to execute Auto-Tuning are listed in Start-Up
Flowcharts on page 58.
Note: The drive will only show Auto-Tuning parameters that are valid for the control mode that has been set to A1-02. If the control
mode is for an induction motor, the Auto-Tuning parameters for PM motors will not be available. If the control mode is for a PM
motor, the Auto-Tuning parameters for induction motors will not be available. Inertia Tuning and ASR Gain Tuning parameters
and setting options will be visible only when the drive is set for operation with Closed Loop Vector or CLV/PM.
Auto-Tuning for Induction Motors
This feature automatically sets the V/f pattern and motor parameters E1- and E2- (E3-, E4- for motor 2)
for an induction motor. In Closed Loop Vector, some F1- parameters for speed feedback detection are also set up.
Table 42 Types of Auto-Tuning for Induction Motors
Control Mode
Type Setting Application Conditions and Benefits
V/f V/f w/PG OLV CLV
• Motor can be decoupled from the load and rotate freely
while Auto-Tuning is performed.
• Motor and load can not be decoupled but the motor load
Rotational Auto-Tuning T1-01 = 0 N/A N/A YES YES
is below 30%.
• Rotational Auto-Tuning gives the most accurate results,
and is therefore highly recommended if possible.
• Motor and load can not be decoupled and the load is
higher than 30%.
Stationary Auto-Tuning
T1-01 = 1 • A motor test report listing motor data is not available. N/A N/A YES YES
1
• Automatically calculates motor parameters needed for
vector control.
• Motor and load can not be decoupled and the load is
higher than 30%.
T1-01 = 4 • A motor test report is available. Once the no-load current N/A N/A YES YES
2
and the rated slip have been entered, the drive calculates
and sets all other motor-related parameters.
• The drive is used in V/f Control and other Auto-Tuning
selections not possible.
• Drive and motor capacities differ.
• Tunes the drive after the cable between the drive and
for Line-to-Line T1-01 = 2 YES YES YES YES
motor has been replaced with a cable over 50 m long.
Resistance
Assumes Auto-Tuning has already been performed.
• Should not be used for any vector control modes unless
the motor cable has changed.
• Recommended for applications using Speed Estimation
Speed Search or using the Energy Saving function in V/f
Control.
Rotational Auto-Tuning
T1-01 = 3 • Assumes motor can rotate while Auto-Tuning is YES YES N/A N/A
for V/f Control
executed. Increases accuracy for certain functions like
torque compensation, slip compensation, Energy Saving,
& Operation
and Speed Search.
Table 43 lists the data that must be entered for Auto-Tuning. Make sure this data is available before starting Auto-
Tuning. The information needed is usually listed on the motor nameplate or in the motor test report provided by the
motor manufacturer. Also refer to page 60 and 61 for details on Auto-Tuning process and selections. 4
Table 43 Auto-Tuning Input Data

Tuning Type (T1-01)
Input 2 3
Input Value Unit 0 1 4
Parameter Line-to-Line Rotational for
Standard Stationary 1 Stationary 2
Resistance V/f Control
Motor rated power T1-02 kW YES YES YES YES YES
Motor rated voltage T1-03 Vac YES YES N/A YES YES
Motor rated current T1-04 A YES YES YES YES YES
Motor rated frequency T1-05 Hz YES YES N/A YES YES
Number of motor poles T1-06 - YES YES N/A YES YES
Motor rated Speed T1-07 r/min YES YES N/A YES YES
PG Number of pulses per
T1-08 - YES <1> YES <1> N/A N/A YES <1>
revolution
Motor no-load current T1-09 A N/A YES N/A N/A YES
Motor rated Slip T1-10 Hz N/A N/A N/A N/A YES
Motor iron loss T1-11 W N/A N/A N/A YES N/A
<1> Input data is needed for CLV/PM only.
Auto-Tuning for Permanent Magnet Motors

Automatically sets the V/f pattern and motor parameters E1- and E5- when a PM motor is used. In Closed Loop
Vector Control, the Auto-Tuning process will also set some F1- parameters for speed feedback detection.
Table 44 Types of Auto-Tuning for Permanent Magnet Motors
Control Mode
Type Setting Application Conditions and Benefits
OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM
• Motor does not rotate during Auto-Tuning
PM Motor Parameter
T2-01 = 0 • Motor test report or motor data like listed in Table 45 are YES YES YES
Settings
available.
• A motor test report listing motor data is not available.
PM Stationary Auto-
T2-01 = 1 Drive automatically calculates and sets motor YES YES YES
Tuning
parameters.
• Useful to tune the drive when the motor data were set up
PM Stationary Auto-
manually or by motor code and the cable is longer than
Tuning for Stator T2-01 = 2 YES YES YES
50 m. Should also be performed if the cable has changed
Resistance
after earlier tuning.
• PG encoder has been replaced. Calculates the Z pulse
Z Pulse Offset Tuning T2-01 = 3 offset. N/A N/A YES
• Requires the motor to rotate with no or very low load.
Table 45 lists the data that must be entered for Auto-Tuning. Make sure the data is available before starting Auto-Tuning.
The information needed is usually listed on the motor nameplate or in the motor test report provided by the motor
manufacturer. Also refer to page 62 for details on the tuning mode selection and the tuning process.
Tuning Type (T2-01)
Input 2 3
Input Value Unit 0 1
Parameter Phase Z-Pulse
Parameter Calculation Stationary Resistance Offset
Control Mode A1-02 - 5, 6, 7 5 6, 7 5 6, 7 5, 6, 7 7
Motor Code T2-02 - <1> <1> <1> <2> <2> <2> <2>
Motor Type T2-03 - N/A N/A N/A YES YES N/A N/A
Motor rated power T2-04 kW N/A YES YES YES YES N/A N/A
Motor rated voltage T2-05 Vac N/A YES YES YES YES N/A N/A
Motor rated current T2-06 A N/A YES YES YES YES YES N/A
Motor rated frequency T2-07 Hz N/A YES N/A YES N/A N/A N/A
Number of motor poles T2-08 - N/A YES YES YES YES N/A N/A
Motor rated Speed T2-09 r/min N/A N/A YES N/A YES N/A N/A
Stator 1 Phase resistance T2-10 Ω YES YES YES N/A N/A N/A N/A
d-axis inductance T2-11 mH YES YES YES N/A N/A N/A N/A
q-axis inductance T2-12 mH YES YES YES N/A N/A N/A N/A
Voltage constant <3> T2-13 mVs/rad (el.) YES YES YES N/A N/A N/A N/A
mVmin
Voltage constant <3> T2-14 YES YES YES N/A N/A N/A N/A
(mech.)
Tuning pull-in current T2-15 A N/A N/A N/A YES YES N/A N/A
PG Number of pulses per
T2-16 - YES <4> N/A YES <4> N/A YES <4> N/A N/A
revolution
Z Pulse Offset T2-17 deg (mech.) YES <4> N/A YES <4> N/A YES <4> N/A N/A
<1> Input the motor code when using the YASKAWA motor. Select FFFF when using the motor by other manufacturers.
<2> T2-02 is not available.
<3> Only parameter T2-13 or T2-14 has to be input. Select one and leave the other empty.
<4> Input data is needed for CLV/PM only.
Inertia Tuning and Speed Control Loop Auto-Tuning

Inertia Tuning can be performed when the drive is using Closed Loop Vector control for either IM or PM motors. Inertia
Tuning automatically calculates load and motor inertia, and optimizes settings related to the KEB Ride-Thru function
(KEB 2) and Feed Forward control.
ASR Gain Auto-Tuning performs the same operation as Inertia Tuning, but also optimizes speed control loop settings.
Table 46 Inertia and Speed Control Loop Tuning
Setting Control Mode
Type IM PM Application Conditions and Benefits
CLV CLV/PM
Motor Motor
Lets the motor rotate at a certain speed and applies a test signal. The
T2-01 = response to the test signals are analyzed, and adjustments are made
Inertia Tuning T1-01 = 8 YES YES
8 to parameters controlling the Feed Forward and KEB Ride-Thru
functions (KEB 2, L2-29 = 1).
& Operation
T2-01 = Performs the same operation as Inertia Tuning, but also adjusts the
ASR Gain Auto-Tuning T1-01 = 9 YES YES
9 ASR gain according to the response to the test signal.
Table 47 explains that data that must be entered in order to perform the Inertia Tuning and ASR Gain Auto-Tuning. Refer
to Auto-Tuning for Permanent Magnet Motors on page 92 for details.
Tuning Type (T1-01 or T2-01)
Input Value Input Parameter Unit 8 9
Inertia Tuning ASR Gain Tuning
Test signal frequency T3-01 Hz YES YES
Test signal Amplitude T3-02 rad YES YES
Motor inertia T3-03 kgm2 YES YES
System response frequency T3-04 Hz N/A YES
■ Auto-Tuning Interruption and Fault Codes

If tuning results are abnormal or the STOP key is pressed before completion, Auto-Tuning will be interrupted and a fault
code will appear on the digital operator.
Figure 80
A B
ALM
ALM
YEC_common REV DRV

DRV FOUT REV DRV FOUT
A – During Auto-Tuning B – Auto-Tuning Aborted

Figure 80 Auto-Tuning Aborted Display
■ Auto-Tuning Operation Example

The following example demonstrates Rotational Auto-Tuning when using OLV (A1-02 = 2) and CLV (A1-02 = 3).
Selecting the Type of Auto-Tuning
Step Display/Result
DRV FOUT
2. Press the or key until the Auto-Tuning display appears.
3. Press to begin setting parameters.
4. Press to display the value for T1-01. <1>
5. Save the setting by pressing .
6. The display automatically returns to the display shown in Step 3.
<1> T1-00 will appear on the display when one of the multi-function inputs has been set to switch between motor 1 and motor 2 (H1- = 16).
Enter Data from the Motor Nameplate

After selecting the type of Auto-Tuning, enter the data required from the motor nameplate.
Note: These instructions continue from Step 6 in “Selecting the Type of Auto-Tuning”.
Step Display/Result
1. Press to access the motor output power parameter T1-02.
2. Press to view the default setting.
3. Press to select the digit to edit.
4. Press and enter the motor power nameplate data in kW.
5. Press to save the setting.
6. The display automatically returns to the display in Step 1.
Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to set the following parameters:

• T1-03, Motor Rated Voltage
• T1-04, Motor Rated Current
• T1-05, Motor Base Frequency
7.
• T1-06, Number of Motor Poles
• T1-07, Motor Base Frequency
• T1-09, Motor No-Load Current (Stationary Auto-Tuning 1 or 2 only)
• T1-10, Motor Rated Slip (Stationary Auto-Tuning 2 only)
Note: To execute Stationary Auto-Tuning for line-to-line resistance only, set parameters T1-02 and T1-04.
Starting Auto-Tuning
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. The drive and motor may start unexpectedly during Auto-Tuning, which could result in death
or serious injury. Ensure the area surrounding the drive motor and load are clear before proceeding with Auto-Tuning.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. High voltage will be supplied to the motor when Stationary Auto-Tuning is performed even with
the motor stopped, which could result in death or serious injury. Do not touch the motor until Auto-Tuning has been completed.
NOTICE: Rotational Auto-Tuning will not function properly if a holding brake is engaged on the load. Failure to comply could result in
improper operation of the drive. Ensure the motor can freely spin before beginning Auto-Tuning.
Enter the required information from the motor nameplate. Press to proceed to the Auto-Tuning start display.
Note: These instructions continue from Step 7 in “Enter Data from the Motor Nameplate”.
Step Display/Result
1. After entering the data listed on the motor nameplate, press to confirm.
Press to activate Auto-Tuning. flashes. The drive begins by injecting

current into the motor for about 1 min, and then starts to rotate the motor.
2. Note: The first digit on the display indicates which motor is undergoing Auto-Tuning
REV DRV
DRV FOUT
(motor 1 or motor 2). The second digit indicates the type of Auto-Tuning being
performed.
& Operation
3. Auto-Tuning finishes in approximately one to two minutes.
◆ No-Load Operation Test Run

4
■ No-Load Operation Test Run
This section explains how to operate the drive with the motor decoupled from the load during a test run.
Before Starting the Motor
Check the following items before operation:
• Ensure the area around the motor is safe.
• Ensure external emergency stop circuitry is working properly and other safety precautions have been taken.
During Operation
Check the following items during operation:
• The motor should rotate smoothly (i.e., no abnormal noise or oscillation).
• The motor should accelerate and decelerate smoothly.
No-Load Operation Instructions
The following example illustrates a test run procedure using the digital operator.
Note: Before starting the motor, set the frequency reference d1-01 to 6 Hz.
Step Display/Result
DRV FOUT
REV DRV
DRV FOUT
2.
LO
ESC
Press the key to select LOCAL. The LO/RE light will turn on.
RE
RESET ENTER
RUN STOP
Off On
REV DRV
DRV FOUT
LO
ESC
RE
3. Press to give the drive a Run command. RUN will light and the motor will RESET ENTER
rotate at 6 Hz.
RUN STOP
Off On
Motor
4. Ensure the motor is rotating in the correct direction and that no faults or alarms occur.
Forward
If there is no error in step 4, press to increase the frequency reference. Increase

5. the frequency in increments of 10 Hz, verifying smooth operation at all speeds. For
each frequency, check the drive output current using monitor U1-03. The current
should be well below the motor rated current.
REV DRV
DRV FOUT
LO
ESC
RE
6. The drive should operate normally. Press STOP to stop the motor. RUN flashes until RESET
RUN
ENTER
STOP
the motor comes to a complete stop.
Flashing Off
◆ Test Run with Load Connected

■ Test Run with the Load Connected
After performing a no-load test run, connect the motor and proceed to run the motor and load together.
Notes on Connected Machinery
• Clear the area around the motor.
• The motor should come to a complete stop without problems.
• Connect the load and machinery to the motor.
• Fasten all installation screws properly. Check that the motor and connected machinery are held in place.
• Confirm that the Fast Stop circuit or mechanical safety measures operate correctly.
• Be ready to press the STOP button in case of emergency.
Checklist Before Operation
• The motor should rotate in the proper direction.
• The motor should accelerate and decelerate smoothly.
Operating the Motor under Loaded Conditions
Test run the application similarly to the no-load test procedure when connecting the machinery to the motor.
• Watch monitor parameter U1-03 during operation to ensure there is no overcurrent.
• If the application permits running the load in the reverse direction, try changing motor direction and the frequency
reference while watching for abnormal motor oscillation or vibration.
• Correct any problems that occur with hunting, oscillation, or other control-related issues.
◆ Test Run Checklist

Review the checklist before performing a test run. Check each item that applies.
No. Checklist Page
1 Thoroughly read the manual before performing a test run. –

2 Turn the power on. 63
3 Set the voltage for the power supply to E1-01. 75
4 Select the correct duty rating (C6-01) for the application. –
Check the items that correspond to the control mode being used.
WARNING! Ensure start/stop and safety circuits are wired properly and in the correct state before energizing the drive. Failure to
comply could result in death or serious injury from moving equipment. When programmed for 3-Wire control, a momentary closure on
terminal S1 may cause the drive to start.
No. Checklist Page
V/f Control (A1-02 = 0) and V/f Control with PG (A1-02 = 1)

Select the best V/f pattern according to the application and motor characteristics.
5 –
Example: If using a motor with a rated frequency of 60.0 Hz, set E1-03 to “1”.
6 Perform Rotational Auto-Tuning for V/f Control if using Energy Saving functions. 91
V/f Control with PG (A1-02 = 1)
7 Setup the PG feedback parameters correctly and make sure the encoder pulse counting direction is correct. –
8 Set the proportional gain for ASR speed control to C5-01 and the integral time to C5-02. –
Open Loop Vector Control (A1-02 = 2) or Closed Loop Vector Control (A1-02=3)
9 Perform Auto-Tuning as described. 91
Closed Loop Vector Control (A1-02 = 3)

Set the proportional gain for ASR speed control to C5-01 and the integral time to C5-02. Perform ASR Tuning
10 –
if possible.
& Operation
Open Loop Vector Control for PM (A1-02 = 5)

Advanced Open Loop Vector Control for PM (A1-02 = 6)
12 Perform Auto-Tuning as described. 91 4
13 Set the proportional gain for ASR speed control to C5-01 and the integral time to C5-02. –
Closed Loop Vector Control for PM (A1-02 = 7)
Set the proportional gain for ASR speed control to C5-01 and the integral time to C5-02. Perform ASR Tuning
15 –
if possible.
16 Set the Z pulse offset to or enter the Z manually to parameter E5-11. –
Proceed to the following checklist after checking items 4 through 15.
No. Checklist Page
17 The should light after giving a Run command. –

To give a Run command and frequency reference from the digital operator, press to set to LOCAL.
18 58
The LO/RE key will light.
If the motor rotates in the opposite direction during the test run, switch two of the drive output terminals (U/
20 63
T1, V/T2, W/T3) or change parameter b1-14.
Set the correct values for the motor rated current (E2-01, E4-01, E5-03) and motor protection (L1-01) to
21 –
ensure motor thermal protection.
If the Run command and frequency reference are provided via the control circuit terminals, set the drive for
22 58
REMOTE and be sure the LO/RE light is out.
If the control circuit terminals should supply the frequency reference, select the correct voltage input signal
23 65
level (0 to 10 V) or the correct current input signal level (4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA).
24 Set the proper voltage to terminal A1 and A3 (-10 to +10 V). 65
When current input is used, switch the drive’s built-in DIP switch S1 from the V-side to I-side. Set the level
25 65
for current signal used to H3-09 (set “2” for 4 to 20 mA, or “3” for 0 to 20 mA).
26 Set the proper current to terminal A2. (-10 to +10 V, 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA). 65
If the frequency reference is supplied via one of the analog inputs, make sure the analog input produces the
desired frequency reference. Make the following adjustments if the drive does not operate as expected:
Gain adjustment: Set the maximum voltage/current signal and adjust the analog input gain (H3-03 for input
A1, H3-11 for input A2, H3-07 for analog input A3) until the frequency reference value reaches the desired
27 –
value.
Bias adjustment: Set the minimum voltage/current signal and adjust the analog input bias (H3-04 for input A1,
H3-12 for input A2, H3-08 for analog input A3) until the frequency reference value reaches the desired
minimum value.
5 Troubleshooting
5 Troubleshooting
◆ Drive Alarms, Faults, and Errors
■ Types of Alarms, Faults, and Errors
Check the digital operator for information about possible faults if the drive or motor fails to operate. Refer to Using the
Digital Operator on page 53.
If problems occur that are not covered in this manual, contact the nearest Yaskawa representative with the following
information:
• Drive model
• Software version
• Date of purchase
• Description of the problem
Table 48 contains descriptions of the various types of alarms, faults, and errors that may occur while operating the drive.
Contact Yaskawa in the event of drive failure.
Table 48 Types of Alarms, Faults, and Errors
Type Drive Response
When the drive detects a fault:
• The digital operator displays text that indicates the specific fault and the ALM indicator LED remains lit until the fault
is reset.
Faults • The fault interrupts drive output and the motor coasts to a stop.
• Some faults allow the user to select how the drive should stop when the fault occurs.
• Fault output terminals MA-MC will close, and MB-MC will open.
The drive will remain inoperable until that fault has been cleared. Refer to Fault Reset Methods on page 117.
When the drive detects an alarm or a minor fault:
• The digital operator displays text that indicates the specific alarm or minor fault, and the ALM indicator LED flashes.
• The drive generally continues running the motor, although some alarms allow the user to select a stopping method
Minor Faults and when the alarm occurs.
Alarms • One of the multi-function contact outputs closes if set to be tripped by a minor fault (H2- = 10), but not by an
alarm.
• The digital operator displays text indicating a specific alarm and ALM indicator LED flashes.
To reset the a minor fault or alarm, remove whatever is causing the problem.
When parameter settings conflict with one another or do not match hardware settings (such as with an option card), it
results in an operation error. When the drive detects an operation error:
• The digital operator displays text that indicates the specific error.
Operation Errors
• Multi-function contact outputs do not operate.
The drive will not operate the motor until the error has been reset. Correct the settings that caused the operation error to
clear the error.
Tuning errors occur while performing Auto-Tuning. When the drive detects a tuning error:
• The digital operator displays text indicating the specific error.
Tuning Errors • Multi-function contact outputs do not operate.
• Motor coasts to stop.
Remove the cause of the error and repeat the Auto-Tuning process.
These are the types of errors that can occur when using the optional digital operator or the USB Copy Unit to copy, read,
or verify parameter settings.
Troubleshooting
• The digital operator displays text indicating the specific error.

Copy Function Errors
• Multi-function contact outputs do not operate.
Pressing any key on the operator will clear the fault. Find out what is causing the problem (such as model
incompatibility) and try again.
5 Troubleshooting
◆ Fault Detection
■ Fault Displays, Causes, and Possible Solutions
Faults are detected for drive protection, and cause the drive to stop. When a fault occurs, the fault output terminal MA-
MB-MC is triggered. Faults have to be cleared manually after removing the cause to start running the drive again.
Table 49 Detailed Fault Displays, Causes, and Possible Solutions
Digital Operator Display Fault Name
Braking Transistor Overload Fault
boL
The braking transistor has reached its overload level.
Option Communication Error
bUS • After establishing initial communication, the connection was lost.
• Only detected when the run command frequency reference is assigned to an option card.
Cause Possible Solution
No signal received from the PLC. • Check for faulty wiring.
Faulty communications wiring or a short • Correct the wiring.
circuit exists. • Check for disconnected cables and short circuits. Repair as needed.
• Check the various options available to minimize the effects of noise.
• Take steps to counteract noise in the control circuit, main circuit, and ground wiring.
• Ensure that other equipment such as switches or relays do not cause noise. Use surge suppressors if
A communications data error occurred due necessary.
to noise. • Use only recommended cables or other shielded line. Ground the shield on the controller side or on
the drive input power side.
• Separate all communication wiring from drive power lines. Install an EMC noise filter to the drive
power supply input.
The option card is damaged. • Replace the option card if there are no problems with the wiring and the error continues to occur.
• The connector pins on the option card are not properly lined up with the connector pins on the
The option card is not properly connected to
drive.
the drive.
• Reinstall the option card.
MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error
CE
Control data was not received for the CE detection time set to H5-09.
• Check for faulty wiring.
Faulty communications wiring or a short
• Correct the wiring.
circuit exists.
• Check for disconnected cables and short circuits. Repair as needed.
• Check the various options available to minimize the effects of noise.
• Take steps to counteract noise in the control circuit, main circuit, and ground wiring.
• Use only recommended cables or other shielded line. Ground the shield on the controller side or on
Communication data error occurred due to the drive input power side.
noise. • Ensure that other equipment such as switches or relays do not cause noise and use surge
suppressors if required.
• Separate all communication wiring from drive power lines. Install an EMC noise filter to the drive
power supply input.
Control Fault
CF A torque limit was reached continuously for three seconds or longer while ramping to stop in Open
Loop Vector Control.
or
CPF00 or CPF01
Control Circuit Error
<1>
<1>
A/D Conversion Error

CPF02
An A/D conversion error or control circuit error occurred.
Control Board Connection Error
CPF03
Connection error between the control board and the drive
EEPROM Memory Data Error
CPF06
There is an error in the data saved to EEPROM.
5 Troubleshooting

• Turn the power off and check the connection between the control board and the drive.
There is an error in EEPROM control
• If the problem continues, replace either the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on
circuit.
replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
The power supply was switched off when
Reinitialize the drive (A1-03).
parameters were being saved to the drive.
CPF07
Terminal Board Connection Error
CPF08
or
CPF20 or CPF21 Control Circuit Error
<1>
CPF22 Hybrid IC Error

Control Board Connection Error
CPF23
Connection error between the control board and the drive
Drive Unit Signal Fault
CPF24 The drive capacity cannot be detected correctly (drive capacity is checked when the drive is powered
up).
Control Circuit Error
to CPF26 to CPF34
CPU error
Replace either the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on replacing the control board,
Hardware is damaged.
contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
Speed Deviation (for Control Mode with PG)
dEv The deviation between the speed reference and speed feedback is greater than the setting in F1-10 for
longer than the time set to F1-11.
Z Pulse Fault
dv1
The motor turned one full rotation without the Z pulse being detected.
Z Pulse Noise Fault Detection
dv2 The Z pulse is out of phase by more than 5 degrees for the number of times specified in parameter
F1-17.
Inversion Detection
The torque reference and acceleration are in opposite directions from one another (one is in reverse
dv3
and the other is forward) while at the same time the speed reference and actual motor speed differ by
over 30% for the number of pulses set to F1-18.
Inversion Prevention Detection
Pulses indicate that the motor is rotating in the opposite direction of the speed reference. Set the
dv4 number of pulses to trigger inverse detection to F1-19.
Note: Disable inverse detection in applications where the motor may rotate in the opposite direction
of the speed reference. Setting F1-19 to 0 disables this feature.
dWAL
DriveWorksEZ Fault
dWFL
SI-T3 Watchdog Timer Error
E5
The watchdog has timed out.
Option Card External Fault
Troubleshooting
EF0
An external fault condition is present.
An external fault was received from the
PLC with other than F6-03 = 3 “alarm only” • Remove the cause of the external fault.
(the drive continued to run after external • Remove the external fault input from the PLC.
fault). 5
Problem with the PLC program. Check the PLC program and correct problems.
5 Troubleshooting

External Fault (input terminal S1)
EF1
External fault at multi-function input terminal S1.
EF2
EF3
EF4
EF5
EF6
EF7
External fault at multi-function input terminal S7
EF8
External fault at multi-function input terminal S8
An external device has tripped an alarm
Remove the cause of the external fault and reset the fault.
function.
• Ensure the signal lines have been connected properly to the terminals assigned for external fault
Wiring is incorrect. detection (H1- = 20 to 2F).
• Reconnect the signal line.
Incorrect setting of multi-function contact • Check if the any unused terminals are set for H1- = 20 to 2F (External Fault).
inputs. • Change the terminal settings.
EEPROM Write Error
Err
Data cannot be written to the EEPROM.
Internal Fan Fault
FAn
Fan or magnetic contactor failed.
Excessive PID Feedback
FbH PID feedback input is greater than the level set b5-36 for longer than the time set to b5-37. To enable
fault detection, set b5-12 = 2 or 5.
PID Feedback Loss
FbL This fault occurs when PID feedback loss detection is programmed to trigger a fault (b5-12 = 2) and
the PID feedback level is below the detection level set to b5-13 for longer than the time set to b5-14.
Ground Fault
• A current short to ground exceeded 50% of rated current on the output side of the drive.
GF
• Setting L8-09 to 1 enables ground fault detection in models 2A0030 through 2A0415 and 4A0018
through 4A0675.
• Check the insulation resistance of the motor.
Motor insulation is damaged.
• Replace the motor.
• Check the motor cable.
A damaged motor cable is creating a short • Remove the short circuit and turn the power back on.
circuit. • Check the resistance between the cable and the ground terminal .
• Replace the cable.
The leakage current at the drive output is • Reduce the carrier frequency.
too high. • Reduce the amount of stray capacitance.
• The value set exceeds the allowable setting range while the drive automatically adjusts the current
offset (this happens only when attempting to restart a PM motor that is coasting to stop).
The drive started to run during a current
• Enable Speed Search at start (b3-01 = 1).
offset fault or while coasting to a stop.
• Perform Speed Search 1 or 2 (H1- = 61 or 62) via one of the external terminals.
Note: Speed Search 1 and 2 are the same when using PM OLV.
Hardware problem.
5 Troubleshooting

Output Phase Loss
LF • Phase loss on the output side of the drive.
• Phase Loss Detection is enabled when L8-07 is set to 1 or 2.
• Check for wiring errors and ensure the output cable is connected properly.
The output cable is disconnected.
• Check the resistance between motor lines.
The motor winding is damaged.
• Replace the motor if the winding is damaged.
• Apply the tightening torque specified in this manual to fasten the terminals. Refer to Wire Size and
The output terminal is loose.
Torque Specifications on page 46.
The rated current of the motor being used is
Check the drive and motor capacities.
less than 5% of the drive rated current.
An output transistor is damaged.
A single-phase motor is being used. The drive cannot operate a single phase motor.
Output current imbalance (detected when L8-29 = 1)
LF2
One or more of the phases in the output current is lost.
Phase loss has occurred on the output side • Check for faulty wiring or poor connections on the output side of the drive.
of the drive. • Correct the wiring.
Terminal wires on the output side of the Apply the tightening torque specified in this manual to fasten the terminals. Refer to Wire Size and
drive are loose. Torque Specifications on page 46.
The output circuit is damaged.
Motor impedance or motor phases are • Measure the line-to-line resistance for each motor phase. Ensure all values are the same.
uneven. • Replace the motor.
Node Setup Error
nSE
A terminal assigned to the node setup function closed during run.
The node setup terminal closed during run.
A run command was issued while the node Stop the drive when using the node setup function.
setup function was active.
Overcurrent
oC
Drive sensors have detected an output current greater than the specified overcurrent level.
The motor has been damaged due to
• Check the insulation resistance.
overheating or the motor insulation is
• Replace the motor.
damaged.
• Check the motor cables.
One of the motor cables has shorted out or • Remove the short circuit and power the drive back up.
there is a grounding problem. • Check the resistance between the motor cables and the ground terminal .
• Replace damaged cables.
• Measure the current flowing into the motor.
• Replace the drive with a larger capacity unit if the current value exceeds the rated current of the
Troubleshooting
The load is too heavy. drive.

• Determine if there is sudden fluctuation in the current level.
• Reduce the load to avoid sudden changes in the current level or switch to a larger drive.
Calculate the torque needed during acceleration relative to the load inertia and the specified
acceleration time. If the right amount of torque cannot be set, make the following changes:
The acceleration or deceleration times are
• Increase the acceleration time (C1-01, -03, -05, -07)
too short.
• Increase the S-curve characteristics (C2-01 through C2-04)
5
• Increase the capacity of the drive.
The drive is attempting to operate a • Check the motor capacity.
specialized motor or a motor larger than the • Ensure that the rated capacity of the drive is greater than or equal to the capacity rating found on
maximum size allowed. the motor nameplate.
5 Troubleshooting
Magnetic contactor (MC) on the output side

Set up the operation sequence so that the MC is not tripped while the drive is outputting current.
of the drive has turned on or off.
• Check the ratios between the voltage and frequency.
V/f setting is not operating as expected. • Set parameter E1-04 through E1-10 appropriately (E3-04 through E3-10 for motor 2).
• Lower the voltage if it is too high relative to the frequency.
• Check the amount of torque compensation.
Excessive torque compensation.
• Reduce the torque compensation gain (C4-01) until there is no speed loss and less current.
• Review the possible solutions provided for handling noise interference.
Drive fails to operate properly due to noise
• Review the section on handling noise interference and check the control circuit lines, main circuit
interference.
lines, and ground wiring.
• Check if fault occurs simultaneously to overexcitation function operation.
Overexcitation gain is set too high.
• Consider motor flux saturation and reduce the value of n3-13 (Overexcitation Deceleration Gain).
• Enable Speed Search at start (b3-01 = 1).
Run command applied while motor was
• Program the Speed Search command input through one of the multi-function contact input
coasting.
terminals (H1- = 61 or 62).
The wrong motor code has been entered for • Enter the correct motor code to E5-01.
PM Open Loop Vector (Yaskawa motors • If a non-Yaskawa PM motor is used, enter “FFFF” to E5-01. Set the correct motor data to the E5-
only) or the motor data are wrong. parameters or perform Auto-Tuning.
• Check which motor control method the drive is set to (A1-02).
The motor control method and motor do not
• For IM motors, set A1-02 = “0”, “1”, “2”, or “3”.
match.
• For PM motors, set A1-02 = “5”, “6” or “7”.
The drives rated output current is too small. Use a larger drive.
Option Card Connection Error at Option Port CN5-A
oFA00
Option compatibility error
Option Card Fault at Option Port CN5-A
oFA01
Option not properly connected
to oFA03 to oFA06
, oFA10, oFA11
Option card error occurred at option port CN5-A
to oFA12 to oFA17
to oFA30 to oFA43
Option Card Fault at Option Port CN5-B
oFb00
oFb01
oFb02
Same type of option card already connected
to oFb03 to oFb11
to oFb12 to oFb17 Option card error occurred at Option Port CN5-B
to oFb30 to oFb43
Option Card Connection Error at Option Port CN5-C
oFC00
Option Card Fault at Option Port CN5-C
oFC01
Option Card Fault at Option Port CN5-C
oFC02
Same type of option card already connected
to oFC03 to oFC11
to oFC12 to oFC17 Option card error occurred at option port CN5-C
to oFC30 to oFC43
Heatsink Overheat
oH The temperature of the heatsink exceeded the overheat pre-alarm level set to L8-02. Default value
for L8-02 is determined by drive capacity (o2-04).
5 Troubleshooting

• Check the temperature surrounding the drive. Verify temperature is within drive specifications.
• Improve the air circulation within the enclosure panel.
Surrounding temperature is too high.
• Install a fan or air conditioner to cool the surrounding area.
• Remove anything near the drive that might be producing excessive heat.
• Measure the output current.
Load is too heavy. • Decrease the load.
• Lower the carrier frequency (C6-02).
• Replace the cooling fan.
Internal cooling fan is stopped.
• After replacing the drive, reset the cooling fan maintenance parameter (o4-03 = 0).
Overheat 1 (Heatsink Overheat)
oH1 The temperature of the heatsink exceeded the drive overheat level. The overheat level is determined
by drive capacity (o2-04).
• Check the temperature surrounding the drive.
• Improve the air circulation within the enclosure panel.
Surrounding temperature is too high.
• Install a fan or air conditioner to cool the surrounding area.
• Remove anything near the drive that might be producing excessive heat.
• Measure the output current.
Load is too heavy. • Lower the carrier frequency (C6-02).
• Reduce the load.
Motor Overheat Alarm (PTC Input)
• The motor overheat signal to analog input terminal A1, A2, or A3 exceeded the alarm detection
oH3
level.
• Detection requires multi-function analog input H3-02, H3-06, or H3-10 be set to “E”.
Motor Overheat Fault (PTC Input)
• The motor overheat signal to analog input terminal A1, A2, or A3 exceeded the fault detection
oH4
level.
• Detection requires that multi-function analog input H3-02, H3-06, or H3-10 = “E”.
• Check the size of the load, the accel/decel times, and the cycle times.
• Decrease the load.
• Increase the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-08).
• Adjust the preset V/f pattern (E1-04 through E1-10). This will mainly involve reducing E1-08 and
E1-10. Be careful not to lower E1-08 and E1-10 too much because this reduces load tolerance at
Motor has overheated.
low speeds.
• Check the motor rated current.
• Enter the motor rated current as indicated on the motor nameplate (E2-01).
• Ensure the motor cooling system is operating normally.
• Repair or replace the motor cooling system.
Motor Overload
oL1
The electronic motor overload protection tripped.
Load is too heavy. Reduce the load.
Cycle times are too short during
Increase the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-08).
acceleration and deceleration.
Troubleshooting
• Reduce the load.

A general purpose motor is driven below • Increase the speed.
the rated speed with too high load. • If the motor is supposed to operate at low speeds, either increase the motor capacity or use a motor
specifically designed to operate in the desired speed range.
Adjust the user-set V/f patterns (E1-04 through E1-10). Parameters E1-08 and E1-10 may need to be
The output voltage is too high. reduced. Be careful not to lower E1-08 and E1-10 too much because this reduces load tolerance at
low speeds. 5
The wrong motor rated current is set to E2- • Check the motor-rated current.
01. • Enter the value written on the motor nameplate to parameter E2-01.
The maximum output frequency is set • Check the rated frequency indicated on the motor nameplate.
incorrectly. • Enter the rated frequency to E1-06 (Base Frequency).
5 Troubleshooting
Multiple motors are running off the same

Disable the motor protection function (L1-01 = 0) and install a thermal relay to each motor.
drive.
The electrical thermal protection • Check the motor characteristics.
characteristics and motor overload • Correct the type of motor protection that has been selected (L1-01).
characteristics do not match. • Install an external thermal relay.
The electrical thermal relay is operating at • Check the current rating listed on the motor nameplate.
the wrong level. • Check the value set for the motor rated current (E2-01).
• Overexcitation increases the motor losses and the motor temperature. If applied too long, motor
Motor overheated by overexcitation damage can occur. Prevent excessive overexcitation operation or apply proper cooling to the motor.
operation. • Reduce the excitation deceleration gain (n3-13).
• Set L3-04 (Stall Prevention during Deceleration) to a value other than 4.
• Check values set to Speed Search related parameters.
Speed Search related parameters are set • Adjust the Speed Search current and Speed Search deceleration times (b3-02 and b3-03
incorrectly. respectively).
• After Auto-Tuning, enable Speed Estimation Speed Search (b3-24 = 1).
Output current fluctuation due to input
Check the power supply for phase loss.
phase loss
Drive Overload
oL2
The thermal sensor of the drive triggered overload protection.
Load is too heavy. Reduce the load.
Acceleration or deceleration times are too
Increase the settings for the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-08).
short.
• Adjust the preset V/f pattern (E1-04 through E1-10). This will mainly involve reducing E1-08 and
E1-10.
The output voltage is too high.
• Be careful not to lower E1-08 and E1-10 excessively because this reduces load tolerance at low
speeds.
Drive capacity is too small. Replace the drive with a larger model.
• Reduce the load when operating at low speeds.
Overload occurred when operating at low
• Replace the drive with a model that is one frame size larger.
speeds.
• Lower the carrier frequency (C6-02).
Excessive torque compensation. Reduce the torque compensation gain (C4-01) until there is no speed loss but less current.
• Check the settings for all Speed Search related parameters.
Speed Search related parameters are set • Adjust the current used during Speed Search and the Speed Search deceleration time (b3-03 and
incorrectly. b3-02 respectively).
• After Auto-Tuning the drive, enable the Speed Estimation Speed Search (b3-24 = 1).
Output current fluctuation due to input
Check the power supply for phase loss.
phase loss
Overtorque Detection 1
oL3 The current has exceeded the value set for torque detection (L6-02) for longer than the allowable
time (L6-03).
Overtorque Detection 2
oL4 The current has exceeded the value set for Overtorque Detection 2 (L6-05) for longer than the
allowable time (L6-06).
Mechanical Weakening Detection 1
oL5
Overtorque occurred, matching the conditions specified in L6-08.
High Slip Braking oL
oL7
The output frequency stayed constant for longer than the time set in n3-04 during High Slip Braking.
External Digital Operator Connection Fault
• The external operator has been disconnected from the drive.
oPr Note: An oPr fault will occur when all of the following conditions are true:
• Output is interrupted when the operator is disconnected (o2-06 = 1).
• The Run command is assigned to the operator (b1-02 = 0 and LOCAL has been selected).
Overspeed (for Control Mode with PG)
oS
The motor speed feedback exceeded the F1-08 setting.
5 Troubleshooting
Overvoltage
Voltage in the DC bus has exceeded the overvoltage detection level.
ov
• For 200 V class: approximately 410 V
• For 400 V class: approximately 820 V
• Increase the deceleration time (C1-02, C1-04, C1-06, C1-08).
Deceleration time is too short and
• Install a dynamic braking option.
regenerative energy is flowing from the
• Enable stall prevention during deceleration (L3-04 = 1).
motor into the drive.
Stall Prevention is enabled as the default setting.
• Check if sudden drive acceleration triggers an overvoltage alarm.
• Increase the acceleration time.
Fast acceleration time causes the motor to
• Use longer S-curve acceleration and deceleration times.
overshoot the speed reference.
• Enable the Overvoltage Suppression function (L3-11 = 1).
• Lengthen the S-curve at acceleration end.
The braking torque was too high, causing regenerative energy to charge the DC bus. Reduce the
Excessive braking load.
braking torque, use a dynamic braking option, or lengthen decel time.
Install a DC reactor.
Surge voltage entering from the drive input
Note: Voltage surge can result from a thyristor convertor and phase advancing capacitor using the
power.
same input power supply.
Ground fault in the output circuit causing • Check the motor wiring for ground faults.
the DC bus capacitor to overcharge. • Correct grounding shorts and turn the power back on.
• Check the settings for Speed Search-related parameters.
Improper Setting of Speed Search related • Enable Speed Search restart function (b3-19 greater than or equal to 1 to 10).
parameters. (Includes Speed Search after a • Adjust the current level during Speed Search and the deceleration time (b3-02 and b3-03
momentary power loss and after a fault respectively).
restart.) • Perform Stationary Auto-Tuning for line-to-line resistance and then enable Speed Estimation
Speed Search (b3-24 = 1).
• Check the voltage.
Drive input power voltage is too high.
• Lower drive input power voltage within the limits listed in the specifications.
• Check braking transistor wiring for errors.
The braking transistor is wired incorrectly.
• Properly rewire the braking resistor device.
PG cable is disconnected. Reconnect the cable.
PG cable wiring is wrong. Correct the wiring.
Noise interference along the PG encoder
Separate the wiring from the source of the noise (often the output lines from the drive).
wiring.
• Review the list of possible solutions provided for controlling noise.
Drive fails to operate properly due to noise
• Review the section on handling noise interference and check the control circuit lines, main circuit
interference.
lines, and ground wiring.
• Check the load inertia settings when using KEB, overvoltage suppression, or Stall Prevention
Load inertia has been set incorrectly. during deceleration.
• Adjust the load inertia ratio in L3-25 to better match the load.
Braking function is being used in OLV/PM. Connect a braking resistor.
• Adjust the parameters that control hunting.
• Set the gain for Hunting Prevention (n1-02).
Motor hunting occurs. • Adjust the AFR time constant (n2-02 and n2-03).
• Adjust the speed feedback detection suppression gain for PM motors (n8-45) and the time constant
for pull-in current (n8-47).
Input Phase Loss
PF Drive input power has an open phase or has a large imbalance of voltage between phases. Detected
Troubleshooting
when L8-05 = 1 (enabled).

• Check for wiring errors in the main circuit drive input power.
There is phase loss in the drive input power.
• Ensure the terminals are tightened properly.
There is loose wiring in the drive input
power terminals.
• Apply the tightening torque as specified in this manual. Refer to Wire Gauges and Tightening
Torque on page 35
5
There is excessive fluctuation in the drive • Check the voltage from the drive input power.
input power voltage. • Review the possible solutions for stabilizing the drive input power.
There is poor balance between voltage
• Stabilize drive input power or disable phase loss detection.
phases.
5 Troubleshooting
• Check the maintenance time for the capacitors (U4-05).

• Replace the capacitor if U4-05 is greater than 90%. For instructions on replacing the capacitor,
The main circuit capacitors are worn.
Check for anything problems with the drive input power. If drive input power appears normal but the
alarm continues to occur, replace either the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on
PG Disconnect (for any control modes using a PG option card)
PGo
No PG pulses are received for longer than the time set to F1-14.
PG Hardware Fault (detected when using a PG-X3 option card)
PGoH
PG cable is not connected properly.
Braking Resistor Fault
rF
The resistance of the braking resistor being used is too low.
Braking Resistor Overheat
rH Braking resistor protection was triggered.
Fault detection is enabled when L8-01 = 1 (disabled as a default).
• Check the load, deceleration time, and speed.
Deceleration time is too short and excessive • Reduce the load inertia.
regenerative energy is flowing back into the • Increase the deceleration times (C1-02, C1-04, C1-06, C1-08, C1-09).
drive. • Replace the dynamic braking option with a larger device that can handle the power that is
discharged.
Recalculate braking load and braking power. Reduce the braking load by adjusting braking resistor
Excessive braking inertia.
settings.
The braking operation duty cycle is too Check the braking operation duty cycle. Braking resistor protection for ERF-type braking resistors
high. (L8-01 = 1) allows a braking duty cycle of maximum 3%.
The proper braking resistor has not been • Check the specifications and conditions for the braking resistor device.
installed. • Select the optimal braking resistor.
Note: The magnitude of the braking load trips the braking resistor overheat alarm, NOT the surface temperature. Using the braking resistor more
frequently than it is rated for trips the alarm even when the braking resistor surface is not very hot.
Dynamic Braking Transistor
rr
The built-in dynamic braking transistor failed.
The braking transistor is damaged. • Cycle power to the drive and check if the fault reoccurs.
• Replace either the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on replacing the control board,
The control circuit is damaged. contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
Too Many Speed Search Restarts
SEr
The number of Speed Search restarts exceeded the number set to b3-19.
Motor Pull Out or Step Out Detection
STo
Motor pull out or step out has occurred. Motor has exceeded its pull-out torque.
Zero Servo Fault
SvE
Position deviation during zero servo.
Undertorque Detection 1
UL3 The current has fallen below the minimum value set for torque detection (L6-02) for longer than the
Parameter settings are not appropriate for
Check the settings of parameters L6-02 and L6-03.
the load.
There is a fault on the machine side. Check the load for any problems.
UL4 The current has fallen below the minimum value set for torque detection (L6-05) for longer than the
UL5
The operation conditions matched the conditions set to L6-08.
5 Troubleshooting
DC Bus Undervoltage
One of the following conditions occurred while the drive was stopped:
• Voltage in the DC bus fell below the undervoltage detection level (L2-05)
Uv1 • For 200 V class: approximately 190 V
• For 400 V class: approximately 380 V (350 V when E1-01 is less than 400) The fault is output
only if L2-01 = 0 or L2-01 = 1 and the DC bus voltage has fallen below the level set to L2-05 for
longer than the time set to L2-02.
• The main circuit drive input power is wired incorrectly.
Input power phase loss.
• Ensure there are no loose terminals.
One of the drive input power wiring
• Apply the tightening torque specified in this manual to fasten the terminals. Refer to Wire Gauges
terminals is loose.
and Tightening Torque on page 35
• Check the voltage.
There is a problem with the voltage from • Correct the voltage to be within the range listed in drive input power specifications.
the drive input power. • If there is no problem with the power supply to the main circuit, check for problems with the main
circuit magnetic contactor.
The power has been interrupted. Correct the drive input power.
• Check the maintenance time for the capacitors (U4-05).
The main circuit capacitors are worn. • Replace either the control board or the entire drive if U4-05 exceeds 90%. For instructions on
• Cycle power to the drive and see if the fault reoccurs.
• If the problem continues, replace either the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on
The relay or contactor on the soft-charge replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
bypass circuit is damaged. • Check monitor U4-06 for the performance life of the soft-charge bypass.
• Replace either the control board or the entire drive if U4-06 exceeds 90%. For instructions on
Control Power Supply Voltage Fault
Uv2
Voltage is too low for the control drive input power.
For models CIMR-A2A0004 through
2A0056 and CIMR-A4A0002 through
4A0031: L2-02 was changed from its Correct the setting to L2-02 or install an optional Momentary Power Loss Ride-Thru unit.
default value without installing a
Momentary Power Loss Ride-Thru unit.
• Cycle power to the drive. Check if the fault reoccurs.
Control power supply wiring is damaged.
• If the problem continues, replace the control board, the entire drive, or the control power supply.
• Cycle power to the drive. Check if the fault reoccurs.
Internal circuitry is damaged. • If the problem continues, replace either the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on
Undervoltage 3 (Soft-Charge Bypass Circuit Fault)
Uv3
The soft-charge bypass circuit has failed.
Output Voltage Detection Fault
voF
Problem detected with the voltage on the output side of the drive.
Troubleshooting
5 Troubleshooting
◆ Alarm Detection
■ Alarm Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions
Alarms are drive protection functions that do not necessarily cause the drive to stop. Once the cause of an alarm is
removed, the drive will return to the same status is was before the alarm occurred.
When an alarm has been triggered, the ALM light on the digital operator display blinks and the alarm code display
flashes. If a multi-function output is set for an alarm (H2- = 10), that output terminal will be triggered.
Note: If a multi-function output is set to close when an alarm occurs (H2- = 10), it will also close when maintenance periods are
reached, triggering alarms LT-1 through LT-4 (triggered only if H2- = 2F).
Table 50 Alarm Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions
Digital Operator Display Minor Fault Name
Communication Option Station Number Setting Error (CC-Link, CANopen, MECHATROLINK-II)
AEr
Option card node address is outside the acceptable setting range.
Baseblock
bb
Drive output interrupted as indicated by an external baseblock signal.
Braking Transistor Overload Fault
boL
The braking transistor in the drive has been overloaded.
Option Communication Error
bUS • After initial communication was established, the connection was lost.
• Assign a Run command frequency reference to the option card.
Serial Communication Transmission Error
CALL
Communication has not yet been established.
MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error
CE
Control data was not received correctly for two seconds.
CrST Cannot Reset
Speed Deviation (when using a PG option card)
dEv The deviation between the speed reference and speed feedback is greater than the setting in F1-10 for
longer than the time in F1-11.
dnE Drive Disabled
Forward/Reverse Run Command Input Error
EF
Both forward run and reverse run closed simultaneously for over 0.5 s.
Option Card External Fault
EF0
An external fault condition is present.
External fault (input terminal S1)
EF1
EF2
EF3
EF4
EF5
EF6
EF7
EF8
Excessive PID Feedback
FbH The PID feedback input is higher than the level set in b5-36 for longer than the time set in b5-37, and
b5-12 is set to 1 or 4.
5 Troubleshooting
PID Feedback Loss

FbL The PID feedback input is lower than the level set in b5-13 for longer than the time set in b5-14, and
b5-12 is set to 1 or 4.
Safe Disable Signal Input
Hbb
Both Safe Disable Input channels are open.
Safe Disable Signal Input
HbbF
One Safe Disable channel is open while the other one is closed.
Current Alarm
HCA
Drive current exceeded overcurrent warning level (150% of the rated current).
Cooling Fan Maintenance Time
LT-1 The cooling fan has reached its expected maintenance period and may need to be replaced.
Note: An alarm output (H2- = 10) will only be triggered if H2- = 2F.
Capacitor Maintenance Time
LT-2 The main circuit and control circuit capacitors are nearing the end of their expected performance life.
Soft Charge Bypass Relay Maintenance Time
LT-3 The DC bus soft charge relay is nearing the end of its expected performance life.
IGBT Maintenance Time (50%)
LT-4 IGBTs have reached 50% of their expected performance life.
Heatsink Overheat
oH The temperature of the heatsink exceeded the overheat pre-alarm level set to L8-02 (90-100°C). Default
value for L8-02 is determined by drive capacity (o2-04).
Drive Overheat Warning
oH2
“Drive Overheat Warning” was input to a multi-function input terminal, S1 through S8 (H1-= B)
Motor Overheat
oH3 The motor overheat signal entered to a multi-function analog input terminal exceeded the alarm level
(H3-02, H3-06 or H3-10 = E).
Overtorque 1
oL3 Drive output current (or torque in OLV, CLV, AOLV/PM, CLV/PM) was greater than L6-02 for longer
than the time set in L6-03.
Overtorque 2
oL4 Drive output current (or torque in OLV, CLV, AOLV/PM, CLV/PM) was greater than L6-05 for longer
than the time set in L6-06.
oL5
Overtorque occurred, matching the conditions specified in L6-08.
Overspeed (for Control Mode with PG)
oS
The motor speed feedback exceeded the F1-08 setting.
DC Bus Overvoltage
The DC bus voltage exceeded the trip point.
ov
For 200 V class: approximately 410 V
For 400 V class: approximately 820 V
PASS MEMOBUS/Modbus Comm. Test Mode Complete
PG Disconnect (for Control Mode with PG)
PGo
Detected when no PG pulses are received for a time longer than setting in F1-14.
Troubleshooting
PG Hardware Fault (detected when using a PG-X3 option card)

PGoH
PG cable has become disconnected.
Motor Switch during Run
rUn
A command to switch motors was entered during run.
MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Test Mode Error
SE Note: This alarm will not trigger a multi-function output terminal that is set for alarm output (H2- = 5
10).
IGBT Maintenance Time (90%)
TrPC
IGBTs have reached 90% of their expected performance life.
5 Troubleshooting
UL3 Drive output current (or torque in OLV, CLV, AOLV/PM, CLV/PM) less than L6-02 for longer than L6-
03 time.
UL4 Drive output current (or torque in OLV, CLV, AOLV/PM, CLV/PM) less than L6-05 for longer than L6-
06 time.
Undervoltage
One of the following conditions was true when the drive was stopped and a Run command was entered:
• DC bus voltage dropped below the level specified in L2-05.
Uv
• Contactor to suppress inrush current in the drive was opened.
• Low voltage in the control drive input power. This alarm outputs only if L2-01 is not 0 and DC bus
voltage is under L2-05.
Output Voltage Detection Fault
voF
There is a problem with the output voltage.
◆ Operator Programming Errors

■ oPE Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions
An Operator Programming Error (oPE) occurs when a contradictory parameter is set or an individual parameter is set to
an inappropriate value.
The drive will not operate until the parameter or parameters causing the problem are set correctly. An oPE, however, does
not trigger an alarm or fault output. If an oPE occurs, investigate the cause and Refer to oPE Codes, Causes, and
Possible Solutions on page 112 for the appropriate action. When an oPE appears on the operator display, press the
ENTER button to view U1-18 and see the parameter that is causing the oPE error (U1-18).
Table 51 oPE Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions
Digital Operator Display Error Name
Drive Capacity Setting Fault
oPE01
Drive capacity and the value set to o2-04 do not match.
Parameter Range Setting Error
oPE02
Use U1-18 to find parameters set outside the range.
Multi-Function Input Selection Error
oPE03 A contradictory setting is assigned to multi-function contact inputs
H1-01 to H1-08.
oPE04 Initialization required.
oPE05 Run Command/Frequency Reference Source Selection Error

Control Method Selection Error
oPE06
Correct the setting for the control method.
Multi-Function Analog Input Selection Error
oPE07 A contradictory setting is assigned to multi-function analog inputs
H3-02, H3-06, or H3-10 and PID functions conflict.
Parameter Selection Error
oPE08 A function has been set that cannot be used in the motor control method
selected.
PID Control Selection Fault
oPE09 PID control function selection is incorrect. Requires that PID control is
enabled (b5-01 = 1 to 4).
V/f Data Setting Error
The following setting errors have occurred where:
• E1-04 is greater than or equal to E1-06, E1-06 is greater than or equal
to E1-07, E1-07 is greater than or equal to E1-09, or E1-09 is greater
oPE10
than or equal to E1-11.
• E3-04 is greater than or equal to E3-06, E3-06 is greater than or equal
to E3-07, E3-07 is greater than or equal to E3-09, or E3-09 is greater
than or equal to E3-11.
Carrier Frequency Setting Error
oPE11
Correct the setting for the carrier frequency.
5 Troubleshooting
Pulse Monitor Selection Error

oPE13
Incorrect setting of monitor selection for pulse train (H6-06).
Torque Control Setting Error
oPE15 Parameters settings that are not allowed in combination with Torque
Control have been set.
oPE16 Energy Savings Constants Error
Online Tuning Parameter Setting Error
oPE18
Parameters that control Online Tuning are not set correctly.
◆ Auto-Tuning Fault Detection

Auto-Tuning faults are shown below. When the following faults are detected, the fault is displayed on the digital operator
and the motor coasts to a stop. Auto-Tuning faults do not trigger an multi-function terminal set for fault or alarm output.
An End error indicates that although Auto-Tuning has completely successful, there is some discrepancy in the
calculations the drive made. If an End error occurs, check for what might be causing the error using the table below,
and perform Auto-Tuning again once the problem has been taken care of. If there appears to be no problem despite the
End error being displayed, go ahead and start the application.
■ Auto-Tuning Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions
Table 52 Auto-Tuning Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions
Excessive V/f Setting (detected only during Rotational Auto-Tuning, and displayed after Auto-Tuning
End1
is complete)
Cause Possible Solutions
The torque reference exceeded 20% • Before Auto-Tuning the drive, verify the information written on the motor nameplate and enter that
during Auto-Tuning. data to T1-03 through T1-05.
• Enter proper information to parameters T1-03 to T1-05 and repeat Auto-Tuning.
The results from Auto-Tuning the no- • If possible, disconnect the motor from the load and perform Auto-Tuning. If the load cannot be
load current exceeded 80%. uncoupled, simply use the Auto-Tuning results as they are.
Motor Iron-Core Saturation Coefficient (detected only during Rotational Auto-Tuning and displayed
End2
after Auto-Tuning is complete)
• Make sure the data entered to the T1 parameters match the information written on the motor
Motor data entered during Auto-Tuning
nameplate.
was incorrect.
• Restart Auto-Tuning and enter the correct information.
Results from Auto-Tuning are outside
the parameter setting range, assigning • Check and correct faulty motor wiring.
the iron-core saturation coefficient • Disconnect the motor from machine and perform Rotational Auto-Tuning.
(E2-07, E2-08) a temporary value.
End3 Rated Current Setting Alarm (displayed after Auto-Tuning is complete)
The correct current rating printed on the • Check the setting of parameter T1-04.
nameplate was not entered into T1-04. • Check the motor data and repeat Auto-Tuning.
Troubleshooting
End4 Adjusted Slip Calculation Error

The slip that was calculated is outside • Make sure the data entered for Auto-Tuning is correct.
the allowable range. • Execute Rotational Auto-Tuning instead. If not possible, try Stationary Auto-Tuning 2.
End5 Resistance Tuning Error
5
The resistance value that was calculated • Double check the data that was entered for the Auto-Tuning process.
is outside the allowable range. • Check the motor and motor cable connection for faults.
5 Troubleshooting

End6 Leakage Inductance Alarm
The leakage inductance value that was
Double check the data that was entered for the Auto-Tuning process.
calculated is outside the allowable range.
End7 No-Load Current Alarm
The entered no-load current value was
Check and correct faulty motor wiring.
outside the allowable range.
Auto-Tuning results were less than 5%
Double check the data that was entered for the Auto-Tuning process.
of the motor rated current.
Er-01 Motor Data Error
• Check that the motor data entered to T1 parameters matches motor nameplate input before Auto-
Motor data or data entered during
Tuning.
Auto-Tuning was incorrect.
• Start Auto-Tuning over again and enter the correct information.
Motor output power and motor-rated
• Check the drive and motor capacities.
current settings (T1-02 and T1-04) do
• Correct the settings of parameters T1-02 and T1-04.
not match.
Motor rated current and detected no-load • Check the motor rated current and no-load current.
current are not consistent with another. • Correct the settings of parameters T1-04 and E2-03.
Base frequency and motor rated speed • Set T1-05 and T1-07 to the correct value.
(T1-05 and T1-07) do not match. • Check if the correct pole number was entered to T1-06.
Er-02 Minor Fault
An alarm was triggered during Auto-
Exit the Auto-Tuning menu, check the alarm code, remove the alarm cause, and repeat Auto-Tuning.
Tuning.
Er-03 STOP Button Input
Auto-Tuning canceled by pressing STOP
Auto-Tuning did not complete properly and will have to be performed again.
button.
Er-04 Line-to-Line Resistance Error
nameplate.
was incorrect.
the parameter setting range or the tuning
Check and correct faulty motor wiring.
process took too long.
Motor cable or cable connection faulty.
Er-05 No-Load Current Error
nameplate.
was incorrect.
• Check and correct faulty motor wiring.
the parameter setting range or the tuning
• Perform Rotational Auto-Tuning.
• Disconnect the motor from machine and restart Auto-Tuning. If motor and load cannot be uncoupled
The load during Rotational Auto-tuning
make sure the load is lower than 30%.
was too high.
• If a mechanical brake is installed, make sure it is fully lifted during tuning.
5 Troubleshooting

Er-08 Rated Slip Error
nameplate.
was incorrect.
Drive-calculated values outside
• Check and correct faulty motor wiring.
parameter setting range or the tuning
• Perform Rotational Auto-Tuning.
• Disconnect the motor from machine and restart Auto-Tuning. If motor and load cannot be uncoupled
The load during rotational Auto-tuning
was too high.
Er-09 Acceleration Error
The motor did not accelerate for the •
Increase the acceleration time (C1-01).
specified acceleration time. •
Check if it is possible to disconnect the machine from the motor.
Torque limit when motoring is too low •
Check the settings of parameters L7-01 and L7-02.
(L7-01 and L7-02). •
Increase the setting.
•
Disconnect the motor from machine and restart Auto-Tuning. If motor and load cannot be uncoupled
The load during Rotational Auto-Tuning
was too high.
Er-10 Motor Direction Error
The encoder signal lines are not properly
Check and correct wiring to the PG encoder.
connected to the drive.
Check the motor speed monitor U1-05 while turning the motor manually in forward direction. If the
Motor and PG direction are opposite.
sign displayed is negative, change the setting of parameter F1-05.
The load pulled the motor in the opposite
direction of the speed reference and the Uncouple the motor from the load and repeat Auto-Tuning.
torque exceeded 100%.
Er-11 Motor Speed Fault
• Increase the acceleration time (C1-01).
Torque reference is too high.
• Disconnect the machine from the motor, if possible.
Er-12 Current Detection Error
One of the motor phases is missing:
Check motor wiring and correct any problems.
(U/T1, V/T2, W/T3).
Current exceeded the current rating of • Check the motor wiring for a short between motor lines.
the drive. • If a magnetic contactor is used between motors, make sure it is closed.
• Replace either the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on replacing the control board,
The current is too low. contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
Troubleshooting
Attempted Auto-Tuning without motor

Connect the motor and perform Auto-Tuning.
connected to the drive.
Current detection signal error.
Er-13 Leakage Inductance Error 5
Drive was unable to complete tuning for • Check all wiring and correct any mistakes.
leakage inductance within 300 seconds. • Double check the motor rated current value that was entered to T1-04 for Auto-Tuning.
• Check the motor rated current value written on the motor nameplate and enter the correct value.
5 Troubleshooting

Er-14 Motor Speed Error 2
The motor speed exceeded twice the
amplitude of speed reference during Reduce the ASR gain set to C5-01.
Inertia Tuning.
Er-15 Torque Saturation Error
The output torque reached the torque • Increase the torque limits in L7-01 through L7-04 (but keep them within reasonable limits).
limit set in L7-01 through L7-04 during • First try reducing the test signal amplitude in T3-01 and repeat the tuning. If necessary, then try
Inertia Tuning. reducing the test signal frequency (T3-02) and repeat the tuning.
Er-16 Inertia Detection Error
The inertia identified by the drive was • First try reducing the test signal amplitude in T3-01 and repeat the tuning. If necessary, then try
abnormally small or abnormally large reducing the test signal frequency (T3-02) and repeat the tuning.
during Inertia Tuning. • Check the basic motor inertia value entered to T3-03.
Er-17 Reverse Prohibited Error
Drive is prohibited from rotating the • Inertia Auto-Tuning cannot be performed if the drive is restricted from rotating in reverse.
motor in reverse while attempting to • Assuming it is acceptable for the application to rotate in reverse, set b1-04 to 0 and then execute
perform Inertia Tuning. Inertia Tuning.
Er-18 Induction Voltage Error
The induced voltage constant exceeds
Double check the data that was entered to the T2- parameters, and perform Auto-Tuning again.
the allowable setting range.
Er-19 PM Inductance Error
The induced voltage constant inductance
values set to E5-08 or E5-09 exceed the Double check the data that was entered to the T2- parameters, and perform Auto-Tuning again.
allowable range.
Er-20 Stator Resistance Error
Stator resistance tuning attempted to set
a value to E5-06 that is outside the Double check the data that was entered to the T2- parameters, and perform Auto-Tuning again.
allowable setting range.
Er-21 Z Pulse Correction Error
Motor was coasting when Auto-Tuning
Make sure the motor has stopped completely. Repeat Auto-Tuning.
was performed.
Either the motor or the PG encoder on
Check the wiring for the motor and the PG encoder. Repeat Auto-Tuning.
the motor is not properly wired.
The direction for the PG encoder is set
incorrectly, or the number of pulses set Check the direction and number of pulses set for the PG encoder. Repeat Auto-Tuning.
for the PG encoder is wrong.
PG encoder is damaged. Check the signal output from the PG encoder attached to the motor. Replace the PG if damaged.
5 Troubleshooting
◆ Copy Function Related Displays

■ Tasks, Errors, and Troubleshooting
The table below lists the messages and errors that may appear when using the Copy function.
When executing the tasks offered by the Copy function, the operator will indicate the task being performed. When an
error occurs, a code appears on the operator to indicate the error. Note that errors related to the Copy function do not
trigger a multi-function output terminal that has been set up to close when a fault or alarm occurs. To clear an error,
simply press any key on the operator and the error display will disappear.
Table 53 lists the corrective action that can be taken when an error occurs.
Note: 1. Whenever using the copy function, the drive should be fully stopped.
2. The drive will not accept a Run command while the Copy function is being executed.
3. Parameters can only be saved to a drive when the voltage class, capacity, control mode, and software version match.
Table 53 Copy Function Task and Error Displays
Digital Operator Display Task
CoPy Writing Parameter Settings (flashing)
CPEr Control Mode Mismatch
CPyE Error Writing Data
CSEr Copy Unit Error
dFPS Drive Model Mismatch
End Task Complete
iFEr Communication Error
ndAT Model, Voltage Class, Capacity Mismatch
rdEr Error Reading Data
rEAd Reading Parameter Settings (flashing)
vAEr Voltage Class, Capacity Mismatch
vFyE Parameter settings in the drive and those saved to the copy function are not the same
vrFy Comparing Parameter Settings (flashing)
■ Fault Reset Methods

When a fault occurs, the cause of the fault must be removed and the drive must be restarted. The table below lists the
different ways to restart the drive.
After the Fault Occurs Procedure
YEC_
REV DRV FOUT
Fix the cause of the fault, restart the common

drive, and reset the fault Press on the digital operator.
LO
ESC
RE
RESET ENTER
RUN STOP
Close then open the fault signal digital input via Drive
Resetting via Fault Reset Digital Fault Reset Switch
terminal S4. S4 is set for “Fault Reset” as S4 Fault Reset Digital Input
Input S4
default (H1-04 = 14). SC Digital Input Common
Troubleshooting
2 ON
If the above methods do not reset the fault, turn off the drive main power supply.
Reapply power after the digital operator display is out.
1 OFF
5
Note: If the Run command is present, the drive will disregard any attempts to reset the fault. The Run command must first be removed
before a fault situation can be cleared.
6 Periodic Inspection & Maintenance

◆ Inspection
Power electronics have limited life and may exhibit changes in characteristics or performance deterioration after years of
use under normal conditions. To help avoid such problems, it is important to perform preventive maintenance and
periodic inspection on the drive.
Drives contain a variety of power electronics such as power transistors, semiconductors, capacitors, resistors, fans, and
relays. The electronics in the drive serve a critical role in maintaining proper motor control.
Follow the inspection lists provided in this chapter as a part of a regular maintenance program.
Note: The drive will require more frequent inspection if it is placed in harsh environments, such as:
• High ambient temperatures
• Frequent starting and stopping
• Fluctuations in the AC supply or load
• Excessive vibrations or shock loading
• Dust, metal dust, salt, sulfuric acid, chlorine atmospheres
• Poor storage conditions.
Perform the first equipment inspection one to two years after installation.
■ Recommended Daily Inspection
Table 54 outlines the recommended daily inspection for Yaskawa drives. Check the following items on a daily basis to
avoid premature deterioration in performance or product failure. Copy this checklist and mark the “Checked” column
after each inspection.
Table 54 General Recommended Daily Inspection Checklist
Inspection Category Inspection Points Corrective Action Checked
• Check the load coupling.
Inspect for abnormal oscillation or noise coming
Motor • Measure motor vibration.
from the motor.
• Tighten all loose components.
• Check for excessive load.
Inspect for abnormal heat generated from the drive or • Loose connections
motor and visible discoloration. • Check for dirty heatsink or motor.
Cooling • Ambient temperature
Inspect drive cooling fan and circulation fan • Check for clogged or dirty fan.
operation. • Check fan operation drive parameter.
Verify the drive environment complies with the
• Eliminate the source of contaminants or correct
Environment specifications listed in Installation Environment on
poor environment.
page 19.
The drive output current should not be higher than
• Check for excessive load.
Load the motor or drive rating for an extended period of
• Check the motor parameter settings of the drive.
time.
• Correct the voltage or power supply to within
Power Supply Voltage Check main power supply and control voltages. nameplate specifications.
• Verify all main circuit phases.
■ Recommended Periodic Inspection

Table 55 outlines the recommended periodic inspections for Yaskawa drive installations. Although periodic inspections
should generally be performed once a year; the drive may require more frequent inspection in harsh environments or with
rigorous use. Operating and environmental conditions, along with experience in each application, will determine the
actual inspection frequency for each installation. Periodic inspection will help to avoid premature deterioration in
performance or product failure. Copy this checklist and mark the “Checked” column after each inspection.
Periodic Inspection
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not inspect, connect, or disconnect any wiring while the power is on. Failure to comply can
result in serious personal injury. Before servicing the drive, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains
charged even after the power supply is turned off. After shutting off the power, wait for at least the amount of time specified on the drive
before touching any components.
Table 55 Periodic Inspection Checklist

Inspection Area Inspection Points Corrective Action Checked
Main Circuit Periodic Inspection
• Inspect equipment for discoloration from • Replace damaged components as required.
overheating or deterioration. • The drive has few serviceable parts and may
• Inspect for damaged or deformed parts. require complete drive replacement.
• Inspect enclosure door seal if used.
General
• Use dry air to clear away foreign matter. Use a
• Inspect for dirt, foreign particles, or dust collection
pressure of 39.2 × 104 to 58.8 × 104 Pa (4 - 6
on components.
kgxcm2).
• Replace components if cleaning is not possible.
• Inspect wiring and connections for discoloration,
Conductors and
damage, or heat stress. • Repair or replace damaged wiring.
Wiring
• Inspect wire insulation and shielding for wear.
• Inspect terminals for stripped, damaged, or loose • Tighten loose screws and replace damaged
Terminals
connections. screws or terminals.
• Inspect contactors and relays for excessive noise • Check coil voltage for over or under voltage
Relays and during operation. conditions.
Contactors • Inspect coils for signs of overheating such as • Replace damaged removable relays contactors
melted or cracked insulation. or circuit board.
• Minor discoloration may be acceptable.
• Inspect for discoloration of heat stress on or around
Braking Resistors • If discoloration exists check for loose
resistors.
connections.
• Inspect for leaking, discoloration, or cracks.
Electrolytic • The drive has few serviceable parts and may
• Check if the cap has come off, for any swelling, or
Capacitor require complete drive replacement.
if the sides have burst open.
• Use dry air to clear away foreign matter. Use a
Diode, IGBT (Power • Inspect for dust or other foreign material collected
pressure of 39.2 × 104 to 58.8 × 104 Pa (4 - 6
Transistor) on the surface.
kgxcm2).
Motor Periodic Inspection
• Stop the motor and contact qualified
Operation Check • Check for increased vibration or abnormal noise.
maintenance personnel as required.
Control Circuit Periodic Inspection
• Inspect terminals for stripped, damaged, or loose • Tighten loose screws and replace damaged
connections. screws or terminals.
General
• Make sure all terminals have been properly • If terminals are integral to a circuit board, then
tightened. board or drive replacement may be required.
• Fix any loose connections.

• If an antistatic cloth or vacuum plunger can't be
used, replace the board.
Maintenance
• Check for any odor, discoloration, and rust. Make

• Do not use any solvents to clean the board.
sure connections are properly fastened and that no
Circuit Boards • Use dry air to clear away foreign matter. Use a
dust or oil mist has accumulated on the surface of
pressure of 39.2 × 104 to 58.8 × 104 Pa (4 - 6
the board.
kgxcm2).
• The drive has few serviceable parts and may 6
require complete drive replacement.
Inspection Area Inspection Points Corrective Action Checked

Cooling System Periodic Inspection
Cooling Fan,
Circulation Fan • Check for abnormal oscillation or unusual noise.
• Replace as required.
Control Board • Check for damaged or missing fan blades.
Cooling Fan
• Use dry air to clear away foreign matter.
• Inspect for dust or other foreign material collected
Heatsink Use a pressure of 39.2 × 104 to 58.8 × 104 Pa (4
on the surface.
- 6 kgxcm2).
• Visually inspect the area.
• Inspect air intake and exhaust openings. They must
Air Duct • Clear obstructions and clean air duct as
be free from obstruction and properly installed.
required.
Display Periodic Inspection
• Make sure data appears on the operator properly. • Contact your Yaskawa representative if there is
Digital Operator • Inspect for dust or other foreign material that may any trouble with the display or keypad.
have collected on surrounding components. • Clean the digital operator.
◆ Periodic Maintenance
The drive has Maintenance Monitors that keep track of component wear. This feature provides advance maintenance
warning and eliminates the need to shut down the entire system for unexpected problems. The drive allows the user to
check predicted maintenance periods for the components listed below.
• Cooling Fan, Circulation Fan, Control Board Cooling Fan
• Electrolytic Capacitors
• Inrush Prevention Circuit
• IGBTs
For replacement parts, contact the distributor where the drive was purchased or contact Yaskawa directly.
■ Replacement Parts
Table 56 contains the estimated performance life of components that require replacement during the life of the drive.
Only use Yaskawa replacement parts for the appropriate drive model and revision.
Table 56 Estimated Performance Life
Component Estimated Performance Life
Cooling Fan, Circulation Fan 10 years
Electrolytic Capacitors 10 years <1>
<1> The drive has few serviceable parts and may require complete drive replacement.
NOTICE: Estimated performance life based on specific usage conditions. These conditions are provided for the purpose of replacing
parts to maintain performance. Some parts may require more frequent replacement due to poor environments or rigorous use. Usage
conditions for estimated performance life:
• Ambient temperature: Yearly average of 40°C (IP00 enclosure)
• Load factor: 80% maximum
• Operation time: 24 hours a day
Performance Life Monitors Maintenance Monitors

The drive calculates the maintenance period for components that may require replacement during the life of the drive. A
percentage of the maintenance period is displayed on the digital operator by viewing the appropriate monitor parameter.
When the maintenance period reaches 100%, there is increased risk that the drive may malfunction. Yaskawa
recommends checking the maintenance period regularly to ensure maximum performance life.
Refer to Recommended Periodic Inspection on page 119 for more details.
Table 57 Performance Life Monitors Used for Component Replacement
Parameter Component Contents
Displays the accumulated operation time of the fan, from 0 to 99999 hours. This value is
U4-03
Cooling Fan, Circulation Fan, automatically reset to 0 once it reaches 99999.
Control Board Cooling Fan Displays the accumulated fan operation time as a percentage of the specified maintenance
U4-04
period.
Parameter Component Contents

Displays the accumulated time the capacitors are used as a percentage of the specified
U4-05 DC Bus Capacitors
maintenance period.
Displays the number of times the drive is powered up as a percentage of the performance life
U4-06 Inrush (pre-charge) Relay
of the inrush circuit.
U4-07 IGBT Displays the percentage of the maintenance period reached by the IGBTs.
Alarm Outputs for Maintenance Monitors

An output can be set up to inform the user when a specific components has neared its expected performance life.
When one of multi-function digital output terminals has been assigned the maintenance monitor function (H2- = 2F),
the terminal will close when the cooling fan, DC bus capacitors, or DC bus pre-charge relay reach 90% of the expected
performance life, or the IGBTs have reached 50% of their expect performance life. Additionally the digital operator will
display an alarm like shown in Table 58 to indicate the specific components that may need maintenance.
Table 58 Maintenance Alarms
Alarm Display Function Corrective Action
The cooling fans have reached 90% of their
<1> LT-1 Replace the cooling fan.
designated life time.
The DC bus capacitors have reached 90% of their
<1> LT-2 Replace the drive.
The DC bus charge circuit has reached 90% of its
<1> LT-3 Replace the drive.
The IGBT’s have reached 50% of their designated Check the load, carrier frequency, and output
<1> LT-4
life time. frequency.
The IGBT’s have reached 90% of their designated
<2> TrPC Replace the drive.
life time.
<1> This alarm message will be output only if the Maintenance Monitor function is assigned to one of the digital outputs (H2- = 2F). The alarm
will also trigger a digital output that is programmed for alarm indication (H2- = 10).
<2> This alarm message will always be output, even if the Maintenance Monitor function is not assigned to any of the digital outputs (H2- =
2F). The alarm will also trigger a digital output that is programmed for alarm indication (H2- = 10).
Related Drive Parameters

Parameters o4-03, o4-05, o4-07, and o4-09 can be used to reset a Maintenance Monitor back to zero after a specific
component has been replaced. Refer to Parameter List on page 131 for details on parameter settings.
NOTICE: If these parameters are not reset after the corresponding parts have been replaced, the Maintenance Monitor function will
continue to count down the performance life from the value that was reached with the old part. If the Maintenance Monitor is not reset,
the drive will not have the correct value of the performance life for the new component.

Maintenance
■ Replacing the Drive

WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on. Failure to comply can result in serious
personal injury. Before servicing the drive, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after
the power supply is turned off. After shutting off the power, wait for at least the amount of time specified on the drive before touching
any components.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not allow unqualified personnel to perform work on the drive. Failure to comply could result in
serious injury. Installation, maintenance, inspection and servicing must be performed only by authorized personnel familiar with
installation, adjustment and maintenance of AC drives.
NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the drive and circuit
boards. Failure to comply may result in ESD damage to the drive circuitry.
The following procedure explains how to replace a drive. This section provides instructions for drive replacement only.
To install option boards or other types of options, then refer to the specific manuals for those options.
NOTICE: When transferring a braking transistor, braking resistor, or other type of option from a damaged drive to a new replacement
drive, make sure they are working properly before reconnecting them to the new drive. Replace broken options to prevent immediate
break down of the replacement drive.
1. Remove the terminal cover.

Figure 81
YEC_
comm
on
Figure 81 Drive Replacement: Removing the Terminal Cover

2. Loosen the screws holding the terminal board in place. Take out the screw securing the bottom cover and
remove the bottom cover from the drive.
Figure 82
YEC_com
mon
Figure 82 Drive Replacement: Removing the Terminal Board

3. Slide the terminal board as illustrated by the arrows, and remove it from the drive along with the bottom cover.
Figure 83
YEC_
comm
on
Figure 83 Drive Replacement: Remove the Terminal Board
Figure 84
YEC_c
ommon
Figure 84 Drive Replacement:

Removable Terminal Board Disconnected from the Drive
4. Disconnect all option cards and options. Make sure they are intact before reusing them.
5. Replace the drive and wire the main circuit.
Installing the Drive
1. Once the main circuit has been wired, connect the terminal block to the drive as shown in Figure 85. Use the
installation screw to fasten the terminal block into place.
Figure 85
YEC_
comm
on
Figure 85 Drive Replacement: Installing the Terminal Board

2. Reconnect all options to the new drive in the same way they were installed in the old drive. Connect option
boards to the same option ports in the new drive that were used in the old drive.
3. Put the terminal cover back into its original place.
4. When the power to the drive is first switched on, all parameter settings are transferred from the terminal board
into the drive memory. Should an oPE04 error occur, load the parameter settings that have been saved on the
terminal board onto the new drive by setting parameter A1-03 to 5550. Reset timers used for the Maintenance
Monitor function by setting parameters o4-01 through o4-12 back to 0, and parameter o4-13 to 1.

Maintenance
A Specifications
A Specifications
◆ Heavy Duty and Normal Duty Ratings
The capacity of the drive is based on two types of load characteristics: Heavy Duty (HD) and Normal Duty (ND).
Refer to Selecting the Appropriate Load Rating on page 124 for the differences between HD and ND.
Table 59 Selecting the Appropriate Load Rating
Setting Parameter Rated Output Current Overload Tolerance Default Carrier Frequency
C6-01
0: Heavy Duty
HD Rating varies by model <1> 150% rated output current for 60 s 2 kHz
(default)
120% rated output current for 60 s varies by
1: Normal Duty ND Rating varies by model <1> 2 kHz, Swing PWM
model
<1> Refer to Three-Phase 200 V Class Drives on page 125 and Three-Phase 400 V Class Drives on page 126 for information on rating changes
based on drive model.
TERMS
HD and ND: HD refers to applications requiring constant torque output, while ND refers to applications with variable torque
needs. The drive allows the user to select HD or ND torque depending on the application. Fans, pumps, and blowers should use
ND (C6-01 = 1), and other applications generally use HD (C6-01 = 0).
Swing PWM: Swing PWM equivalent to a 2 kHz audible noise. This function turns the motor noise into a less
obtrusive white noise.
Note: Differences between HD ratings and ND ratings for the drive include rated input and output current, overload capacity, carrier
frequency, and current limit. The default setting is for HD (C6-01 = 0).
A Specifications
◆ Three-Phase 200 V Class Drives

Table 60 Power Ratings (Three-Phase 200 V Class)
Item Specification
CIMR-A2A 0004 0006 0008 0010 0012 0018 0021 0030 0040 0056 0069 0081 0110 0138 0169 0211 0250 0312 0360 0415
HD
0.4 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110
Maximum Applicable Motor Rating
Capacity (kW) <1> ND
0.7 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 110
Rating
HD
2.9 5.8 7 7.5 11 15.6 18.9 28 37 52 68 80 82 111 136 164 200 271 324 394
Input Current Rating
(A) <2> ND
3.9 7.3 8.8 10.8 13.9 18.5 24 37 52 68 80 96 111 136 164 200 271 324 394 471
Rating
Rated Voltage
Three-phase 200 to 240 Vac 50/60 Hz/270 to 340 Vdc
Rated Frequency
Allowable Voltage
Input -15 to 10%
Fluctuation
Allowable Frequency
±5%
Fluctuation
HD
1.3 2.2 3.1 4.1 5.8 7.8 9.5 14 18 27 36 44 37 51 62 75 91 124 148 180
Rating
Input Power (kVA)
ND
2.2 3.1 4.1 5.8 7.8 9.5 14 18 27 36 44 52 51 62 75 91 124 148 180 215
Rating
HD
1.2 1.9 2.6 3 4.2 5.3 6.7 9.5 12.6 17.9 23 29 32 44 55 69 82 108 132 158
Rated Output Rating
Capacity (kVA) <3> ND
1.3 2.3 3 3.7 4.6 6.7 8 11.4 15.2 21 26 31 42 53 64 80 95 119 137 158
Rating
HD 3.2 5 6.9 8 11 14 17.5 25 33 47 60 75 85 115 145 180 215 283 346 415
Rating <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <6> <6> <6> <6> <6> <4>
Rated Output
ND
Current (A)
Rating 3.5 6 8 9.6 12 17.5 21 30 40 56 69 81 110 138 169 211 250 312 360 415
<4>
Output
HD Rating: 150% of rated output current for 60 s
Overload Tolerance (Derating may be required for applications that start and stop frequently)
ND Rating: 120% of rated output current for 60 s
User adjustable between 2 and
Carrier Frequency User adjustable between 2 and 15 kHz
10 kHz
Maximum Output Voltage
Three-phase 200 to 240 V (proportional to input voltage)
(V)
Maximum Output Frequency
400 Hz (user-set)
(Hz)
<1> The motor capacity (kW) refers to a Yaskawa 4-pole motor. The rated output current of the drive output amps should be equal to or greater than
the motor rated current.
<2> Assumes operation at the rated output current. Input current rating varies depending on the power supply transformer, input reactor, wiring
connections, and power supply impedance.
<3> Rated motor capacity is calculated with a rated output voltage of 220 V.
<4> Carrier frequency is set to 2 kHz. Current derating is required in order to raise the carrier frequency.
<5> Carrier frequency can be increased up the 8 kHz while keeping this current rating. Higher carrier frequency settings require derating.
Specifications
A Specifications
◆ Three-Phase 400 V Class Drives

Table 61 Power Ratings (Three-Phase 400 V Class)
Item Specification
CIMR-A4A 0002 0004 0005 0007 0009 0011 0018 0023 0031 0038 0044 0058 0072 0088 0103
Maximum Applicable HD Rating 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45
Motor Capacity (kW) <1> ND Rating 0.75 1.5 2.2 3 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
Input Current HD Rating 1.8 3.2 4.4 6 8.2 10.4 15 20 29 39 44 43 58 71 86
(A) <2> ND Rating 2.1 4.3 5.9 8.1 9.4 14 20 24 38 44 52 58 71 86 105
Rated Voltage
Rated Frequency
Input Allowable Voltage Fluctuation –15 to 10%
Allowable Frequency
±5%
Fluctuation
Input Power HD Rating 1.4 2.3 4.3 6.1 8.1 10.0 14.6 19.2 28.4 37.5 46.6 39.3 53.0 64.9 78.6
(kVA) ND Rating 2.3 4.3 6.1 8.1 10.0 14.5 19.4 28.4 37.5 46.6 54.9 53.0 64.9 78.6 96.0
HD Rating 1.4 2.6 3.7 4.2 5.5 7 11.3 13.7 18.3 24 30 34 48 57 69
Rated Output
ND
Capacity (kVA) <3> 1.6 3.1 4.1 5.3 6.7 8.5 13.3 17.5 24 29 34 44 55 67 78
Rating <4>
1.8 3.4 4.8 5.5 7.2 9.2 14.8 18 24 31 39 45 60 75 91
HD Rating
Rated Output <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5>
Current (A) ND
2.1 4.1 5.4 6.9 8.8 11.1 17.5 23 31 38 44 58 72 88 103
Rating <4>
Output
HD Rating: 150% of rated output current for 60 s
Maximum Output Voltage (V) Three-phase 380 to 480 V (proportional to input voltage)
400 Hz (user-adjustable)
(Hz)
A Specifications
Item Specification
CIMR-A4A 0139 0165 0208 0250 0296 0362 0414 0515 0675
Maximum Applicable HD Rating 55 75 90 110 132 160 185 220 315
Motor Capacity (kW) <1> ND Rating 75 90 110 132 160 185 220 250 355
Input Current HD Rating 105 142 170 207 248 300 346 410 584
(A) <2> ND Rating 142 170 207 248 300 346 410 465 657
Rated Voltage
Rated Frequency
Input Allowable Voltage Fluctuation –15 to 10%
Allowable Frequency
±5%
Fluctuation
Input Power HD Rating 96.0 129.9 155 189 227 274 316 375 508
(kVA) ND Rating 129.9 155.5 189 227 274 316 375 416 601
HD Rating 85 114 137 165 198 232 282 343 461
Rated Output
ND
Capacity (kVA) <3> 106 126 159 191 226 276 316 392 514
Rating <4>
112 150 180 216 260 304 370 450 605
HD Rating
Rated Output <6> <6> <6> <6> <6> <4> <6> <4> <4>
Current (A) ND
139 165 208 250 296 362 414 515 675
Rating <4>
Output HD Rating: 150% of rated output current for 60 s
User adjustable between 2 to 5
kHz
Maximum Output Voltage (V) Three-phase 380 to 480 V (proportional to input voltage)
400 Hz (user-adjustable) 150 Hz (user-adjustable)
(Hz)
<1> The motor capacity (kW) refers to a Yaskawa 4-pole motor. The rated output current of the drive output amps should be equal to or greater than
the motor rated current.
<2> Assumes operation at the rated output current. Input current rating varies depending on the power supply transformer, input reactor, wiring
conditions, and power supply impedance.
<3> Rated motor capacity is calculated with a rated output voltage of 440 V.
<4> Carrier frequency is set to 2 kHz. Current derating is required in order to raise the carrier frequency.
<6> Carrier frequency can be increased up the 5 kHz while keeping this current rating. Higher carrier frequency settings require derating
Specifications
A Specifications
◆ Drive Specifications
Note: 1. Perform rotational Auto-Tuning to obtain the performance specifications given below.
2. For optimum performance life of the drive, install the drive in an environment that meets the required specifications.
Item Specification
The following control methods can be set using drive parameters:
• V/f Control (V/f)
• V/f Control with PG (V/f w/PG)
• Open Loop Vector Control (OLV)
Control Method
• Closed Loop Vector Control (CLV)
• Open Loop Vector Control for PM (OLV/PM)
• Advanced Open Loop Vector Control for PM (AOLV/PM)
• Closed Loop Vector Control for PM (CLV/PM)
Frequency Control Range 0.01 to 400 Hz
Frequency Accuracy Digital input: within ±0.01% of the max output frequency (-10 to +40°C)
(Temperature Fluctuation) Analog input: within ±0.1% of the max output frequency (25°C ±10°C)
Digital inputs: 0.01 Hz
Frequency Setting Resolution
Analog inputs: 1/2048 of the maximum output frequency setting (11 bit plus sign)
Output Frequency Resolution 0.001 Hz
Frequency Setting Signal -10 to 10 V, 0 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA, Pulse Train Input
V/f, V/f w/PG: 150% at 3 Hz
OLV: 200% at 0.3 Hz
Starting Torque <1>
CLV, AOLV/PM, CLV/PM: 200% at 0 r/min
OLV/PM: 100% at 5% speed
V/f, V/f w/PG: 1:40
OLV: 1:200
Speed Control Range <1> CLV, CLV/PM: 1:1500
OLV/PM: 1:20
Control
AOLV/PM: 1:100
Characteris
tics Speed Control Accuracy <1> OLV: ±0.2% (25°C ±10°C), CLV: ±0.02% (25°C ±10°C)
OLV, OLV/PM, AOLV/PM: 10 Hz
Speed Response <1>
CLV, CLV/PM: 50 Hz
Parameters setting allow separate limits in four quadrants (available in OLV, CLV, AOLV/PM, CLV/
Torque Limit
PM)
Accel/Decel Time 0.0 to 6000.0 s (4 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration settings)
Approx. 20% (approx. 125% when using braking resistor) <2>
c Short-time decel torque <3>: over 100% for 0.4/ 0.75 kW motors, over 50% for 1.5 kW motors,
and over 20% for 2.2 kW and above motors <4> (over excitation braking/High Slip Braking: approx.
Braking Torque
40%)
d Continuous regenerative torque: approx. 20% <4> (approx. 125% with dynamic braking resistor
option <2>: 10% ED, 10s)
Braking Transistor Models 2A0004 to 2A0138, 4A0002 to 4A0072 have a built-in braking transistor.
V/f Characteristics User-selected programs and V/f preset patterns possible
Torque Control, Droop Control, Speed/torque Control Switching, Feed Forward Control, Zero
Servo Function, Momentary Power Loss Ride-Thru, Speed Search, Overtorque/Undertorque
Detection, Torque Limit, 17 Step Speed (max), Accel/decel Switch, S-curve Accel/decel, 3-wire
Sequence, Auto-tuning (rotational, stationary tuning), Dwell, Cooling Fan on/off Switch, Slip
Compensation, Torque Compensation, Frequency Jump, Upper/lower Limits for Frequency
Main Control Functions
Reference, DC Injection Braking at Start and Stop, Overexcitation Braking, High Slip Braking, PID
Control (with sleep function), Energy Saving Control, MEMOBUS/Modbus Comm. (RS-422/485
max, 115.2 kbps), Fault Restart, Application Presets, DriveWorksEZ (customized function),
Removable Terminal Block with Parameter Backup Function, Online Tuning, KEB, Overexcitation
Deceleration, Inertia (ASR) Tuning, Overvoltage Suppression, High Frequency Injection, etc.
A Specifications
Item Specification
Motor Protection Electronic thermal overload relay
Momentary Overcurrent
Drive stops when output current exceeds 200% of Heavy Duty Rating
Protection
Overload Protection Drive stops after 60 s at 150% of rated Heavy Duty output current <5>
200 V class: Stops when DC bus voltage exceeds approx. 410 V
Overvoltage Protection
400 V class: Stops when DC bus voltage exceeds approx. 820 V
200 V class: Stops when DC bus voltage falls below approx. 190 V
Undervoltage Protection
Protection 400 V class: Stops when DC bus voltage falls below approx. 380 V
Functions Momentary Power Loss Immediately stop after 15 ms or longer power loss. <6> Continuous operation during power loss than
Ride-Thru 2 s (standard) <7>
Heatsink Overheat Protection Thermistor
Overheat input signal for braking resistor (Optional ERF-type, 3% ED)
Protection
Stall Prevention Stall Prevention is available during acceleration, deceleration, and during run.
Ground Protection Electronic circuit protection <8>
DC Bus Charge LED Remains lit until DC bus voltage falls below 50 V
Area of Use Indoors
Ambient Temperature -10 to 40°C (IP20/NEMA Type 1 enclosure), -10 to 50°C (IP00 enclosure)
Humidity 95 RH% or less (no condensation)
Environ Storage Temperature -20 to 60°C (short-term temperature during transportation)
ment Altitude Up to 1000 meters without derating, up to 3000m with output current and voltage derating
10 to 20 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
Vibration / Shock 20 to 55 Hz: 5.9 m/s2 (2A0004 to 2A0211, 4A0002 to 4A0165)
2.0 m/s2 (2A0250 to 2A0415, 4A0208 to 4A0675)
Two Safe Disable inputs and 1 EDM output according to EN61800-5-1, EN954-1/ISO13849 Cat. 3,
Safety Standard IEC/EN61508 SIL2, Insulation coordination: class 1
Note: Time from input open to drive output stop is less than 1 ms
Protection Design IP00 enclosure, IP20/NEMA Type 1 enclosure <9>
<1> The accuracy of these values depends on motor characteristics, ambient conditions, and drive settings. Specifications may vary with different
motors and with changing motor temperature. Contact Yaskawa for consultation.
<2> Ensure that Stall Prevention is disabled during deceleration (L3-04 = 0), when using a regenerative converter, a regenerative unit, a braking
resistor or the Braking Resistor Unit. The default setting for the Stall Prevention function will interfere with the braking resistor.
<3> Instantaneous average deceleration torque refers to the torque required to decelerate the motor (uncoupled from the load) from the rated motor
speed down to zero in the shortest time.
<4> Actual specifications may vary according to motor characteristics.
<5> Overload protection may be triggered when operating with 150% of the rated output current if the output frequency is less than 6 Hz.
<6> May be shorter due to load conditions and motor speed.
<7> A separate Momentary Power Loss Ride-Thru Unit is required for the drives CIMR-A2A0004 through 2A0056 and 4A0002 through 4A0031
if the application needs to continue running during a momentary power loss up to 2 s.
<8> Ground protection cannot be provided when the impedance of the ground fault path is too low, or when the drive is powered up while a ground
fault is present at the output.
<9> Removing the top protective cover from a NEMA Type 1 enclosure drive voids the NEMA Type 1 protection but still keeps IP20 conformity.
This is applicable to models 2A0004 to 2A0081 and 4A0002 to 4A0044.
◆ Drive Watt Loss Data

Table 62 Watt Loss 200 V Class Three-Phase Models
Heavy Duty Normal Duty
Model Number Rated Amps
CIMR-A Rated Amps Heatsink Interior Unit Total Loss Heatsink Interior Unit Total Loss
(A)
(A) Loss (W) Loss (W) (W) Loss (W) Loss (W) (W)
<3>
2A0004 3.2 <1> 14.8 44 59 3.5 18.4 47 66

2A0006 5.0 <1> 24 48 72 6.0 31 51 82
2A0010 8.0 <1> 43 52 95 9.6 57 58 115
2A0012 11.0 <1> 64 58 122 12.0 77 64 141
2A0021 17.5 <1> 101 67 168 21 138 83 222
Specifications
2A0030 25 <1> 194 92 287 30 262 117 379

2A0040 33 <1> 214 105 319 40 293 145 437
2A0056 47 <1> 280 130 410 56 371 175 546
2A0069 60 <1> 395 163 558 69 491 205 696
2A0081 75 <1> 460 221 681 81 527 257 785 A
2A0110 85 <1> 510 211 721 110 719 286 1005
A Specifications

(A)
<3>
2A0138 115 <1> 662 250 912 138 842 312 1154
2A0169 145 <1> 816 306 1122 169 1014 380 1394
2A0211 180 <2> 976 378 1354 211 1218 473 1691
2A0250 215 <2> 1514 466 1980 250 1764 594 2358
2A0312 283 <2> 1936 588 2524 312 2020 665 2686
2A0360 346 <2> 2564 783 3347 360 2698 894 3591
2A0415 415 <3> 2672 954 3626 415 2672 954 3626
<1> These values assume the carrier frequency is set to 8 kHz.
Table 63 Watt Loss 400 V Class Three-Phase Models

(A)
<3>
4A0002 1.8 <1> 15.9 45 61 2.1 20 48 68

4A0004 3.4 <1> 25 46 70 4.1 32 49 81
4A0005 4.8 <1> 37 49 87 5.4 45 53 97
4A0007 5.5 <1> 48 53 101 6.9 62 59 121
4A0009 7.2 <1> 53 55 108 8.8 66 60 126
4A0011 9.2 <1> 69 61 130 11.1 89 73 162
4A0018 14.8 <1> 135 86 221 17.5 177 108 285
4A0023 18.0 <1> 150 97 247 23 216 138 354
4A0031 24 <1> 208 115 323 31 295 161 455
4A0038 31 <1> 263 141 403 38 340 182 521
4A0044 39 <1> 330 179 509 44 390 209 599
4A0058 45 <1> 349 170 518 58 471 215 686
4A0072 60 <1> 484 217 701 72 605 265 870
4A0088 75 <1> 563 254 817 88 684 308 993
4A0103 91 <1> 723 299 1022 103 848 357 1205
4A0139 112 <1> 908 416 1325 139 1215 534 1749
4A0165 150 <2> 1340 580 1920 165 1557 668 2224
4A0208 180 <2> 1771 541 2313 208 1800 607 2408
4A0250 216 <2> 2360 715 3075 250 2379 803 3182
4A0296 260 <2> 2391 787 3178 296 2448 905 3353
4A0362 304 <2> 3075 985 4060 362 3168 1130 4298
4A0414 370 <2> 3578 1164 4742 414 3443 1295 4738
4A0515 450 <3> 3972 1386 5358 515 4850 1668 6518
4A0675 605 <3> 4191 1685 5875 675 4861 2037 6898
B Parameter List
B Parameter List
◆ A: Initialization Parameters
The A parameter group creates the operating environment for the drive. This includes the parameter Access Level, Motor
Control Method, Password, User Parameters and more.
: Indicates that the parameter setting can be changed while the drive is operating the motor
Motor 2: Refers the second motor when the drive is operating two motors (use input terminals to switch between motors).
■ A1: Initialization Parameters
No. Name Description Setting
0: English
1: Japanese
A1-00 2: German
Default: <48>
3: French
Language Selection Min: 0
4: Italian
Max: 7
<3> 5: Spanish
6: Portuguese
7: Chinese
A1-01 0: View and set A1-01 and A1-04. U- parameters can also be viewed.
Default: 2
1: User Parameters (access to a set of parameters selected by the user, A2-01 to
Access Level Selection Min: 0
A2-32)
Max: 2
<2> 2: Advanced Access (access to view and set all parameters)
0: V/f Control
1: V/f Control with PG
2: Open Loop Vector Control Default: <49>
A1-02
Control Method Selection 3: Closed Loop Vector Control Min: 0
<3>
5: Open Loop Vector Control for PM Max: 7
6: Advanced Open Loop Vector Control for PM
7: Closed Loop Vector Control for PM
0: No initialization
1110: User Initialize (parameter values must be stored using parameter o2-03) Default: 0
A1-03 Initialize Parameters 2220: 2-wire initialization Min: 0
3330: 3-wire initialization Max: 5550
5550: oPE04 error reset
A1-04 Password When the value set into A1-04 does not match the value set into A1-05, Default: 0000
parameters A1-01 through A1-03, A1-06, and A2-01 through A2-33 cannot be Min: 0000
A1-05 Password Setting changed. Max: 9999
0: General-purpose
1: Water supply pump
2: Conveyor
Default: 0
3: Exhaust fan
A1-06 Application Preset Min: 0
4: HVAC fan
Max: 7
5: Air compressor
6: Elevator
7: Hoist
0: DWEZ disabled Default: 0
DriveWorksEZ Function
A1-07 1: DWEZ enabled Min: 0
Selection
2: Digital input (enabled when H1- = 9F) Max: 2
<2> Default setting value is dependent on the Application Preset selected with parameter A1-06.
<3> Parameter setting value is not reset to the default value when the drive is initialized.
Setting 0: Asia (Model code: CIMR-ATA)
Setting 1: Japan (Model code: CIMR-AAA)
Parameter List
B
B Parameter List
■ A2: User Parameters

Default: <2>
A2-01 to Parameters that were recently edited are listed here. The user can also select
User Parameters 1 to 32 Min: b1-01
A2-32 parameters to appear here for quick access.
Max: o2-08
0: Parameters A2-01 through A2-32 are reserved for the user to create a list of
Default: 1 <1>
User Parameter Automatic User Parameters.
A2-33 Min: 0
Selection 1: Save history of recently viewed parameters. Recently edited parameters will
Max: 1
be saved to A2-17 through A2-32 for quick access.
<1> Default setting value is dependent on parameter A1-06. This setting value is 0 when A1-06 = 0, and 1 when A1-06 does not equal 0.
<2> Default setting value is determined by the Application Preset selected with parameter A1-06.
◆ b: Application
Application parameters configure the source of the Run command, DC Injection Braking, Speed Search, timer functions,
PID control, the Dwell function, Energy Savings, and a variety of other application-related settings.
■ b1: Operation Mode Selection

0: Digital operator
1: Analog input terminals Default: 1
Frequency Reference
b1-01 2: MEMOBUS/Modbus communications Min: 0
Selection 1
3: Option PCB Max: 4
4: Pulse input (terminal RP)
0: Digital operator
Default: 1
1: Digital input terminals
b1-02 Run Command Selection 1 Min: 0
2: MEMOBUS/Modbus communications
Max: 3
3: Option PCB
0: Ramp to stop
Default: 0
1: Coast to stop
b1-03 Stopping Method Selection Min: 0
2: DC Injection Braking to stop
Max: 3 <11>
3: Coast with timer
Default: 0
0: Reverse enabled.
b1-04 Reverse Operation Selection Min: 0
1: Reverse disabled.
Max: 1
0: Operates according to frequency reference (E1-09 is disabled).
Default: 0
Action Selection below 1: Output shuts off (coast to stop if less than E1-09).
b1-05 Min: 0
Minimum Output Frequency 2: Operates according to E1-09 (frequency reference set to E1-09).
Max: 3
3: Zero speed (frequency reference becomes zero when less than E1-09).
0: Input status is read once and processed immediately (for quick response) Default: 1
b1-06 Digital Input Reading 1: Input is read twice and processed only if the status is the same in both Min: 0
readings (robust against noisy signals) Max: 1
Default: 0
LOCAL/REMOTE Run 0: An external Run command has to be cycled at the new source to be activated.
b1-07 Min: 0
Selection 1: An external Run command at new source is accepted immediately.
Max: 1
0: Run command not accepted while in the Programming Mode. Default: 0
Run Command Selection
b1-08 1: Run command accepted while in the Programming Mode. Min: 0
while in Programming Mode
2: Prohibit entering Programming Mode during run. Max: 2
Default: 0
0: Standard
b1-14 Phase Order Selection Min: 0
1: Switch phase order (reverses the direction of the motor)
Max: 1
Enabled when an input terminal set for “External reference” (H1- = 2)
closes.
0: Digital operator Default: 0
Frequency Reference
b1-15 1: Terminals (analog input terminals) Min: 0
Selection 2
2: MEMOBUS/Modbus communications Max: 4
3: Option card
4: Pulse train input
B Parameter List

Enabled when a terminal set for “External reference” (H1- = 2) closes.
0: Digital operator Default: 0
b1-16 Run Command Selection 2 1: Digital input terminals Min: 0
2: MEMOBUS/Modbus communications Max: 3
3: Option card
0: Disregarded. A new Run command needs to be issued after power up. Default: 0
b1-17 Run Command at Power Up 1: Allowed. Motor will start immediately after power up if a Run command is Min: 0
already enabled. Max: 1
<11> Setting 2 and 3 are not available when using CLV.
■ b2: DC Injection Braking and Short Circuit Braking

Default: <10>
DC Injection Braking Start Sets the frequency at which DC Injection Braking starts when “Ramp to stop”
b2-01 Min: 0.0 Hz
Frequency (b1-03 = 0) is selected.
Max: 10.0 Hz
Default: 50%
b2-02 Sets the DC Injection Braking current as a percentage of the drive rated current. Min: 0%
Current
Max: 100%
Default: 0.00 s
DC Injection Braking Time Sets the time of DC Injection Braking (Zero Speed Control when in CLV and
b2-03 Min: 0.00 s
at Start CLV/PM) time at start. Disabled when set to 0.00 s.
Max: 10.00 s
Default: <10>
DC Injection Braking Time Sets the time of DC Injection Braking (Zero Speed Control when in CLV and
b2-04 Min: 0.00 s
at Stop CLV/PM) at stop.
Max: 10.00 s
Default: 0%
Magnetic Flux Compensation Sets the magnetic flux compensation as a percentage of the no-load current
b2-08 Min: 0%
Value value (E2-03).
Max: 1000%
Default: 0.00 s
Short Circuit Brake Time at
b2-12 Sets the time for Short Circuit Braking operation at start. <7> Min: 0.00 s
Start
Max: 25.50 s
Default: 0.50 s
Short Circuit Brake Time at
b2-13 Sets the Short Circuit Braking operation time at stop. <7> Min: 0.00 s
Stop
Max: 25.50 s
Default: 100.0%
Determines the current level for Short Circuit Braking. Set as a percentage of the
b2-18 Short Circuit Braking Current Min: 0.0%
motor rated current.
Max: 200.0%
<7> A coasting motor may require a braking resistor circuit to bring the motor to a stop in the required time.
<10> Default setting is determined by the control mode (A1-02).
■ b3: Speed Search

Default: <10>
Speed Search Selection at 0: Disabled
b3-01 Min: 0
Start 1: Enabled
Max: 1
Default: <10>
Speed Search Deactivation Sets the current level at which the speed is assumed to be detected and Speed
b3-02 Min: 0%
Current Search is ended. Set as a percentage of the drive rated current.
Max: 200%
Default: 2.0 s
Speed Search Deceleration
b3-03 Sets output frequency reduction time during Speed Search. Min: 0.1 s
Time
Max: 10.0 s
Default: <9>
Determines how much to lower the V/f ratio during Speed Search.
b3-04 V/f Gain during Speed Search Min: 10%
Output voltage during Speed Search equals the V/f setting multiplied by b3-04.
Max: 100%
When using an external contactor on the output side, b3-05 delays executing Default: 0.2 s
b3-05 Speed Search Delay Time Speed Search after a momentary power loss to allow time for the contactor to Min: 0.0 s
Parameter List
close. Max: 100.0 s

Default: <9>
Output Current 1 during Sets the current injected to the motor at the beginning of Speed Estimation
b3-06 Min: 0.0
Speed Search Speed Search. Set as a coefficient for the motor rated current.
Max: 2.0
B
B Parameter List

Sets the gain which is applied to the speed detected by Speed Estimation Speed Default: 1.05
Speed Search Detection
b3-10 Search before the motor is reaccelerated. Increase this setting if ov occurs when Min: 1.00
Compensation Gain
performing Speed Search after a relatively long period of baseblock. Max: 1.20
Default: <10>
Bi-Directional Speed Search 0: Disabled (uses the direction of the frequency reference)
b3-14 Min: 0
Selection 1: Enabled (drive detects which way the motor is rotating)
Max: 1
Default: 150%
Speed Search Restart Current Sets the Speed Search restart current level as a percentage of the drive rated
b3-17 Min: 0%
Level current.
Max: 200%
Default: 0.10 s
Speed Search Restart
b3-18 Sets the time to detect Speed Search restart. Min: 0.00 s
Detection Time
Max: 1.00 s
Default: 3
Number of Speed Search Sets the number of times the drive can attempt to restart when performing Speed
b3-19 Min: 0
Restarts Search.
Max: 10
Default: 0
Speed Search Method 0: Current Detection
b3-24 Min: 0
Selection 1: Speed Estimation
Max: 1
Default: 0.5 s
b3-25 Speed Search Wait Time Sets the time the must wait between each Speed Search restart attempt. Min: 0.0 s
Max: 30.0 s
<9> Default setting value is dependent on the drive model (o2-04) and the Drive Duty (C6-01).
■ b4: Timer Function

Default: 0.0 s
Timer Function On-Delay
b4-01 Min: 0.0 s
Time
Used to set the on-delay and off-delay times for a digital timer output (H2- Max: 3000.0 s
=12). The output is triggered by a digital input programmed to H1-=18) Default: 0.0 s
Timer Function Off-Delay
b4-02 Min: 0.0 s
Time
Max: 3000.0 s
■ b5: PID Control

0: Disabled
1: Enabled (PID output becomes output frequency reference, deviation D
controlled) Default: 0
b5-01 PID Function Setting 2: Enabled (PID output becomes output frequency reference, feedback D Min: 0
controlled) Max: 4
3: Enabled (PID output added to frequency reference, deviation D controlled)
4: Enabled (PID output added to frequency reference, feedback D controlled)
b5-02 Default: 1.00
Proportional Gain Setting (P) Sets the proportional gain of the PID controller. Min: 0.00
Max: 25.00
b5-03 Default: 1.0 s
Integral Time Setting (I) Sets the integral time for the PID controller. Min: 0.0 s
Max: 360.0 s
b5-04 Default: 100.0%
Sets the maximum output possible from the integrator as a percentage of the
Integral Limit Setting Min: 0.0%
maximum output frequency.
Max: 100.0%
Derivative Time (D) Sets D control derivative time. Min: 0.00 s
Max: 10.00 s
b5-06 Default: 100.0%
Sets the maximum output possible from the entire PID controller as a percentage
PID Output Limit Min: 0.0%
of the maximum output frequency.
Max: 100.0%
b5-07 Default: 0.0%
Applies an offset to the PID controller output. Set as a percentage of the
PID Offset Adjustment Min: -100.0%
Max: 100.0%
B Parameter List

PID Primary Delay Time
Sets a low pass filter time constant on the output of the PID controller. Min: 0.00 s
Constant
Max: 10.00 s
Default: 0
0: Normal output (direct acting)
b5-09 PID Output Level Selection Min: 0
1: Reverse output (reverse acting)
Max: 1
Default: 1.00
b5-10 PID Output Gain Setting Sets the gain applied to the PID output. Min: 0.00
Max: 25.00
0: Negative PID output triggers zero limit.
Default: 0
PID Output Reverse 1: Rotation direction reverses with negative PID output.
b5-11 Min: 0
Selection When using setting 1, make sure reverse operation is permitted by parameter b1-
Max: 1
04.
0: No fault. Digital output only.
1: Fault detection. Alarm output, drive continues operation.
2: Fault detection. Fault output, drive output is shut off.
Default: 0
PID Feedback Loss 3: No fault. Digital output only. No fault detection when PID control is disabled.
b5-12 Min: 0
Detection Selection 4: Fault detection. Alarm is triggered and drive continues to run. Fault detection
Max: 5
even when PID is disabled.
5: Fault detection. Drive output shuts off. No fault detection when PID control is
disabled.
Default: 0%
PID Feedback Loss Sets the PID feedback loss detection level as a percentage of the maximum
b5-13 Min: 0%
Detection Level output frequency.
Max: 100%
Default: 1.0 s
PID Feedback Loss
b5-14 Sets a delay time for PID feedback loss. Min: 0.0 s
Detection Time
Max: 25.5 s
Default: 0.0 Hz
PID Sleep Function Start
b5-15 Sets the frequency level that triggers the sleep function. Min: 0.0 Hz
Level
Max: 400.0 Hz
Default: 0.0 s
b5-16 PID Sleep Delay Time Sets a delay time before the sleep function is triggered. Min: 0.0 s
Max: 25.5 s
Default: 0.0 s
b5-17 PID Accel/Decel Time Sets the acceleration and deceleration time to PID setpoint. Min: 0.0 s
Max: 6000.0 s
Default: 0
0: Disabled
b5-18 PID Setpoint Selection Min: 0
1: Enabled
Max: 1
Default: 0.00%
Sets the PID target value when b5-18 = 1. Set as a percentage of the maximum
b5-19 PID Setpoint Value Min: 0.00%
output frequency.
Max: 100.00%
0: 0.01Hz units
Default: 1
1: 0.01% units (100% = max output frequency)
b5-20 PID Setpoint Scaling Min: 0
2: r/min (number of motor poles must entered)
Max: 3
3: User-set (set scaling to b5-38 and b5-39)
Default: 0.00%
Sets the minimum output possible from the PID controller as a percentage of the
b5-34 PID Output Lower Limit Min: -100.0%
Max: 100.0%
b5-35 Default: 1000.0%
Limits the PID control input (deviation signal) as a percentage of the maximum
PID Input Limit Min: 0%
output frequency. Acts as a bipolar limit.
Max: 1000.0%
Default: 100%
PID Feedback High Sets the PID feedback high detection level as a percentage of the maximum
b5-36 Min: 0%
Detection Level output frequency.
Max: 100%
Default: 1.0 s
PID Feedback High
b5-37 Sets the PID feedback high level detection delay time. Min: 0.0 s
Detection Time
Parameter List
Max: 25.5 s
Default: <5>
Sets the display value of U5-01 and U5-04 when the maximum frequency is
b5-38 PID Setpoint User Display Min: 1
output.
Max: 60000
B
B Parameter List

0: No decimal places
Default: <5>
1: One decimal places
b5-39 PID Setpoint Display Digits Min: 0
2: Two decimal places
Max: 3
3: Three decimal places
0: Display the frequency reference (U1-01) after PID compensation has been
Default: 0
Frequency Reference added.
b5-40 Min: 0
Monitor Content during PID 1: Display the frequency reference (U1-01) before PID compensation has been
Max: 1
added.
<5> Default setting is dependent on PID setpoint scaling (b5-20).
■ b6: Dwell Function

Default: 0.0 Hz
b6-01 Dwell Reference at Start Min: 0.0 Hz
Max: 400.0 Hz
Default: 0.0 s
b6-02 Dwell Time at Start Parameters b6-01 and b6-02 set the frequency to hold and the time to maintain Min: 0.0 s
that frequency at start. Max: 10.0 s
Parameters b6-03 and b6-04 set the frequency to hold and the time to maintain Default: 0.0 Hz
b6-03 Dwell Reference at Stop that frequency at stop. Min: 0.0 Hz
Max: 400.0 Hz
Default: 0.0 s
b6-04 Dwell Time at Stop Min: 0.0 s
Max: 10.0 s
■ b7: Droop Control

b7-01 Default: 0.0%
Sets the speed reduction gain applied at a torque reference of 100%. Set as a
Droop Control Gain Min: 0.0%
percentage of motor base speed.
Max: 100.0%
Droop Control Delay Time Used to adjust the responsiveness of Droop Control. Min: 0.03 s
Max: 2.00 s
■ b8: Energy Saving

Default: <10>
Energy Saving Control 0: Disabled
b8-01 Min: 0
Selection 1: Enabled
Max: 1
b8-02 Default: <10>
Energy Saving Gain Sets the gain used for Energy Saving. Min: 0.0
Max: 10.0
b8-03 Default: <4>
Energy Saving Control Filter
Sets a time constant for Energy Saving. Min: 0.00 s
Time Constant
Max: 10.00 s
Determines the level of maximum motor efficiency. Setting range is 0.0 to
Default: <8> <9>
Energy Saving Coefficient 2000.0 maximum output up to 3.7 kW. The display resolution depends on the
b8-04 Min: 0.00
Value rated output power of the drive after the Drive Duty has been set in parameter
Max: 655.00
C6-01. Refer to Model Number and Nameplate Check on page 17.
Default: 20 ms
b8-05 Power Detection Filter Time Sets a time constant filter for output power detection. Min: 0 ms
Max: 2000 ms
Default: 0%
Search Operation Voltage Sets the limit for the voltage search operation as a percentage of the motor rated
b8-06 Min: 0%
Limit voltage.
Max: 100%
<4> Default setting is dependent on the control mode (A1-02), the drive model (o2-04), and the Drive Duty (C6-01).
<8> Parameter value changes automatically if E2-11 is manually changed or changed by Auto-Tuning.
B Parameter List
■ b9: Zero Servo

Default: 5
b9-01 Zero Servo Gain Sets the position loop gain for the Zero Servo function. Min: 0
Max: 100
Default: 10
Sets the range to trigger an output terminal set for “Zero Servo Complete”
b9-02 Zero Servo Completion Width Min: 0
during Zero Servo operation.
Max: 16383
◆ C: Tuning
C parameters are used to adjust the acceleration and deceleration times, S-curves, slip compensation, torque
compensation, and carrier frequency selections.
■ C1: Acceleration and Deceleration Times

C1-01
Acceleration Time 1 Sets the time to accelerate from 0 to maximum frequency.
C1-02
Deceleration Time 1 Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to 0.
C1-03
Acceleration Time 2 Sets the time to accelerate from 0 to maximum frequency.
C1-04
Deceleration Time 2 Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to 0.
Default: 10.0 s
C1-05 Acceleration Time 3 (Motor Min: 0.0 s
Sets the time to accelerate from 0 to maximum frequency. Max: 6000.0 s <12>
2 Accel Time 1)
C1-06 Deceleration Time 3 (Motor
Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to 0.
2 Decel Time 1)
C1-07 Acceleration Time 4 (Motor
Sets the time to accelerate from 0 to maximum frequency.
2 Accel Time 2)
C1-08 Deceleration Time 4 (Motor
Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to 0.
2 Decel Time 2)
C1-09 Fast Stop Time Sets the time for the Fast Stop function.
Default: 1
Accel/Decel Time Setting 0: 0.01 s (0.00 to 600.00 s)
C1-10 Min: 0
Units 1: 0.1 s (0.0 to 6000.0 s)
Max: 1
Default: 0.0 Hz
Accel/Decel Time Switching
C1-11 Sets the frequency to switch between accel/decel time settings Min: 0.0 Hz
Frequency
Max: 400.0 Hz
<12> Setting range value is dependent on parameter C1-10, Accel/Decel Time Setting Units. When C1-10 = 0 (units of 0.01 seconds), the setting
range becomes 0.00 to 600.00 seconds.
Parameter List
B
B Parameter List
■ C2: S-Curve Characteristics

Default: 0.20 s <10>
S-Curve Characteristic at
C2-01 Min: 0.00 s
Accel Start
Max: 10.00 s
The S-curve can be controlled at the four points shown below. Default: 0.20 s
C2-02 Min: 0.00 s
Accel End ON OFF
Run Command
Output Frequency
Max: 10.00 s
C2-02 C2-03
Default: 0.20 s
C2-03 C2-01 C2-04
Min: 0.00 s
Decel Start Time Max: 10.00 s
Default: 0.00 s
C2-04 Min: 0.00 s
Decel End
Max: 10.00 s
■ C3: Slip Compensation

C3-01 Default: <10>
Slip Compensation Gain Sets the gain for the motor slip compensation function used for motor 1. Min: 0.0
Max: 2.5
C3-02 Default: <10>
Slip Compensation Primary
Adjusts the slip compensation function delay time used for motor 1. Min: 0 ms
Delay Time
Max: 10000 ms
Default: 200%
Sets an upper limit for the slip compensation function as a percentage of motor
C3-03 Slip Compensation Limit Min: 0%
rated slip for motor 1 (E2-02).
Max: 250%
0: Disabled. Default: 0
Slip Compensation Selection
C3-04 1: Enabled above 6 Hz. Min: 0
during Regeneration
2: Enabled whenever slip compensation is possible. Max: 2
0: Disabled. Default: 0
Output Voltage Limit
C3-05 1: Enabled. Automatically decreases motor flux when output voltage saturation Min: 0
Operation Selection
is reached. Max: 1
C3-21 Default: <15>
Motor 2 Slip Compensation
Sets the slip compensation gain used for motor 2. Min: 0.0
Gain
Max: 2.5
C3-22 Default: <15>
Motor 2 Slip Compensation
Sets the slip compensation delay time used for motor 2. Min: 0 ms
Primary Delay Time
Max: 10000 ms
Default: 200%
Motor 2 Slip Compensation Sets the upper limit for the slip compensation function for motor 2. Set as a
C3-23 Min: 0%
Limit percentage of the motor rated slip (E4-02).
Max: 250%
Motor 2 Slip Compensation 0: Disabled. Default: 0
C3-24 Selection During 1: Enabled above 6 Hz. Min: 0
Regeneration 2: Enabled whenever slip compensation is possible. Max: 2
<15> Default setting is determined by the control mode for motor 2 (E3-01).
■ C4: Torque Compensation

C4-01 Default: <10>
Sets the gain for the automatic torque (voltage) boost function and helps to
Torque Compensation Gain Min: 0.00
produce better starting torque. Used for motor 1.
Max: 2.50
C4-02 Default: <16>
Torque Compensation
Sets the torque compensation filter time. Min: 0 ms
Primary Delay Time 1
Max: 60000 ms
Default: 0.0%
Torque Compensation at
C4-03 Sets torque compensation at forward start as a percentage of motor torque. Min: 0.0%
Forward Start
Max: 200.0%
B Parameter List

Default: 0.0%
Torque Compensation at
C4-04 Sets torque compensation at reverse start as a percentage of motor torque. Min: -200.0%
Reverse Start
Max: 0.0%
Default: 10 ms
Torque Compensation Time Sets the time constant for torque compensation at forward start and reverse start
C4-05 Min: 0 ms
Constant (C4-03 and C4-04).
Max: 200 ms
Default: 150 ms
Torque Compensation
C4-06 Sets the torque compensation time 2. Min: 0 ms
Primary Delay Time 2
Max: 10000 ms
C4-07 Default: 1.00
Motor 2 Torque
Sets the torque compensation gain used for motor 2. Min: 0.00
Compensation Gain
Max: 2.50
<16> Default setting is determined by the control mode (A1-02) and the drive model (o2-04).
■ C5: Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR)

C5-01 Default: <10>
ASR Proportional Gain 1 Sets the proportional gain of the speed control loop (ASR). Min: 0.00
Max: 300.00 <17>
C5-02 Default: <10>
ASR Integral Time 1 Sets the integral time of the speed control loop (ASR). Min: 0.000 s
Max: 10.000 s
C5-03 Default: <10>
ASR Proportional Gain 2 Sets the speed control gain 2 of the speed control loop (ASR). Min: 0.00
Max: 300.00 <17>
C5-04 Default: <10>
ASR Integral Time 2 Sets the integral time 2 of the speed control loop (ASR). Min: 0.000 s
Max: 10.000 s
Default: 5.0%
Sets the upper limit for the speed control loop (ASR) as a percentage of the
C5-05 ASR Limit Min: 0.0%
maximum output frequency (E1-04).
Max: 20.0%
Default: <10>
C5-06 ASR Primary Delay Time Sets the filter time constant for the time from the speed loop to the torque
Min: 0.000 s
Constant command output.
Max: 0.500 s
Default: 0.0 Hz
ASR Gain Switching Sets the frequency for switching between proportional gain 1, 2 and integral
C5-07 Min: 0.0 Hz
Frequency time 1, 2.
Max: 400.0 Hz
Default: 400%
C5-08 ASR Integral Limit Sets the ASR integral upper limit as a percentage of rated load torque. Min: 0%
Max: 400%
0: Disabled. Integral functions are enabled only during constant speed. Default: 0
Integral Operation during
C5-12 1: Enabled. Integral functions are always enabled, during accel/decel and during Min: 0
Accel/Decel
constant speed. Max: 1
Default: <9> <14>
Sets the motor inertia. This value is automatically set during ASR or Inertia
C5-17 Motor Inertia Min: 0.0001 kgm2
Auto-Tuning.
Max: 600.00 kgm2
Default: 1.0
Sets the ratio between the motor and load inertia. This value is automatically set
C5-18 Load Inertia Ratio Min: 0.0
during ASR or Inertia Auto-Tuning.
Max: 6000.0
C5-21 Default: <15>
Motor 2 ASR Proportional
Sets the proportional gain of the speed control loop (ASR) for motor 2. Min: 0.00
Gain 1
Max: 300.00 <17>
C5-22 Default: <15>
Motor 2 ASR Integral Time 1 Sets the integral time of the speed control loop (ASR) for motor 2. Min: 0.000 s
Max: 10.000 s
Parameter List
C5-23 Default: <15>

Motor 2 ASR Proportional
Sets the speed control gain 2 of the speed control loop (ASR) for motor 2. Min: 0.00
Gain 2
Max: 300.00 <17>
B
B Parameter List

C5-24 Default: <15>
Motor 2 ASR Integral Time 2 Sets the integral time 2 of the speed control loop (ASR) for motor 2. Min: 0.000 s
Max: 10.000 s
Default: 5.0%
Sets the upper limit for the speed control loop (ASR) for motor 2 as a percentage
C5-25 Motor 2 ASR Limit Min: 0.0%
of the maximum output frequency (E3-04).
Max: 20.0%
Default: <15>
Motor 2 ASR Primary Delay Sets the filter time constant for the time from the speed loop to the torque
C5-26 Min: 0.000 s
Time Constant command output used for motor 2.
Max: 0.500 s
Default: 0.0 Hz
Motor 2 ASR Gain Switching Sets the frequency for motor 2 used to switch between proportional gain 1 and 2,
C5-27 Min: 0.0 Hz
Frequency and between the integral time 1 and 2.
Max: 400.0 Hz
Default: 400%
Sets the ASR integral upper limit for motor 2 as a percentage of rated load
C5-28 Motor 2 ASR Integral Limit Min: 0%
torque.
Max: 400%
0: Disabled. Integral functions for motor 2 are enabled only during constant
Default: 0
Integral Operation during speed.
C5-32 Min: 0
Accel/Decel for Motor 2 1: Enabled. Integral functions are always enabled for motor 2, during accel/decel
Max: 1
and during constant speed.
Default: <9>
Sets the inertia of motor 2 alone without the load. This value is automatically set
C5-37 Motor 2 Inertia Min: 0.0001 kgm2
during ASR or Inertia Auto-Tuning.
Max: 600.00 kgm2
Default: 1.0
Sets the ratio between the motor 2 and machine inertia. This value is
C5-38 Motor 2 Load Inertia Ratio Min: 0.0
automatically set during ASR or Inertia Auto-Tuning.
Max: 6000.0
<14> Default setting value is dependent on the motor code set to E5-01.
<15> Default setting is determined by the control mode for motor 2 (E3-01).
<17> The setting range is 1.00 to 300.0 in CLV and AOLV/PM.
■ C6: Carrier Frequency

Default: 0
0: Heavy Duty (HD) for constant torque applications.
C6-01 Drive Duty Selection Min: 0
1: Normal Duty (ND) for variable torque applications.
Max: 1
1: 2.0 kHz
2: 5.0 kHz
3: 8.0 kHz
4: 10.0 kHz
5: 12.5 kHz
Default: <4>
6: 15.0 kHz
C6-02 Carrier Frequency Selection Min: 1
7: Swing PWM1 (Audible sound 1)
Max: F
A: Swing PWM4 (Audible sound 4)
B to E: No setting possible
F: User defined (determined by C6-03 through C6-05)
Note: C6-04 and C6-05 are available only in V/f and V/f w/PG control modes. Default: <13>
Carrier Frequency Upper Determines the upper and lower limits for the carrier frequency.
C6-03 Min: 1.0 kHz
Limit In OLV, C6-03 determines the upper limit of the carrier frequency. Max: 15.0 kHz
Carrier Frequency
Default: <13>
Carrier Frequency Lower
C6-04 C6-03 Min: 1.0 kHz
Limit
Max: 15.0 kHz
C6-04 Output Frequency
× (C6-05) × K
Output Default: <13>
Carrier Frequency Frequency
C6-05 E1-04 Min: 0
Proportional Gain Max Output
Frequency Max: 99
Default: 0
Carrier Frequency during 0: Carrier Frequency = 5 kHz
C6-09 Min: 0
Rotational Auto-Tuning 1: Setting value for C6-03
Max: 1
B Parameter List
<13> Default setting value is dependent on the carrier frequency selection (C6-02).
◆ d: References
Reference parameters are used to set the various frequency reference values during operation.
■ d1: Frequency Reference

d1-01
Frequency Reference 1
d1-02
d1-03
d1-04
d1-05
d1-06
d1-07
d1-08
Frequency Reference 8 Default: 0.00 Hz
Sets the frequency reference for the drive. Setting units are determined by Min: 0.00 Hz
d1-09 parameter o1-03. Max: 400.00 Hz
Frequency Reference 9 <20> <26>
d1-10
d1-11
d1-12
d1-13
d1-14
d1-15
d1-16
Default: 6.00 Hz
d1-17 Sets the jog frequency reference. Setting units are determined by parameter o1- Min: 0.00 Hz
Jog Frequency Reference
03. Max: 400.00 Hz
<20> <26>
<20> Range upper limit is determined by the maximum output frequency (E1-04) and the upper limit of the frequency reference (d2-01).
Parameter List
<26> The setting range is 0.0 to 66.0 in AOLV/PM.
B
B Parameter List
■ d2: Frequency Upper/Lower Limits

Default: 100.0%
Frequency Reference Upper Sets the frequency reference upper limit as a percentage of the maximum output
d2-01 Min: 0.0%
Limit frequency.
Max: 110.0%
Default: 0.0%
Frequency Reference Lower Sets the frequency reference lower limit as a percentage of the maximum output
d2-02 Min: 0.0%
Limit frequency.
Max: 110.0%
Default: 0.0%
Master Speed Reference Sets the lower limit for frequency references from analog inputs as a percentage
d2-03 Min: 0.0
Lower Limit of the maximum output frequency.
Max: 110.0%
■ d3: Jump Frequency

d3-01 Jump Frequency 1 Eliminates problems with resonant vibration of the motor/machine by avoiding
d3-02 Jump Frequency 2 continuous operation in predefined frequency ranges. The drive accelerates and Default: 0.0 Hz
decelerates the motor through the prohibited frequency ranges. Min: 0.0 Hz
d3-03 Jump Frequency 3 Setting 0.0 disables this function. Max: 400.0 Hz
Parameters must be set so that d3-01 ≥ d3-02 ≥ d3-03.
Default: <10>
Sets the dead-band width around each selected prohibited frequency reference
d3-04 Jump Frequency Width Min: 0.0 Hz
point.
Max: 20.0 Hz
■ d4: Frequency Reference Hold and Up/Down 2 Function

0: Disabled. Drive starts from zero when the power is switched on. Default: 0
Frequency Reference Hold
d4-01 1: Enabled. At power up, the drive starts the motor at the Hold frequency that Min: 0
Function Selection
was saved. Max: 1
d4-03 Default: 0.00 Hz
Frequency Reference Bias Sets the bias added to the frequency reference when the Up 2 and Down 2 digital
Min: 0.00 Hz
Step (Up/Down 2) inputs are enabled (H1- = 75, 76).
Max: 99.99 Hz
d4-04 Default: 0
Frequency Reference Bias 0: Use selected accel/decel time.
Min: 0
Accel/Decel (Up/Down 2) 1: Use accel/decel time 4 (C1-07 and C1-08).
Max: 1
0: Bias value is held if no input Up 2 or Down 2 is active.
d4-05 Frequency Reference Bias Default: 0
1: When the Up 2 reference and Down 2 reference are both on or both off, the
Operation Mode Selection Min: 0
applied bias becomes 0. The specified accel/decel times are used for
(Up/Down 2) Max: 1
acceleration or deceleration.
The Up/Down 2 bias value is saved in d4-06 when the frequency reference is not Default: 0.0%
Frequency Reference Bias
d4-06 input by the digital operator. Set as a percentage of the maximum output Min: -99.9%
(Up/Down 2)
frequency. Max: 100.0%
Limits how much the frequency reference is allowed to change while an input
Analog Frequency Reference terminal set for Up 2 or Down 2 is enabled. If the frequency reference changes Default: 1.0%
d4-07 Fluctuation Limit (Up/Down for more than the set value, then the bias value is held and the drive accelerates Min: 0.1%
2) or decelerates to the frequency reference. Set as a percentage of the maximum Max: 100.0%
output frequency.
Default: 0.0%
Frequency Reference Bias Sets the upper limit for the bias and the value that can be saved in d4-06. Set as a
d4-08 Min: 0.0%
Upper Limit (Up/Down 2) percentage of the maximum output frequency.
Max: 100.0%
d4-09 Default: 0.0%
Frequency Reference Bias Sets the lower limit for the bias and the value that can be saved in d4-06. Set as a
Min: -99.9%
Lower Limit (Up/Down 2) percentage of the maximum output frequency.
Max: 0.0%
Default: 0
Up/Down Frequency 0: The lower limit is determined by d2-02 or an analog input.
d4-10 Min: 0
Reference Limit Selection 1: The lower limit is determined by d2-02.
Max: 1
B Parameter List
■ d5: Torque Control

0: Speed Control
Default: 0
1: Torque Control
d5-01 Torque Control Selection Min: 0
Set to 0 when using a digital input to switch between Speed and Torque Control
Max: 1
(H1- = 71).
Default: 0 ms
Torque Reference Delay Sets a delay time for the torque reference signal. Used to suppress effects by
d5-02 Min: 0 ms
Time noisy or fluctuating torque reference signals.
Max: 1000 ms
Default: 1
1: Limit set by the frequency reference in b1-01.
d5-03 Speed Limit Selection Min: 1
2: Limit set by d5-04.
Max: 2
Sets the speed limit during Torque Control as a percentage of the maximum Default: 0%
d5-04 Speed Limit output frequency. Enabled when d5-03 = 2. A negative setting set a limit in the Min: -120%
opposite direction of the Run command. Max: 120%
Sets the speed limit bias as a percentage of the maximum output frequency. Default: 10%
d5-05 Speed Limit Bias The bias is applied to the specified speed limit and can adjust the margin for the Min: 0%
speed limit. Max: 120%
Sets the delay time for switching between Speed and Torque Control using an Default: 0 ms
Speed/Torque Control
d5-06 input terminal (H1- = 71). Reference values are held during this switch Min: 0 ms
Switchover Time
delay time. Max: 1000 ms
Default: 1
Unidirectional Speed Limit 0: Disabled
d5-08 Min: 0
Bias 1: Enabled
Max: 1
■ d6: Field Weakening and Field Forcing

Sets the drive output voltage for the Field Weakening function as a percentage of Default: 80%
d6-01 Field Weakening Level the maximum output voltage. Min: 0%
Enabled when a multi-function input is set for Field Weakening (H1- = 63). Max: 100%
Sets the lower limit of the frequency range where Field Weakening control is
valid. Default: 0.0 Hz
Field Weakening Frequency
d6-02 The Field Weakening command is valid only at frequencies above this setting Min: 0.0 Hz
Limit
and only when the output frequency matches the frequency reference (speed Max: 400.0 Hz
agree).
Default: 0
0: Disabled
d6-03 Field Forcing Selection Min: 0
1: Enabled
Max: 1
Sets the upper limit of the excitation current command during magnetic field Default: 400%
d6-06 Field Forcing Limit forcing. A setting of 100% is equal to motor no-load current. Disabled only Min: 100%
during DC Injection Braking. Max: 400%
■ d7: Offset Frequency

d7-01 Default: 0.0%
Added to the frequency reference when the digital input “Frequency offset 1”
Offset Frequency 1 Min: -100.0%
(H1- = 44) is switched on.
Max: 100.0%
d7-02 Default: 0.0%
Max: 100.0%
d7-03 Default: 0.0%
Max: 100%
Parameter List
B
B Parameter List
◆ E: Motor Parameters
■ E1: V/f Pattern for Motor 1

This parameter must be set to the power supply voltage.
Default: 200 V <18>
WARNING! Drive input voltage (not motor voltage) must be set in E1-01 for
E1-01 Input Voltage Setting Min: 155 V
the protective features of the drive to function properly. Failure to do so may
Max: 255 V
result in equipment damage and/or death or personal injury.
0: 50 Hz, Constant torque 1
1: 60 Hz, Constant torque 2
2: 60 Hz, Constant torque 3 (50 Hz base)
3: 72 Hz, Constant torque 4 (60 Hz base)
4: 50 Hz, Variable torque 1
Default: F <3>
E1-03 V/f Pattern Selection Min: 0
8: 50 Hz, High starting torque 1
Max: F <30>
9: 50 Hz, High starting torque 2
A: 60 Hz, High starting torque 3
B: 60 Hz, High starting torque 4
C: 90 Hz (60 Hz base)
D: 120 Hz (60 Hz base)
E: 180 Hz (60 Hz base)
F: Custom V/f, E1-04 through E1-13 settings define the V/f pattern
Default: <4> <14>
E1-04 Maximum Output Frequency Min: 40.0
Max: 400.0 <29>
Default: <4> <14> <18>
E1-05 Maximum Voltage Min: 0.00 V
These parameters are only applicable when E1-03 is set to F. Max: 255.0 V <18>
To set linear V/f characteristics, set the same values for E1-07 and E1-09. In this Default: <4> <14>
E1-06 Base Frequency case, the setting for E1-08 will be disregarded. Ensure that the four frequencies Min: 0.0
are set according to these rules: Max: E1-04 <29>
E1-09 ≤ E1-07 < E1-06 ≤ Ε1−11 ≤ E1-04 Default: <4>
E1-07 Middle Output Frequency Note that if E1-11 = 0, then both E1-11 and E1-12 are disabled, and the above Min: 0.0
conditions do not apply. Max: E1-04
Output Voltage (V) Default: <4> <18>
Middle Output Frequency E1-05
E1-08 Min: 0.0 V
Voltage E1-12
Max: 255.0 V <18>
E1-13
Default: <4> <14>
E1-09 Minimum Output Frequency Min: 0.0
E1-08 Max: E1-04 <26> <29>
Default: <4> <18>
Minimum Output Frequency E1-10
E1-10 Min: 0.0 V
Voltage E1-09 E1-07 E1-06 E1-11 E1-04
Max: 255.0 V <18>
Frequency (Hz)
Note: Some parameters may not be available depending on the control mode. Default: 0.0 Hz
E1-11
Middle Output Frequency 2 • E1-07, E1-08 and E-10 are available only in the following control modes: V/f Min: 0.0
<21>
Control, V/f with PG, Open Loop Vector. Max: E1-04 <26>
• E1-11, E1-12 and E-13 are available only in the following control modes: V/f Default: 0.0 V
E1-12 Middle Output Frequency Control, V/f with PG, Open Loop Vector, Closed Loop Vector. Min: 0.0 V
<21> Voltage 2
Max: 255.0 V <18>
Default: 0.0 V
<18> <27>
E1-13 Base Voltage
Min: 0.0 V
Max: 255.0 V <18>
<18> Values shown here are for 200 V class drives. Double the value when using a 400 V class drive.
<21> Parameter ignored when E1-11 (Motor 1 Mid Output Frequency 2) and E1-12 (Motor 1 Mid Output Frequency Voltage 2) are set to 0.0.
<27> When Auto-Tuning is performed, E1-13 and E1-05 will be set to the same value.
B Parameter List
<29> The setting range varies according to the motor code entered to E5-01 when using OLV/PM. The setting range is 0.0 to 400.0 Hz when E5-01
is set to FFFFH.
<30> The setting value is F in OLV.
<44> The default value shown here is for the following localized drives: Japan (Model code: CIMR-AAA), Asia (Model code: CIMR-ATA)
■ E2: Motor 1 Parameters

Default: <9>
Min: 10% of drive
Sets the motor nameplate full load current in Amps. Automatically set during
E2-01 Motor Rated Current rated current
Auto-Tuning.
Max: 200% of drive
rated current <19>
Default: <9>
E2-02 Motor Rated Slip Sets the motor rated slip. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. Min: 0.00 Hz
Max: 20.00 Hz
Default: <9>
E2-03 Motor No-Load Current Sets the no-load current for the motor. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. Min: 0 A
Max: E2-01 <19>
Default: 4
E2-04 Number of Motor Poles Sets the number of motor poles. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. Min: 2
Max: 48
Default: <9>
Motor Line-to-Line Sets the phase-to-phase motor resistance. Automatically set during
E2-05 Min: 0.000 Ω
Resistance Auto-Tuning.
Max: 65.000 Ω
Default: <9>
Sets the voltage drop due to motor leakage inductance as a percentage of motor
E2-06 Motor Leakage Inductance Min: 0.0%
rated voltage. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning.
Max: 40.0%
Default: 0.50
Motor Iron-Core Saturation Sets the motor iron saturation coefficient at 50% of magnetic flux.
E2-07 Min: E2-07
Coefficient 1 Automatically set during Auto-Tuning.
Max: 0.50
Default: 0.75
Motor Iron-Core Saturation Sets the motor iron saturation coefficient at 75% of magnetic flux.
E2-08 Min: E2-07
Coefficient 2 Automatically set during Auto-Tuning.
Max: 0.75
Default: 0.0%
E2-09 Motor Mechanical Loss Sets the motor mechanical loss as a percentage of motor rated power (kW). Min: 0.0%
Max: 10.0%
Default: <9>
Motor Iron Loss for Torque
E2-10 Sets the motor iron loss. Min: 0 W
Compensation
Max: 65535 W
Default: <9>
Sets the motor rated power in kilowatts (1 HP = 0.746 kW). Automatically set
E2-11 Motor Rated Power Min: 0.00 kW
during Auto-Tuning.
Max: 650.00 kW
<19> This value's number of decimal places depends on the drive model and the Heavy/Normal duty selection in parameter C6-01. The value will
have two decimal places (0.01 A) if the drive is set for a Maximum Applicable Motor Capacity up to 11 kW (refer to Table 60 and Table 61)
and one decimal place (0.1 A) if the set Maximum Applicable Motor Capacity is higher than 11 kW.
■ E3: V/f Pattern for Motor 2

These parameters are hidden when a PM motor control mode has been selected for motor 1 (A1-02 = 5, 6, 7).

0: V/f Control
Default: 0
Motor 2 Control Mode 1: V/f Control with PG
E3-01 Min: 0
Selection 2: Open Loop Vector Control
Max: 3
3: Closed Loop Vector Control
Parameter List
B
B Parameter List

Default: <25> <44>
Motor 2 Maximum Output
E3-04 Min: 40.0
Frequency
Max: 400.0
Default: <18>
E3-05 Motor 2 Maximum Voltage Min: 0.0 V
Max: 255.0 V <18>
Default: <25> <44>
E3-06 Motor 2 Base Frequency These parameters are only applicable when E1-03 is set to F. Min: 0.0
To set linear V/f characteristics, set the same values for E3-07 and E3-09. In this Max: E3-04
case, the setting for E3-08 will be disregarded. Ensure that the four frequencies Default: <25> <44>
Motor 2 Mid Output
E3-07 are set according to these rules or an oPE10 fault will occur: Min: 0.0
Frequency
E3-09 ≤ E3-07 < E3-06 ≤ Ε3−11 ≤ E3-04 Max: E3-04
Default: <18> <25>
Motor 2 Mid Output Output Voltage (V)
E3-08 E3-05 Min: 0.0 V
Frequency Voltage E3-12
Max: 255.0 V <18>
E3-13
Default: <25> <44>
Motor 2 Minimum Output
E3-09 Min: 0.0
Frequency
E3-08 Max: E3-04
Default: <18> <25>
Motor 2 Minimum Output
E3-10 E3-10 Min: 0.0 V
Frequency Voltage
E3-09 E3-07 E3-06 E3-11 E3-04 Max: 255.0 V <18>
Frequency (Hz)
Default: 0.0 <24>
Motor 2 Mid Output Note: E3-07 and E3-08 are only available in the following control modes: V/f, Min: 0.0
E3-11
Frequency 2 V/f w/PG and OLV. Max: E3-04 <26>
Default: 0.0 V <18>
E3-12 Motor 2 Mid Output
Min: 0.0 V
<24> Frequency Voltage 2
Max: 255.0 V <18>
Default: 0.0 V
<18> <27>
E3-13 Motor 2 Base Voltage
Min: 0.0 V
Max: 255.0 V <18>
<24> Parameter ignored when E3-11 (Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency 2) and E3-12 (Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency Voltage 2) are set to 0.
<25> Default setting depends on the control mode for motor 2 set in parameter E3-01. The value shown here is for V/f Control.
<27> When Auto-Tuning is performed, E1-13 and E1-05 will be set to the same value.
<44> The default value shown here is for the following localized drives: Japan (Model code: CIMR-AAA), Asia (Model code: CIMR-ATA).
■ E4: Motor 2 Parameters

These parameters are hidden when a PM motor control mode has been selected for motor 1 (A1-02 = 5, 6, 7).

Default: <9>
Min: 10% of drive
E4-01 Motor 2 Rated Current Sets the full load current for motor 2. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. rated current
Max: 200% of drive
rated current <19>
Default: <9>
E4-02 Motor 2 Rated Slip Sets the rated slip for motor 2. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. Min: 0.00 Hz
Max: 20.00 Hz <19>
Default: <9>
Motor 2 Rated No-Load
E4-03 Sets the no-load current for motor 2. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. Min: 0 A
Current
Max: E4-01 <19>
Default: 4
E4-04 Motor 2 Motor Poles Sets the number of poles of motor 2. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. Min: 2
Max: 48
Default: <9>
Motor 2 Line-to-Line Sets the phase-to-phase resistance for motor 2. Automatically set during
E4-05 Min: 0.000 Ω
Resistance Auto-Tuning.
Max: 65.000 Ω
B Parameter List

Default: <9>
Sets the voltage drop for motor 2 due to motor leakage inductance as a
E4-06 Motor 2 Leakage Inductance Min: 0.0%
percentage of rated voltage. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning.
Max: 40.0%
Default: 0.50
Motor 2 Motor Iron-Core Set to the motor iron saturation coefficient at 50% of magnetic flux for motor 2.
E4-07 Min: 0.00
Saturation Coefficient 1 Automatically set during Auto-Tuning.
Max: 0.50
Default: 0.75
Motor 2 Motor Iron-Core Set to the motor iron saturation coefficient at 75% of magnetic flux for motor 2.
E4-08 Min: E4-07
Saturation Coefficient 2 This value is automatically set during Auto-Tuning.
Max: 0.75
Default: 0.0%
Sets the motor mechanical loss for motor 2 as a percentage of motor rated power
E4-09 Motor 2 Mechanical Loss Min: 0.0%
(kW).
Max: 10.0%
Default: <9>
E4-10 Motor 2 Iron Loss Sets the motor iron loss. Min: 0 W
Max: 65535 W
Default: <9>
E4-11 Motor 2 Rated Power Sets the motor rated capacity in kW. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. Min: 0.00 kW
Max: 650.00 kW
■ E5: PM Motor Settings

Enter the Yaskawa motor code for the PM motor being used. Various motor
parameters are automatically set based on the value of this parameter. Setting Default: <4> <23>
E5-01
Motor Code Selection that were changed manually will be overwritten by the defaults of the selected Min: 0000
<3>
motor code. Max: FFFF <28>
Note: Set to FFFF when using a non-Yaskawa PM motor.
Default: <14>
E5-02
Motor Rated Power Sets the rated capacity of the motor. Min: 0.10 kW
<3>
Max: 650.00 kW
Default: <14>
Min: 10% of drive
E5-03
Motor Rated Current Sets the motor rated current. rated current
<3>
Max: 200% of drive
rated current <19>
Default: <14>
E5-04
Number of Motor Poles Sets the number of motor poles. Min: 2
<3>
Max: 48
E5-05 Default: <14>
Motor Stator Resistance Set the resistance for each motor phase. Min: 0.000 Ω
<3> Max: 65.000 Ω
Default: <14>
E5-06
Motor d-Axis Inductance Sets the d-axis inductance for the PM motor. Min: 0.00 mH
<3>
Max: 300.00 mH
Default: <14>
E5-07
Motor q-Axis Inductance Sets the q-axis inductance for the PM motor. Min: 0.00 mH
<3>
Max: 600.00 mH
Set the induced phase peak voltage in units of 0.1 mV (rad/s) [electrical angle]. Default: <14>
E5-09 Motor Induction Voltage Set this parameter when using a Yaskawa SSR1 Series PM motor with derated Min: 0.0 mV/(rad/s)
<3> Constant 1 torque, or a Yaskawa SST4 Series motor with constant torque. Max:
When setting this parameter, E5-24 should be set to 0. 2000.0 mV/(rad/s)
Default: 0.0 deg
Sets the offset between the rotor magnetic axis and the Z pulse of an incremental
E5-11 Encoder Z-pulse Offset Min: -180 deg
encoder. Set during Z Pulse Offset Tuning.
Parameter List
Max: 180 deg
B
B Parameter List

Default: <14>
Set the induced phase-to-phase rms voltage in units of 0.1 mV/(r/min)
Min: 0.0 mV/(r/
E5-24 Motor Induction Voltage [mechanical angle]. Set this parameter when using a Yaskawa SMRA Series
min)
<3> Constant 2 SPM motor.
Max: 2000.0 mV/(r/
When setting this parameter, E5-24 should be set to 0.
min)
<23> If using a Yaskawa SMRA Series SPM Motor, the default setting is 1800 r/min.
<28> Selection may vary depending on the motor code entered to E5-01.
◆ F: Options
F parameters are used to program the drive for PG feedback from the motor and to function with option cards.
■ F1: PG Speed Control Card (PG-B3 / PG-X3)
Parameters F1-01, F1-05, F1-06, F1-12, F1-13, and F1-18 through F1-21 are used to set up a PG option card plugged into
option connector CN5-C of the drive. They include “PG 1” in the parameter name.
Parameters F1-21 through F1-37 are used to set up a PG option card plugged into option connector CN5-B of the drive.
They include “PG 2” in the parameter name.
Other parameters in the F1 group are used to set operation for PG options plugged into connector CN5-C and CN5-B.

Default: <10>
Sets the number of PG (pulse generator or encoder) pulses.
F1-01 PG 1 Pulses Per Revolution Min: 0 ppr
Sets the number of pulses per motor revolution.
Max: 60000 ppr
0: Ramp to stop. Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time in C1-02.
1: Coast to stop.
2: Fast Stop. Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time in C1-09. Default: 1
Operation Selection at PG
F1-02 3: Alarm only. Min: 0
Open Circuit (PGo)
4: No alarm display. Max: 4
Note: Due to potential damage to motor and machinery, the "Alarm only" and
"No alarm display" setting should be used only under special circumstances.
Default: 1
Operation Selection at 1: Coast to stop.
F1-03 Min: 0
Overspeed (oS) 2: Fast Stop. Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time in C1-09.
Max: 3
3: Alarm only.
Default: 3
F1-04 Min: 0
Deviation 2: Fast Stop. Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time in C1-09.
Max: 3
3: Alarm only.
Default: <10>
0: Pulse A leads
F1-05 PG 1 Rotation Selection Min: 0
1: Pulse B leads
Max: 1
Sets the division ratio for the pulse monitor used of the PG option card installed
Default: 1
PG 1 Division Rate for PG to connector CN5-C. By setting “xyz”, the division ratio becomes = [(1 + x) /
F1-06 Min: 1
Pulse Monitor yz]. If only using the A pulse for one track input, then the input ratio will be 1:1,
Max: 132
regardless of what F1-06 is set to.
Default: 115%
Sets the overspeed detection level as a percentage of the maximum output
F1-08 Overspeed Detection Level Min: 0%
frequency.
Max: 120%
Default: <10>
Overspeed Detection Delay
F1-09 Sets the time in seconds for an overspeed situation to trigger a fault (oS). Min: 0.0 s
Time
Max: 2.0 s
Default: 10%
Excessive Speed Deviation Sets the speed deviation detection level as a percentage of the maximum output
F1-10 Min: 0%
Detection Level frequency.
Max: 50%
B Parameter List

Default: 0.5 s
Excessive Speed Deviation
F1-11 Sets the time in seconds for a speed deviation situation to trigger a fault (dEv). Min: 0.0 s
Detection Delay Time
Max: 10.0 s
Default: 0
F1-12 PG 1 Gear Teeth 1 Min: 0
Sets the gear ratio between the motor shaft and the encoder (PG). Max: 1000
A gear ratio of 1 will be used if either of these parameters is set to 0. Default: 0
Max: 1000
Default: 2.0 s
PG Open-Circuit Detection
F1-14 Sets the time required to trigger a PG Open fault (PGo). Min: 0.0 s
Time
Max: 10.0 s
Default: 10
0: Disabled
F1-18 dv3 Detection Selection Min: 0
1: Enabled
Max: 10
0: Disabled Default: 128
F1-19 dv4 Detection Selection n: Number of pulses that the A and B pulse are reversed that triggers dv4 Min: 0
detection. Max: 5000
Default: 1
F1-20 PG Option Card Disconnect 0: Disabled
Min: 0
Detection 1 1: Enabled
Max: 1
Default: 0
0: A pulse detection
F1-21 PG 1 Signal Selection Min: 0
1: AB pulse detection
Max: 1
Sets the port for the PG option card used by motor 2. Default: 1
PG Card Option Port for
F1-30 0: CN5-C Min: 0
Motor 2 Selection
1: CN5-B Max: 1
Default: <45>
F1-31 PG 2 Pulses Per Revolution Sets the number of pulses for a PG option card connected to port CN5-B. Min: 0 ppr
Max: 60000 ppr
Default: 0
0: Pulse A leads
F1-32 PG 2 Rotation Selection Min: 0
1: Pulse B leads
Max: 1
Default: 0
Sets the gear ratio between the motor shaft and the encoder (PG). Max: 1000
A gear ratio of 1 will be used if either of these parameters is set to 0. Default: 0
Max: 1000
Sets the division ratio for the pulse monitor used of the PG option card 2 Default: 1
PG 2 Division Rate for Pulse
F1-35 installed to connector CN5-B. By setting “xyz”, the division ratio becomes = [(1 Min: 1
Monitor
+ x) / yz]. Max: 132
Default: 1
PG Option Card Disconnect 0: Disabled
F1-36 Min: 0
Detection 2 1: Enabled
Max: 1
Default: 0
0: A pulse detection
F1-37 PG 2 Signal Selection Min: 0
1: AB pulse detection
Max: 1
Setting 600 ppr: Japan (Model code: CIMR-AAA) and Asia (Model code: CIMR-ATA)
Setting 1024 ppr: China (Model code: CIMR-ABA)
■ F2: Analog Input Card (AI-A3)

0: Option card input terminals V1, V2, and V3 replace drive input terminals A1,
Default: 0
Analog Input Option Card A2, and A3.
Parameter List
F2-01 Min: 0
Operation Selection 1: Input signals to terminals V1, V2, and V3 are added together to create the
Max: 1
frequency reference.
B
B Parameter List

F2-02 Default: 100.0%
Analog Input Option Card
Sets the gain for the input signal to the analog card. Min: -999.9%
Gain
Max: 999.9%
F2-03 Default: 0.0%
Analog Input Option Card
Sets the bias for the input signal to the analog card. Min: -999.9%
Bias
Max: 999.9%
■ F3: Digital Input Card (DI-A3)

0: BCD, 1% units
1: BCD, 0.1% units
2: BCD, 0.01% units
3: BCD, 1 Hz units
Default: 0
Digital Input Option Card 4: BCD, 0.1 Hz units
F3-01 Min: 0
Input Selection 5: BCD, 0.01 Hz units
Max: 7
6: BCD customized setting (5 digit), 0.02 Hz units
7: Binary input
When the digital operator units are set to be displayed in Hertz or user-set units
(o1-03 = 2 or 3), the units for F3-01 are determined by parameter o1-03.
0: 8 bit Default: 2
Digital Input Option DI-A3
F3-03 1: 12 bit Min: 0
Data Length Selection
2: 16 bit Max: 2
■ F4: Analog Monitor Card (AO-A3)

Sets the monitor signal for output from terminal V1. Set this parameter to the Default: 102
Terminal V1 Monitor
F4-01 last three digits of the desired U- monitor. Some U parameters are Min: 000
Selection
available only in certain control modes. Max: 999
F4-02 Default: 100.0%
Terminal V1 Monitor Gain Sets the gain for voltage output via terminal V1. Min: -999.9%
Max: 999.9%
Sets the monitor signal for output from terminal V2. Set this parameter to the Default: 103
Terminal V2 Monitor
F4-03 last three digits of the desired U- monitor. Some U parameters are Min: 000
Selection
available only in certain control modes. Max: 999
F4-04 Default: 50.0%
Terminal V2 Monitor Gain Sets the gain for voltage output via terminal V2. Min: -999.9%
Max: 999.9%
F4-05 Default: 0.0%
Terminal V1 Monitor Bias Sets the amount of bias added to the voltage output via terminal V1. Min: -999.9%
Max: 999.9%
F4-06 Default: 0.0%
Terminal V2 Monitor Bias Sets the amount of bias added to the voltage output via terminal V2. Min: -999.9%
Max: 999.9%
Default: 0
F4-07 Terminal V1 Signal Level Min: 0
0: 0 to 10 V Max: 1
1: -10 to 10 V Default: 0
F4-08 Terminal V2 Signal Level Min: 0
Max: 1
B Parameter List
■ F5: Digital Output Card (DO-A3)

Default: 2
Terminal P1-PC Output
F5-01 Min: 0
Selection
Max: 192
Default: 4
F5-02 Min: 0
Selection
Max: 192
Default: 6
F5-03 Min: 0
Selection
Max: 192
Default: 37
F5-04 Min: 0
Selection
Sets the function for contact output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, and Max: 192
photocoupler output terminals P1 through P6. Default: F
F5-05 Min: 0
Selection
Max: 192
Default: F
F5-06 Min: 0
Selection
Max: 192
Default: 0
Terminal M1-M2 Output
F5-07 Min: 0
Selection
Max: 192
Default: 1
Terminal M3-M4 Output
F5-08 Min: 0
Selection
Max: 192
0: Output terminals are each assigned separate output functions. Default: 0
DO-A3 Output Mode
F5-09 1: Binary code output Min: 0
Selection
2: Use output terminal functions selected by parameters F5-01 through F5-08. Max: 2
■ F6: Communication Option Card

F6-01 through F6-03 and F6-06 through F6-08 are common settings used for CC-Link, CANopen, DeviceNet,
PROFIBUS-DP, and MECHATROLINK-II option cards. Other parameters in the F6 group are used for communication
protocol specific settings.
For more details on a specific option card, refer to the instruction manual for the option card.

Default: 1
Communications Error 1: Coast to stop.
F6-01 Min: 0
Operation Selection 2: Fast Stop. Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time in C1-09.
Max: 3
3: Alarm only.
Default: 0
External Fault from Comm. 0: Always detected
F6-02 Min: 0
Option Detection Selection 1: Detection during run only
Max: 1
Default: 1
External Fault from Comm. 1: Coast to stop.
F6-03 Min: 0
Option Operation Selection 2: Fast Stop. Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time in C1-09.
Max: 3
3: Alarm only.
Default: 2.0 s
F6-04 bUS Error Detection Time Set the delay time for error detection if a bus error occurs. Min: 0.0 s
Max: 5.0 s
Torque Reference/Torque Default: 0
0: Disabled.Torque reference/limit from option board disabled.
F6-06 Limit Selection from Comm. Min: 0
1: Enabled. Torque reference/limit from option board enabled.
Option Max: 1
Multi-Step Speed Enable/ Default: 0
0: Multi-step reference disabled (same as F7)
F6-07 Disable Selection when Min: 0
Parameter List
1: Multi-step reference enabled (same as V7)

NefRef/ComRef is Selected Max: 1
B
B Parameter List

0: Communication-related parameters (F6-) are not reset when the drive is
initialized using A1-03. Default: 0
F6-08 Reset Communication
1: Reset all communication-related parameters (F6-) when the drive is Min: 0
<3> Parameters
initialized using Max: 1
A1-03.
Default: 0
F6-10 CC-Link Node Address Sets the node address if a CC-Link option card is installed. Min: 0
Max: 64
0: 156 Kbps
1: 625 Kbps Default: 0
CC-Link Communication
F6-11 2: 2.5 Mbps Min: 0
Speed
3: 5 Mbps Max: 4
4: 10 Mbps
Default: 0
CC-Link bUS Error Auto 0: Disabled
F6-14 Min: 0
Reset 1: Enabled
Max: 1
Default: 21
MECHATROLINK Station Sets the station address when the MECHATROLINK-II option has been
F6-20 Min: 20
Address installed.
Max: 3FH
Default: 0
MECHATROLINK Frame 0: 32 byte
F6-21 Min: 0
Size 1: 17 byte
Max: 1
Default: 0
MECHATROLINK Link 0: 10 Mbps
F6-22 Min: 0
Speed 1: 4 Mbps
Max: 1
Default: 0
MECHATROLINK Monitor
F6-23 Sets the MECHATROLINK-II monitor (E). Min: 0
Selection (E)
Max: FFFFH
Default: 0
MECHATROLINK Monitor
F6-24 Sets the MECHATROLINK-II monitor (F). Min: 0
Selection (F)
Max: FFFFH
Default: 1
F6-25 Min: 0
Watchdog Timer Error (E5) 2: Fast Stop. Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time in C1-09.
Max: 3
3: Alarm only.
Default: 2
MECHATROLINK bUS
F6-26 Sets the number of option communication errors (bUS). Min: 2
Errors Detected
Max: 10
Default: 0
PROFIBUS-DP Node
F6-30 Sets the node address. Min: 0
Address
Max: 125
Default: 0
PROFIBUS-DP Clear Mode 0: Resets drive operation with a Clear mode command.
F6-31 Min: 0
Selection 1: Maintains the previous operation state when Clear mode command is given.
Max: 1
Default: 0
PROFIBUS-DP Data Format 0: PPO Type
F6-32 Min: 0
Selection 1: Conventional
Max: 1
Default: 0
F6-35 CANopen Node ID Selection Sets the node address. Min: 0
Max: 126
0: Auto-detection
1: 10 kbps
2: 20 kbps
3: 50 kbps Default: 6
CANopen Communication
F6-36 4: 125 kbps Min: 0
Speed
5: 250 kbps Max: 8
6: 500 kbps
7: 800 kbps
8: 1 Mbps
Default: 0
F6-50 DeviceNet MAC Address Selects the drives MAC address. Min: 0
Max: 64
B Parameter List

0: 125 kbps
1: 250 kbps Default: 0
DeviceNet Communication
F6-51 2: 500 kbps Min: 0
Speed
3: Adjustable from network Max: 4
4: Detect automatically
Default: 21
F6-52 DeviceNet PCA Setting Sets the format of the data set from the DeviceNet master to the drive. Min: 0
Max: 255
Default: 71
F6-53 DeviceNet PPA Setting Sets the format of the data set from the drive to the DeviceNet master. Min: 0
Max: 255
Default: 0
DeviceNet Idle Mode Fault 0: Enabled
F6-54 Min: 0
Detection 1: Disabled, no fault detection
Max: 1
Used to verify the baud rate running on the network.
Default: 0
DeviceNet Baud Rate 0: 125 kbps
F6-55 Min: 0
Monitor 1: 250 kbps
Max: 2
2: 500 kbps
Default: 0
F6-56 DeviceNet Speed Scaling Sets the scaling factor for the speed monitor in DeviceNet. Min: -15
Max: 15
Default: 0
F6-57 DeviceNet Current Scaling Sets the scaling factor for the output current monitor in DeviceNet. Min: -15
Max: 15
Default: 0
F6-58 DeviceNet Torque Scaling Sets the scaling factor for the torque monitor in DeviceNet. Min: -15
Max: 15
Default: 0
F6-59 DeviceNet Power Scaling Sets the scaling factor for the power monitor in DeviceNet. Min: -15
Max: 15
Default: 0
F6-60 DeviceNet Voltage Scaling Sets the scaling factor for the voltage monitor in DeviceNet. Min: -15
Max: 15
Default: 0
F6-61 DeviceNet Time Scaling Sets the scaling factor for the time monitor in DeviceNet. Min: -15
Max: 15
Default: 0
F6-62 DeviceNet Heartbeat Interval Sets the heartbeat interval for DeviceNet communications. Min: 0
Max: 10
Default: 0
F6-63 DeviceNet Network MAC ID Used to verify the MAC ID the drive has been assigned. Min: 0
Max: 63
F6-64 to
Reserved Reserved for Dynamic I/O Assembly Parameters. –
F6-71
<3> Parameter setting value is not reset to the default value when the drive is initialized. Parameter List
B
B Parameter List
◆ H: Multi-Function Terminals
H parameters assign functions to the multi-function input and output terminals.
■ H1: Multi-Function Digital Inputs

Multi-Function Digital Input Default: 40 (F) <31>
H1-01 Terminal S1 Function Min: 1
Selection Max: 9F
Multi-Function Digital Input Default: 41 (F) <31>
Selection Max: 9F
Multi-Function Digital Input Default: 24
Selection Max: 9F
H1-04 Terminal S4 Function Assigns a function to the multi-function digital inputs. Min: 0
Selection Refer to H1 Multi-Function Digital Input Selections on page 154 for a Max: 9F
Multi-Function Digital Input description of setting values. Default: 3(0) <31>
H1-05 Terminal S5 Function Note: Unused terminals should be set to F. Min: 0
Selection Max: 9F
Multi-Function Digital Input Default: 4(3) <31>
Selection Max: 9F
Multi-Function Digital Input Default: 6(4) <31>
Selection Max: 9F
Selection Max: 9F
<31> Value in parenthesis is the default setting when a 3-wire initialization is performed (A1-03 = 3330).
H1 Multi-Function Digital Input Selections

H1- Function Description
Setting
Closed: Reverse rotation (only if the drive is set up for 3-wire sequence)
0 3-wire Sequence
Terminals S1 and S2 are automatically set up for the Run command and Stop command.
Open: REMOTE (parameter settings determine the source of the frequency Reference 1 or 2
1 LOCAL/REMOTE Selection (b1-01, b1-02 or b1-15, b1-16)
Closed: LOCAL, digital operator is run and reference source
Open: Run command and frequency reference source 1 (determined by b1-01 and b1-02)
2 External Reference 1/2 Selection
Closed: Run command and frequency reference source 2 (determined by b1-15 and b1-16)
3 Multi-Step Speed Reference 1 When input terminals are set to Multi-Step Speed References 1 through 3, switching
4 Multi-Step Speed Reference 2 combinations of those terminals will create a multi-step speed sequence using the frequency
5 Multi-Step Speed Reference 3 references set in d1-01 through d1-08.
Closed: Jog frequency reference (d1-17) selected. Jog has priority over all other reference
6 Jog Reference Selection
sources.
Used to switch between accel/decel time 1 (set in C1-01, C1-02) and accel/decel time 2 (set in
7 Accel/Decel Time Selection 1
C1-03, C1-04).
8 Baseblock Command (N.O.) Closed: No drive output
9 Baseblock Command (N.C.) Open: No drive output
Open: Accel/decel is not held
A Accel/Decel Ramp Hold Closed: The drive pauses during acceleration or deceleration and maintains the output
frequency.
B Drive Overheat Alarm (oH2) Closed: Closes when an oH2 alarm occurs
Open: Function assigned by H3-14 is disabled.
C Analog Terminal Input Selection
Closed: Function assigned by H3-14 is enabled.
Open: Speed feedback for V/f Control with PG is enabled.
D PG Encoder Disable
Closed: Speed feedback disabled.
B Parameter List

Setting
Open: PI control
E ASR Integral Reset
Closed: Integral reset
Select this setting when using the terminal in a pass-through mode. The terminal does not
F Through Mode trigger a drive function but can be used as digital input for the controller the drive is connected
to.
10 Up Command The drive accelerates when the Up command terminal closes, and decelerates when the Down
command closes. When both terminals are closed or both are open, the drive holds the
frequency reference. The Up and Down commands must always be used in conjunction with
11 Down Command one another.
12 Forward Jog Closed: Runs forward at the Jog frequency d1-17.

13 Reverse Jog Closed: Runs reverse at the Jog frequency d1-17.
14 Fault Reset Closed: Resets faults if the cause is cleared and the Run command is removed.
15 Fast Stop (N.O.) Closed: Decelerates at the Fast Stop time set to C1-09.
Open: Motor 1 (E1-, E2-)
16 Motor 2 Selection
Closed: Motor 2 (E3-, E4-)
17 Fast Stop (N.C.) Open: Decelerates to stop at the Fast Stop time set to C1-09.
Triggers the timer set up by parameters b4-01 and b4-02. Must be set in conjunction with the
18 Timer Function Input
timer function output (H2- = 12).
Open: PID control enabled
19 PID Disable
Closed: PID control disabled
Used in conjunction with an input terminal set for “Accel/decel time selection 1” (H1- = 7),
1A Accel/Decel Time Selection 2
and allows the drive to switch between accel/decel times 3 and 4.
Open: Parameters cannot be edited (except for U1-01 if the reference source is assigned to the
1B Program Lockout digital operator).
Closed: Parameters can be edited and saved.
1E Reference Sample Hold Closed: Samples the analog frequency reference and operates the drive at that speed.
20: N.O., Always detected, ramp to stop
21: N.C., Always detected, ramp to stop
22: N.O., During run, ramp to stop
23: N.C., During run, ramp to stop
24: N.O., Always detected, coast to stop
25: N.C., Always detected, coast to stop
26: N.O., During run, coast to stop
27: N.C., During run, coast to stop
20 to 2F External Fault
28: N.O., Always detected, Fast Stop
29: N.C., Always detected, Fast Stop
2A: N.O., During run, Fast Stop
2B: N.C., During run, Fast Stop
2C: N.O., Always detected, alarm only (continue running)
2D: N.C., Always detected, alarm only (continue running)
2E: N.O., During run, alarm only (continue running)
2F: N.C., During run, alarm only (continue running)
30 PID Integral Reset Closed: Resets the PID control integral value.
Open: Performs integral operation.
31 PID Integral Hold
Closed: Maintains the current PID control integral value.
Used in combination with input terminals set to Multi-Step Speed Reference 1, 2, and 3. Use
32 Multi-Step Speed Reference 4
parameters d1-09 to d1-16 to set reference values.
Open: PID soft starter is enabled.
34 PID Soft Starter Cancel
Closed: Disables the PID soft starter b5-17.
35 PID Input Level Selection Closed: Inverts the PID input signal
Open: Stop
Forward Run Command (2-wire
40 Closed: Forward run
Sequence)
Parameter List
Note: Cannot be set together with settings 42 or 43.

Open: Stop
Reverse Run Command (2-wire
41 Closed: Reverse run
Sequence)
B
B Parameter List

Setting
Open: Stop
Run Command (2-wire Sequence
42 Closed: Run
2)
Open: Forward
FWD/REV Command (2-wire Closed: Reverse
43
Sequence 2) Note: Determines motor direction, but does not issue a Run command. Cannot be set together
with settings 40 or 41.
44 Offset Frequency 1 Closed: Adds d7-01 to the frequency reference.
47 Node Setup Closed: Node setup for SI-S3 enabled.
60 DC Injection Braking Command Closed: Triggers DC Injection Braking.
Closed: Activates Current Detection Speed Search from the maximum output frequency (E1-
61 External Speed Search Command 1
04).
62 External Speed Search Command 2 Closed: Activates Current Detection Speed Search from the frequency reference.
63 Field Weakening Closed: The drive performs Field Weakening control as set for d6-01 and d6-02.
65 KEB Ride-Thru 1 (N.C.) Open: KEB Ride-Thru 1 enabled
66 KEB Ride-Thru 1 (N.O.) Closed: KEB Ride-Thru 1 enabled
Tests the MEMOBUS/Modbus RS-485/422 interface. Displays “PASS” if the test completes
67 Communications Test Mode
successfully.
68 High Slip Braking Closed: Activates High Slip Braking to stop the drive.
Open: Drive disabled. If this input is opened during run, then the drive will stop as specified by
6A Drive Enable b1-03.
Closed: Ready for operation.
Open: Speed Control
71 Speed/Torque Control Switch
Closed: Torque Control
72 Zero Servo Closed: Zero Servo enabled
75 Up 2 Command Used to control the bias added to the frequency reference by the Up/Down 2 function. The Up 2
76 Down 2 Command and Down 2 commands must always be used in conjunction with one another.
Open: ASR proportional gain 1 (C5-01)

77 ASR Gain Switch
Closed: ASR proportional gain 2 (C5-03)
External Torque Reference Polarity Open: Forward torque reference
78
Inversion Closed: Reverse polarity
Open: KEB Ride-Thru 2 enabled. Drive disregards L2-29 and performs Single Drive KEB
7A KEB Ride-Thru 2 (N.C.)
Ride-Thru 2.
Closed: KEB Ride-Thru 2 enabled. Drive disregards L2-29 and performs Single Drive KEB
7B KEB Ride-Thru 2 (N.O.)
Ride-Thru 2.
7C Short Circuit Braking (N.O.) Closed: Short Circuit Braking enabled
7D Short Circuit Braking (N.C.) Open: Short Circuit Braking enabled
Forward/Reverse Detection (V/f
7E Direction of rotation detection (for V/f with Simple PG Feedback)
Control with Simple PG feedback)
90 to 97 DriveWorksEZ Digital Inputs 1 to 8 Reserved for DWEZ input functions
Open: DWEZ enabled
9F DriveWorksEZ Disable
Closed: DWEZ disabled
B Parameter List
■ H2: Multi-Function Digital Outputs

Default: 0
Terminal M1-M2 function
H2-01 Min: 0
selection (relay)
Max: 192
Default: 1
Terminal P1-PC function Refer to H2 Multi-Function Digital Output Settings on page 157 for a
H2-02 Min: 0
selection (photocoupler) description of setting values.
Max: 192
Default: 2
Terminal P2-PC function
H2-03 Min: 0
selection (photocoupler)
Max: 192
Outputs a 200 ms pulse signal when the watt-hour counter increases by the units
selected.
0: 0.1 kWh units Default: 0
Watt Hour Output Unit
H2-06 1: 1 kWh units Min: 0
Selection
2: 10 kWh units Max: 4
3: 100 kWh units
4: 1000 kWh units
H2 Multi-Function Digital Output Settings

Setting
0 During Run Closed: A Run command is active or voltage is output.
Open: Output frequency is above the minimum output frequency set in E1-09.
1 Zero Speed
Closed: Output frequency is below the minimum output frequency set in E1-09.
2 Speed Agree 1 Closed: Output frequency equals the speed reference (plus or minus the hysteresis set to L4-02).
Closed: Output frequency and speed reference equal L4-01 (plus or minus the hysteresis set to L4-
3 User-set Speed Agree 1
02).
Closed: Output frequency is less than or equal to the value in L4-01 with hysteresis determined by
4 Frequency Detection 1
L4-02.
Closed: Output frequency is greater than or equal to the value in L4-01 with hysteresis determined
5 Frequency Detection 2
by L4-02.
6 Drive Ready Closed: Power up is complete and the drive is ready to accept a Run command.
7 DC bus Undervoltage Closed: DC bus voltage is below the Uv trip level set in L2-05.
8 During Baseblock (N.O.) Closed: Drive has entered the baseblock state (no output voltage).
Open: External Reference 1 or 2 supplies the frequency reference (set in b1-01 or b1-15).
9 Frequency Reference Source
Closed: Digital operator supplies the frequency reference.
Open: External Reference 1 or 2 supplies the Run command (set in b1-02 or b1-16).
A Run Command Source
Closed: Digital operator supplies the Run command.
B Torque Detection 1 (N.O.) Closed: An overtorque or undertorque situation has been detected.
C Frequency Reference Loss Closed: Analog frequency reference has been lost.
D Braking Resistor Fault Closed: Braking resistor or transistor is overheated or faulted out.
E Fault Closed: Fault occurred.
F Through Mode Set this value when using the terminal in the pass-through mode.
10 Minor Fault Closed: An alarm has been triggered, or the IGBTs have reached 90% of their expected life span.
Closed: A command has been entered to clear a fault via the input terminals or from the serial
11 Fault Reset Command Active
network.
12 Timer Output Closed: Timer output.
13 Speed Agree 2 Closed: When drive output frequency equals the frequency reference ±L4-04.
14 User-set Speed Agree 2 Closed: When the drive output frequency is equal to the value in L4-03 ±L4-04.
15 Frequency Detection 3 Closed: When the drive output frequency is less than or equal to the value in L4-03 ±L4-04.
16 Frequency Detection 4 Closed: When the output frequency is greater than or equal to the value in L4-03 ±L4-04.
17 Torque Detection 1 (N.C.) Open: Overtorque or undertorque has been detected.
Parameter List
18 Torque Detection 2 (N.O.) Closed: Overtorque or undertorque has been detected.

19 Torque Detection 2 (N.C.) Open: Overtorque or undertorque has been detected.
1A During Reverse Closed: Drive is running in the reverse direction.
1B During Baseblock (N.C.) Open: Drive has entered the baseblock state (no output voltage).
B
B Parameter List
H2 Multi-Function Digital Output Settings

Setting
1C Motor 2 Selection Closed: Motor 2 is selected by a digital input (H1- = 16)
1D During Regeneration Closed: Motor is regenerating energy into the drive.
1E Restart Enabled Closed: An automatic restart is performed
1F Motor Overload Alarm (oL1) Closed: oL1 is at 90% of its trip point or greater. An oH3 situation also triggers this alarm.
20 Drive Overheat Pre-alarm (oH) Closed: Heatsink temperature exceeds the parameter L8-02 value.
Mechanical Weakening
22 Closed: Mechanical weakening detected.
Detection
Closed: Cooling fan, electrolytic capacitors, IGBTs, or the soft charge bypass relay may require
2F Maintenance Period
maintenance.
30 During Torque Limit Closed: When the torque limit has been reached.
31 During Speed Limit Closed: Speed limit has been reached.
During Speed Limit in Torque
32 Closed: Speed limit has been reached while using Torque Control.
Control
33 Zero Servo Complete Closed: Zero Servo operation has finished.
Open: Either the drive has stopped or baseblock, DC Injection Braking, or Initial Excitation is being
performed.
37 During Frequency Output
Closed: Drive is running the motor (not in a baseblock state and DC Injection is not being
performed).
38 Drive Enabled Closed: Multi-function input set for “Drive enable” is closed (H1- = 6A)
39 Watt Hour Pulse Output Output units are determined by H2-06. Outputs a pulse every 200 ms to indicate the kWh count.
Open: REMOTE
3C LOCAL/REMOTE Status
Closed: LOCAL
3D During Speed Search Closed: Speed Search is being executed.
3E PID Feedback Low Closed: PID feedback level is too low.
3F PID Feedback High Closed: The PID feedback level is too high.
4A During KEB Ride-Thru Closed: KEB Ride-Thru is being performed.
4B During Short-Circuit Braking Closed: Short Circuit Braking is active.
4C During Fast Stop Closed: A Fast Stop command has been entered from the operator or input terminals.
4D oH Pre-alarm Time Limit Closed: oH pre-alarm time limit has passed.
4E Braking Transistor Fault (rr) Closed: The built-in dynamic braking transistor failed.
4F Closed: The dynamic braking resistor has overheated.
(oH)
60 Internal Cooling Fan Alarm Closed: Internal cooling fan alarm
Rotor Position Detection
61 Closed: Drive has successfully detected the rotor position of the PM motor.
Complete
DriveWorksEZ Digital Outputs
90 to 92 Reserved for DWEZ digital output functions.
1 to 3
Function 0 to 92 with Inverse Inverts the output switching of the multi-function output functions.
100 to 192
Output Set the last two digits of 1 to reverse the output signal of that specific function.
■ H3: Multi-Function Analog Inputs

Default: 0
Terminal A1 Signal Level 0: 0 to 10 V
H3-01 Min: 0
Selection 1: –10 to 10 V
Max: 1
Default: 0
Terminal A1 Function
H3-02 Sets the function of terminal A1. Min: 0
Selection
Max: 31
H3-03 Default: 100.0%
Sets the level of the input value selected in H3-02 when 10 V is input at terminal
Terminal A1 Gain Setting Min: -999.9%
A1.
Max: 999.9%
H3-04 Default: 0.0%
Terminal A1 Bias Setting Min: -999.9%
A1.
Max: 999.9%
B Parameter List

Default: 0
Terminal A3 Signal Level 0: 0 to 10 V
H3-05 Min: 0
Selection 1: –10 to 10 V
Max: 1
Default: 2
Selection
Max: 31
H3-07 Default: 100.0%
A3.
Max: 999.9%
H3-08 Default: 0.0%
A3.
Max: 999.9%
0: 0 to 10 V
1: –10 to 10 V
Default: 2
H3-09 Terminal A2 Signal Level 2: 4 to 20 mA
Min: 0
Selection 3: 0 to 20 mA
Max: 3
Note: Use DIP switch S1 to set input terminal A2 for a current or a voltage input
signal.
Default: 0
Selection
Max: 31
H3-11 Default: 100.0%
Sets the level of the input value selected in H3-10 when 10 V (20 mA) is input at
terminal A2.
Max: 999.9%
H3-12 Default: 0.0%
Sets the level of the input value selected in H3-10 when 0 V (0 or 4 mA) is input
at terminal A2.
Max: 999.9%
Default: 0.03 s
H3-13 Analog Input Filter Time Sets a primary delay filter time constant for terminals A1, A2, and A3. Used for
Min: 0.00 s
Constant noise filtering.
Max: 2.00 s
Determines which of the analog input terminals will be enabled when a digital
input programmed for “Analog input enable” (H1- = C) is activated.
1: Terminal A1 only
2: Terminal A2 only Default: 7
Analog Input Terminal
H3-14 3: Terminals A1 and A2 only Min: 1
Enable Selection
4: Terminal A3 only Max: 7
5: Terminals A1 and A3
6: Terminals A2 and A3
7: All terminals enabled
H3 Multi-Function Analog Input Settings

Setting
0 Frequency Bias 10 V = E1-04 (maximum output frequency)
0 to 10 V signal allows a setting of 0 to 100%. -10 to 0 V signal allows a setting of -100 to
1 Frequency Gain
0%.
Auxiliary Frequency Reference 1 (used
2 10 V = E1-04 (maximum output frequency)
as a Multi-Step Speed 2)
Auxiliary Frequency Reference 2 (3rd
3 10 V = E1-04 (maximum output frequency)
step analog)
4 Output Voltage Bias 10 V = E1-05 (motor rated voltage)
5 Accel/Decel Time Gain 10 V = 100%
6 DC Injection Braking Current 10 V = Drive rated current
Overtorque/Undertorque Detection 10 V = Drive rated current (V/f, V/fw/PG)
7
Level 10 V = Motor rated torque (OLV, CLV, OLV/PM, AOLV/PM, CLV/PM)
8 Stall Prevention Level During Run 10 V = Drive rated current
Parameter List
9 Output Frequency Lower Limit Level 10 V = E1-04 (maximum output frequency)

B PID Feedback 10 V = 100%
C PID Setpoint 10 V = 100%
D Frequency Bias 10 V = E1-04 (maximum output frequency)
B
B Parameter List
H3 Multi-Function Analog Input Settings

Setting
E Motor Temperature (PTC input) 10 V = 100%
F Through Mode Set this value when using the terminal in the pass-through mode.
10 Forward Torque Limit 10 V = Motor rated torque
11 Reverse Torque Limit 10 V = Motor rated torque
12 Regenerative Torque Limit 10 V = Motor rated torque
13 Torque Reference/Torque Limit 10 V = Motor rated torque
14 Torque Compensation 10 V = Motor rated torque
15 General Torque Limit 10 V = Motor rated torque
16 Differential PID Feedback 10 V = 100%
1F Through Mode Set this value when using the terminal in the pass-through mode.
30 to 32 DriveWorksEZ Analog Input 1 to 3 Output is determined by the function selected using DWEZ.
■ H4: Multi-Function Analog Outputs

Multi-Function Analog Selects the data to be output through multi-function analog output terminal FM. Default: 102
H4-01 Output Terminal FM Monitor Set the desired monitor parameter to the digits available in U-. For Min: 000
Selection example, enter “103” for U1-03. Max: 999
H4-02 Default: 100.0%
Multi-Function Analog Sets the signal level at terminal FM that is equal to 100% of the selected monitor
Min: -999.9%
Output Terminal FM Gain value.
Max: 999.9%
H4-03 Default: 0.0%
Multi-Function Analog
Sets the bias value added to the terminal FM output signal. Min: -999.9%
Output Terminal FM Bias
Max: 999.9%
Multi-Function Analog Selects the data to be output through multi-function analog output terminal AM. Default: 103
H4-04 Output Terminal AM Set the desired monitor parameter to the digits available in U-. For Min: 000
Monitor Selection example, enter “103” for U1-03. Max: 999
H4-05 Default: 50.0%
Multi-Function Analog Sets the signal level at terminal AM that is equal to 100% of the selected
Min: -999.9%
Output Terminal AM Gain monitor value.
Max: 999.9%
H4-06 Default: 0.0%
Multi-Function Analog
Sets the bias value added to the terminal AM output signal. Min: -999.9%
Output Terminal AM Bias
Max: 999.9%
Multi-Function Analog Default: 0
0: 0 to 10 V
H4-07 Output Terminal FM Signal Min: 0
1: –10 to 10 V
Level Selection Max: 1
Multi-Function Analog Default: 0
H4-08 0: 0 to 10 V
Output Terminal AM Signal Min: 0
1: –10 to 10 V
Level Selection Max: 1
■ H5: MEMOBUS/Modbus Serial Communication

Default: 1F
H5-01 Selects drive station node number (address) for MEMOBUS/Modbus terminals
Drive Node Address Min: 0
<32> R+, R-, S+, S-. Cycle power for the setting to take effect.
Max: FFH
0: 1200 bps
1: 2400 bps
2: 4800 bps
3: 9600 bps
Default: 3
Communication Speed 4: 19200 bps
H5-02 Min: 0
Selection 5: 38400 bps
Max: 8
6: 57600 bps
7: 76800 bps
8: 115200 bps
Cycle power for the setting to take effect.
B Parameter List

0: No parity
Default: 0
Communication Parity 1: Even parity
H5-03 Min: 0
Selection 2: Odd parity
Max: 2
Cycle power for the setting to take effect.
0: Ramp to stop
Default: 0
Stopping Method After 1: Coast to stop
H5-04 Min: 0
Communication Error (CE) 2: Fast Stop
Max: 3
3: Alarm only
Communication Fault
H5-05 1: Enabled. If communication is lost for more than two seconds, a CE fault will Min: 0
Detection Selection
occur. Max: 1
Default: 5 ms
H5-06 Drive Transmit Wait Time Set the wait time between receiving and sending data. Min: 5 ms
Max: 65 ms
Default: 1
0: Disabled. RTS is always on.
H5-07 RTS Control Selection Min: 0
1: Enabled. RTS turns on only when sending.
Max: 1
Default: 2.0 s
Sets the time required to detect a communications error. Adjustment may be
H5-09 CE Detection Time Min: 0.0 s
needed when networking several drives.
Max: 10.0 s
Unit Selection for Default: 0
0: 0.1 V units
H5-10 MEMOBUS/Modbus Min: 0
1: 1 V units
Register 0025H Max: 1
0: Drive requires an Enter command before accepting any changes to parameter
Default: 1
Communications ENTER settings.
H5-11 Min: 0
Function Selection 1: Parameter changes are activated immediately without the Enter command
Max: 1
(same as V7).
Default: 0
Run Command Method 0: FWD/Stop, REV/Stop
H5-12 Min: 0
Selection 1: Run/Stop, FWD/REV
Max: 1
<32> If this parameter is set to 0, the drive will be unable to respond to MEMOBUS/Modbus commands.
■ H6: Pulse Train Input/Output

0: Frequency reference
1: PID feedback value Default: 0
Pulse Train Input Terminal
H6-01 2: PID setpoint value Min: 0
RP Function Selection
3: V/f Control with Simple PG feedback (possible only when using motor 1 in Max: 3
V/f Control)
H6-02 Default: 1440 Hz
Sets the terminal RP input signal frequency that is equal to 100% of the value
Pulse Train Input Scaling Min: 1000 Hz
selected in H6-01.
Max: 32000 Hz
H6-03 Default: 100.0%
Sets the level of the value selected in H6-01 when a frequency with the value set
Pulse Train Input Gain Min: 0.0%
in H6-02 is input.
Max: 1000.0%
H6-04 Default: 0.0%
Pulse Train Input Bias Sets the level of the value selected in H6-01 when 0 Hz is input. Min: -100.0%
Max: 100.0%
H6-05 Default: 0.10 s
Pulse Train Input Filter Time Sets the pulse train input filter time constant. Min: 0.00 s
Max: 2.00 s
H6-06 Select the pulse train monitor output function (value of the - part of Default: 102
Pulse Train Monitor
U-). Min: 000
Selection
Example: To select U5-01, set “501”. Max: 809
H6-07 Sets the terminal MP output signal frequency when the monitor value is 100%. Default: 1440 Hz
Pulse Train Monitor Scaling To have the pulse train monitor output equal the output frequency, set H6-06 to 2 Min: 0 Hz
Parameter List
and H6-07 to 0. Max: 32000 Hz

Default: 0.5 Hz
Pulse Train Input Minimum Sets the minimum frequency for the pulse train input to be detected. Enabled
H6-08 Min: 0.1 Hz
Frequency when H6-01 = 0, 1, or 2.
Max: 1000.0 Hz
B
B Parameter List
◆ L: Protection Function
L parameters provide protection to the drive and motor, such as: control during momentary power loss, Stall Prevention,
frequency detection, fault restarts, overtorque detection, torque limits, and other types of hardware protection.
■ L1: Motor Protection

0: Disabled
1: General purpose motor (standard fan cooled)
2: Drive dedicated motor with a speed range of 1:10
3: Vector motor with a speed range of 1:100
Default: <10>
Motor Overload Protection 4: PM motor with variable torque
L1-01 Min: 0
Selection 5: PM motor with constant torque control
Max: 6
6: General purpose motor (50 Hz)
The drive may not be able to provide protection when multiple motors are used,
even if overload is enabled in L1-01. Set L1-01 to 0 and install separate thermal
relay to each motor.
Default: 1.0 min
Motor Overload Protection
L1-02 Sets the motor thermal overload protection (oL1) time. Min: 0.1 min
Time
Max: 5.0 min
Sets operation when the motor temperature analog input (H3-02, H3-06, or H3-
10 = E) exceeds the oH3 alarm level.
Motor Overheat Alarm Default: 3
0: Ramp to stop
L1-03 Operation Selection (PTC Min: 0
1: Coast to stop
input) Max: 3
2: Fast Stop (decelerate to stop using the deceleration time in C1-09)
3: Alarm only (“oH3” will flash)
Sets stopping method when the motor temperature analog input (H3-02, H3-06,
Motor Overheat Fault or H3-10 = E) exceeds the oH4 fault level. Default: 1
L1-04 Operation Selection (PTC 0: Ramp to stop Min: 0
input) 1: Coast to stop Max: 2
2: Fast Stop (decelerate to stop using the deceleration time in C1-09)
Default: 0.20 s
Motor Temperature Input Adjusts the filter for the motor temperature analog input (H3-02, H3-06, or H3-
L1-05 Min: 0.00 s
Filter Time (PTC input) 10 = E).
Max: 10.00 s
Default: 1
Continuous Electrothermal 0: Disabled
L1-13 Min: 0
Operation Selection 1: Enabled
Max: 1
■ L2: Momentary Power Loss Ride-Thru

0: Disabled. Drive trips on (Uv1) fault when power is lost.
1: Recover within the time set in L2-02. Uv1 will be detected if power loss is
longer than L2-02. Default: 0
Momentary Power Loss
L2-01 2: Recover as long as CPU has power. Uv1 is not detected. Min: 0
Operation Selection
3: KEB deceleration for the time set to L2-02. Max: 5
4: KEB deceleration as long as CPU has power.
5: KEB deceleration to stop.
Default: <9>
Momentary Power Loss
L2-02 Sets the Power Loss Ride-Thru time. Enabled only when L2-01 = 1 or 3. Min: 0.0 s
Ride-Thru Time
Max: 25.5 s
Sets the minimum wait time for residual motor voltage decay before the drive
Default: <9>
Momentary Power Loss output reenergizes after performing Power Loss Ride-Thru.
L2-03 Min: 0.1 s
Minimum Baseblock Time Increasing the time set to L2-03 may help if overcurrent or overvoltage occur
Max: 5.0 s
during Speed Search or during DC Injection Braking.
Momentary Power Loss Default: <9>
Sets the time for the output voltage to return to the preset V/f pattern during
L2-04 Voltage Recovery Ramp Min: 0.0 s
Speed Search.
Time Max: 5.0 s
Default: <18> <33>
Undervoltage Detection
L2-05 Sets the DC bus undervoltage trip level. Min: 150 Vdc
Level (Uv)
Max: 210 Vdc <18>
B Parameter List

Default: 0.00 s
Sets the time required to decelerate from the speed when KEB was activated to
L2-06 KEB Deceleration Time Min: 0.00 s
zero speed.
Max: 6000.0 s <12>
Default: 0.00 s
Sets the time to accelerate to the frequency reference when momentary power
L2-07 KEB Acceleration Time Min: 0.00 s
loss is over. If set to 0.0, the active acceleration time is used.
Max: 6000.0 s <12>
Sets the percentage of output frequency reduction at the beginning of Default: 100%
L2-08 Frequency Gain at KEB Start deceleration when the KEB Ride-Thru function is started. Min: 0%
Reduction = (slip frequency before KEB) × L2-08 × 2 Max: 300%
Default: 50 ms
KEB Detection Time
L2-10 Sets the time to perform KEB Ride-Thru. Min: 0 ms
(Minimum KEB Time)
Max: 2000 ms
Default: <18> <33>
DC Bus Voltage Setpoint [E1-01] × 1.22
L2-11 Sets the desired value of the DC bus voltage during KEB Ride-Thru.
during KEB Min: 150 Vdc
Max: 400 Vdc <18>
0: Single Drive KEB Ride-Thru 1
Default: 0
1: Single Drive KEB Ride-Thru 2
L2-29 KEB Method Selection Min: 0
2: System KEB Ride-Thru 1
Max: 3
3: System KEB Ride-Thru 2
<9> Default setting is determined by the drive model (o2-04) and duty selection (C6-01).
<12> Setting range value is dependent on the units selected for the accel/decel time (C1-10). When C1-10 = 0 (units of 0.01 s), the setting range
becomes 0.00 to 600.00 s.
<33> Default setting value is dependent on the setting for the input voltage (E1-01).
■ L3: Stall Prevention

0: Disabled.
1: General purpose. Acceleration is paused as long as the current is above the
Default: 1
Stall Prevention Selection L3-02 setting.
L3-01 Min: 0
during Acceleration 2: Intelligent. Accelerate in the shortest possible time without exceeding the L3-
Max: 2
02 level.
Note: Setting 2 is not available when using OLV/PM.
Default: <35>
Stall Prevention Level during
L3-02 Used when L3-01 = 1 or 2. 100% is equal to the drive rated current. Min: 0%
Acceleration
Max: 150% <35>
Default: 50%
Stall Prevention Limit during Sets Stall Prevention lower limit during acceleration when operating in the
L3-03 Min: 0%
Acceleration constant power range. Set as a percentage of the drive’s rated current.
Max: 100%
0: Disabled. Deceleration at the active deceleration rate. An ov fault may occur.
1: General purpose. Deceleration is paused when the DC bus voltage exceeds
the Stall Prevention level.
2: Intelligent. Decelerate as fast as possible while avoiding ov faults. Default: 1
Stall Prevention Selection
L3-04 3: Stall Prevention with braking resistor. Stall Prevention during deceleration is Min: 0
during Deceleration
enabled in coordination with dynamic braking. Max: 5 <34>
4: Overexcitation Deceleration. Decelerates while increasing the motor flux.
5: Overexcitation Deceleration 2. Adjust the deceleration rate according to the
DC bus voltage.
0: Disabled. Drive runs at a set frequency. A heavy load may cause speed loss.
1: Decel time 1. Uses the deceleration time set to C1-02 while Stall Prevention is Default: 1
Stall Prevention Selection
L3-05 performed. Min: 0
during Run
2: Decel time 2. Uses the deceleration time set to C1-04 while Stall Prevention is Max: 2
performed.
Default: <35>
Stall Prevention Level during
L3-06 Enabled when L3-05 is set to 1 or 2. 100% is equal to the drive rated current. Min: 30%
Run
Max: 150% <35>
Parameter List
Enables or disables the ov suppression function, which allows the drive to

Default: 0
Overvoltage Suppression change the output frequency as the load changes to prevent an ov fault.
L3-11 Min: 0
Function Selection 0: Disabled
Max: 1
1: Enabled
B
B Parameter List

Default: 370
Target DC Bus Voltage for
L3-17 Sets the desired value for the DC bus voltage during overvoltage suppression Vdc <33>
Overvoltage Suppression and
<18> and Stall Prevention during deceleration. Min: 150 Vdc
Stall Prevention
Max: 400 Vdc <33>
Default: <10>
DC Bus Voltage Adjustment Sets the proportional gain for KEB Ride-Thru, Stall Prevention, and overvoltage
L3-20 Min: 0.00
Gain suppression.
Max: 5.00
Sets the proportional gain used to calculate the deceleration rate during KEB Default: 1.00
Accel/Decel Rate Calculation
L3-21 Ride-Thru, ov suppression function, and Stall Prevention during deceleration Min: 0.10
Gain
(L3-04 = 2). Max: 10.00
Deceleration Time at Stall Default: 0.0 s
Sets the deceleration time used for Stall Prevention during acceleration in OLV/
L3-22 Prevention during Min: 0.0 s
PM.
Acceleration Max: 6000 s
0: Sets the Stall Prevention level set in L3-06 that is used throughout the entire
Automatic Reduction Default: 0
frequency range.
L3-23 Selection for Stall Prevention Min: 0
1: Automatic Stall Prevention level reduction in the constant output range. The
during Run Max: 1
lower limit value is 40% of L3-06.
Default: <8> <9> <14>
Motor Acceleration Time for Sets the time needed to accelerate the uncoupled motor at rated torque from stop
L3-24 Min: 0.001 s
Inertia Calculations to the maximum frequency.
Max: 10.000 s
Default: 1.0
L3-25 Load Inertia Ratio Sets the ratio between the motor and machine inertia. Min: 1.0
Max: 1000.0
Default: 0 μF
When DC bus capacitors have been added externally, be sure to add those values
L3-26 Additional DC Bus Capacitors Min: 0 μF
to the internal capacitor table for proper DC bus calculations.
Max: 65000 μF
Default: 50 ms
Stall Prevention Detection Sets the time the current must exceed the Stall Prevention level to activate Stall
L3-27 Min: 0 ms
Time Prevention.
Max: 5000 ms
<8> Parameter value is changed if E2-11 is manually changed or changed by Auto-Tuning.
<14> Default setting value is dependent on the motor code set to parameter E5-01.
<33> Default setting value is dependent on the setting for the input voltage (E1-01).
<34> Setting range is dependent on the control mode (A1-02). When using CLV, OLV/PM, or AOLV/PM, the setting range is 0 to 2 s.
<35> The upper limit of the setting range is determined by the values set to the duty selection (C6-01) and the carrier frequency reduction selection
(L8-38).
■ L4: Speed Detection

Default: 0.0 Hz
Speed Agreement Detection
L4-01 Min: 0.0 Hz
Level L4-01 sets the frequency detection level for digital output functions H2- =
Max: 400.0 Hz
2, 3, 4, 5.
L4-02 sets the hysteresis or allowable margin for speed detection. Default: <10>
L4-02 Min: 0.0 Hz
Width
Max: 20.0 Hz
Default: 0.0 Hz
L4-03 Min: -400.0 Hz
Level (+/-) L4-03 sets the frequency detection level for digital output functions H2- = Max: 400.0 Hz
13, 14, 15, 16.
L4-04 sets the hysteresis or allowable margin for speed detection. Default: <10>
L4-04 Min: 0.0 Hz
Width (+/-)
Max: 20.0 Hz
Default: 0
Frequency Reference Loss 0: Stop. Drive stops when the frequency reference is lost.
L4-05 Min: 0
Detection Selection 1: Run. Drive runs at a reduced speed when the frequency reference is lost.
Max: 1
Default: 80%
Frequency Reference at Sets the percentage of the frequency reference that the drive should run with
L4-06 Min: 0.0%
Reference Loss when the frequency reference is lost.
Max: 100.0%
B Parameter List

Default: 0
Speed Agreement Detection 0: No detection during baseblock.
L4-07 Min: 0
Selection 1: Detection always enabled.
Max: 1
■ L5: Fault Restart

Default: 0
Number of Auto Restart Sets the number of times the drive may attempt to restart after the following
L5-01 Min: 0
Attempts faults occur: GF, LF, oC, ov, PF, rH, rr, oL1, oL2, oL3, oL4, STo, Uv1.
Max: 10
Default: 0
Auto Restart Fault Output 0: Fault output not active.
L5-02 Min: 0
Operation Selection 1: Fault output active during restart attempt.
Max: 1
Default: 10.0 s
L5-04 Fault Reset Interval Time Sets the amount of time to wait between performing fault restarts. Min: 0.5 s
Max: 600.0 s
0: Continuously attempt to restart while incrementing restart counter only at a
Default: 0
Fault Reset Operation successful restarts (same as F7 and G7).
L5-05 Min: 0
Selection 1: Attempt to restart with the interval time set in L5-04 and increment the restart
Max: 1
counter with each attempt (same V7).
■ L6: Torque Detection

0: Disabled
1: oL3 detection only active during speed agree, operation continues after
detection
2: oL3 detection always active during run, operation continues after detection
3: oL3 detection only active during speed agree, output shuts down on an oL3
fault Default: 0
L6-01 Torque Detection Selection 1 4: oL3 detection always active during run, output shuts down on an oL3 fault Min: 0
5: UL3 detection only active during speed agree, operation continues after Max: 8
detection
6: UL3 detection always active during run, operation continues after detection
7: UL3 detection only active during speed agree, output shuts down on an oL3
fault
8: UL3 detection always active during run, output shuts down on an oL3 fault
Default: 150%
L6-02 Torque Detection Level 1 Sets the overtorque and undertorque detection level. Min: 0%
Max: 300%
Default: 0.1 s
Sets the time an overtorque or undertorque condition must exist to trigger torque
L6-03 Torque Detection Time 1 Min: 0.0 s
detection 1.
Max: 10.0 s
0: Disabled
1: oL4 detection only active during speed agree, operation continues after
detection
2: oL4 detection always active during run, operation continues after detection
3: oL4 detection only active during speed agree, output shuts down on an oL4
fault Default: 0
L6-04 Torque Detection Selection 2 4: oL4 detection always active during run, output shuts down on an oL4 fault Min: 0
5: UL4 detection only active during speed agree, operation continues after Max: 8
detection
6: UL4 detection always active during run, operation continues after detection
7: UL4 detection only active during speed agree, output shuts down on an oL4
fault
8: UL4 detection always active during run, output shuts down on an oL4 fault
Default: 150%
Parameter List
L6-05 Torque Detection Level 2 Sets the overtorque and undertorque detection level. Min: 0%
Max: 300%
Default: 0.1 s
Sets the time an overtorque or undertorque condition must exist to trigger torque
L6-06 Torque Detection Time 2 Min: 0.0 s
detection 2.
Max: 10.0 s
B
B Parameter List

This function can detect an overtorque or undertorque in a certain speed range as
a result of machine fatigue. It is triggered by a specified operation time and uses
the oL1 detection settings (L6-01 and L6-03)
0: Mechanical Weakening Detection disabled.
1: Continue running (alarm only). Detected when the speed (signed) is greater
than L6-09.
2: Continue running (alarm only). Detected when the speed (not signed) is
greater than L6-09.
3: Interrupt drive output (fault). Detected when the speed (signed) is greater than
Default: 0
Mechanical Weakening L6-09.
L6-08 Min: 0
Detection Operation 4: Interrupt drive output (fault). Detected when the speed (not signed) is greater
Max: 8
than L6-09.
5: Continue running (alarm only). Detected when the speed (signed) is less than
L6-09.
6: Continue running (alarm only). Detected when the speed (not signed) is less
than L6-09.
7: Interrupt drive output (fault). Detected when the speed (signed) is less than
L6-09.
8: Interrupt drive output (fault). Detected when the speed (not signed) is less
than L6-09.
Default: 110.0%
Mechanical Weakening Sets the speed that triggers Mechanical Weakening Detection. When L6-08 is
L6-09 Min: -110.0%
Detection Speed Level set for an unsigned value, the absolute value is used if the setting is negative.
Max: 110.0%
Default: 0.1 s
Mechanical Weakening Sets the time mechanical weakening has to be detected before an alarm or fault
L6-10 Min: 0.0 s
Detection Time is triggered.
Max: 10.0 s
Default: 0
Mechanical Weakening Sets the operation time (U1-04) required before Mechanical Weakening
L6-11 Min: 0
Detection Start Time Detection is active.
Max: 65535
■ L7: Torque Limit

Default: 200%
L7-01 Forward Torque Limit Sets the torque limit value as a percentage of the motor rated torque. Four Min: 0%
individual quadrants can be set. Max: 300%
Output Torque Default: 200%
L7-02 Reverse Torque Limit Positive Torque Min: 0%
L7-01
L7-04 Max: 300%
Motor
Regeneration r/min Default: 200%
Forward Regenerative
L7-03 REV FWD Min: 0%
Torque Limit Regeneration
Max: 300%
L7-03
L7-02 Default: 200%
Reverse Regenerative Torque Negative Torque
L7-04 Min: 0%
Limit
Max: 300%
Default: 200 ms
Torque Limit Integral Time
L7-06 Sets the integral time constant for the torque limit. Min: 5 ms
Constant
Max: 10000 ms
0: Proportional control (changes to integral control at constant speed). Use this
Torque Limit Control Default: 0
setting when acceleration to the desired speed should take precedence over the
L7-07 Method Selection during Min: 0
torque limit.
Accel/Decel Max: 1
1: Integral control. Set L7-07 to 1 if the torque limit should take precedence.
■ L8: Drive Protection

Internal Dynamic Braking Default: 0
0: Resistor overheat protection disabled
L8-01 Resistor Protection Selection Min: 0
1: Resistor overheat protection enabled
(ERF type) Max: 1
Default: <9>
An overheat alarm will occur if the heatsink temperature exceeds the level set in
L8-02 Overheat Alarm Level Min: 50°C
L8-02.
Max: 130°C
B Parameter List

0: Ramp to stop. A fault is triggered.
1: Coast to stop. A fault is triggered.
Default: 3
Overheat Pre-Alarm 2: Fast Stop. Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time in C1-09. A fault is
L8-03 Min: 0
Operation Selection triggered.
Max: 4
3: Continue operation. An alarm is triggered.
4: Continue operation at reduced speed as set in L8-19.
Selects the detection of input current phase loss, power supply voltage
Default: <43>
Input Phase Loss Protection imbalance, or main circuit electrolytic capacitor deterioration.
L8-05 Min: 0
Selection 0: Disabled
Max: 1
1: Enabled
Output Phase Loss Protection
L8-07 1: Enabled (triggered by a single phase loss) Min: 0
Selection
2: Enabled (triggered when two phases are lost) Max: 2
Default: <9>
Output Ground Fault 0: Disabled
L8-09 Min: 0
Detection Selection 1: Enabled
Max: 1
0: During run only. Fan operates only during run and for L8-11 seconds after Default: 0
Heatsink Cooling Fan
L8-10 stop. Min: 0
Operation Selection
1: Fan always on. Cooling fan operates whenever the drive is powered up. Max: 1
Default: 60 s
Heatsink Cooling Fan Off Sets a delay time to shut off the cooling fan after the Run command is removed
L8-11 Min: 0 s
Delay Time when L8-10 = 0.
Max: 300 s
Default: 40°C
L8-12 Ambient Temperature Setting Enter the ambient temperature. This value adjusts the oL2 detection level. Min: -10°C
Max: 50°C
Default: 1
oL2 Characteristics Selection 0: No oL2 level reduction below 6 Hz.
L8-15 Min: 0
at Low Speeds 1: oL2 level is reduced linearly below 6 Hz. It is halved at 0 Hz.
Max: 1
Default: 0
Software Current Limit 0: Disabled
L8-18 Min: 0
Max: 1
Default: 0.8
Frequency Reduction Rate Specifies the frequency reference reduction gain at overheat pre-alarm when L8-
L8-19 Min: 0.1
during Overheat Pre-Alarm 03 = 4.
Max: 0.9
Sets the gain for overcurrent detection as a percentage of the motor rated Default: 300.0%
L8-27 Overcurrent Detection Gain current. Overcurrent is detected using the drive’s overcurrent level or the value Min: 0.0%
set to L8-27, whichever is lower. Max: 300.0%
Default: 1
Current Unbalance Detection 0: Disabled
L8-29 Min: 0
(LF2) 1: Enabled
Max: 1
0: IP00 enclosure drive
Default: <3> <9>
1: Side-by-Side mounting
L8-35 Installation Method Selection Min: 0
2: NEMA Type 1 enclosure
Max: 3
3: Finless model drive or external heatsink installation
0: Disabled Default: <16>
Carrier Frequency Reduction
L8-38 1: Enabled below 6 Hz Min: 0
Selection
2: Enabled for the entire speed range Max: 2
Sets the time that the drive continues running with reduced carrier frequency Default: <10>
Carrier Frequency Reduction
L8-40 after the carrier reduction condition is gone. Setting 0.00 s disables the carrier Min: 0.00 s
Off-Delay Time
frequency reduction time. Max: 2.00 s
High Current Alarm
L8-41 1: Enabled. An alarm is triggered at output currents above 150% of the drives Min: 0
Selection
rated current. Max: 1
0: Disabled. L8-55 should be disabled when using a regen converter or an Default: 1
Internal Braking Transistor
L8-55 optional braking unit. Min: 0
Protection
1: Protection enabled. Max: 1
Parameter List
B
B Parameter List
◆ n: Special Adjustment
The n parameters are used to adjust more advanced performance characteristics such as Hunting Prevention, speed
feedback detection, High Slip Braking, and Online Tuning for motor line-to-line resistance.
■ n1: Hunting Prevention

Default: 1
0: Disabled
n1-01 Hunting Prevention Selection Min: 0
1: Enabled
Max: 1
Default: 1.00
Hunting Prevention Gain If the motor vibrates while lightly loaded, increase the gain by 0.1 until vibration
n1-02 Min: 0.00
Setting ceases. If the motor stalls, decrease the gain by 0.1 until the stalling ceases.
Max: 2.50
Default: <6>
Hunting Prevention Time
n1-03 Sets the time constant used for Hunting Prevention. Min: 0 ms
Constant
Max: 500 ms
Default: 0.00
Hunting Prevention Gain Sets the gain used for Hunting Prevention. If set to 0, the gain set to n1-02 is
n1-05 Min: 0.00
while in Reverse used for operation in reverse.
Max: 2.50
<6> Default setting value varies by the drive model (o2-04).
■ n2: Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Tuning

Sets the internal speed feedback detection control gain in the automatic
Default: 1.00
Speed Feedback Detection frequency regulator (AFR).
n2-01 Min: 0.00
Control (AFR) Gain If hunting occurs, increase the set value. If response is low, decrease the set
Max: 10.00
value.
Speed Feedback Detection Default: 50 ms
n2-02 Control (AFR) Time Sets the time constant used for speed feedback detection control (AFR). Min: 0 ms
Constant 1 Max: 2000 ms
Speed Feedback Detection Default: 750 ms
n2-03 Control (AFR) Time Sets the AFR time constant to be used during Speed Search and during regen. Min: 0 ms
Constant 2 Max: 2000 ms
■ n3: High Slip Braking (HSB) and Overexcitation Braking

High Slip Braking Sets the output frequency reduction step width for when the drive stops the Default: 5%
n3-01 Deceleration Frequency motor using HSB. Set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency. Min: 1%
Width Increase this setting if overvoltage occurs during HSB. Max: 20%
Default: <35>
High Slip Braking Current
n3-02 Sets the current limit during HSB as a percentage of the motor rated current. Min: 100%
Limit
Max: 200%
Sets the time the drive will run with minimum frequency (E1-09) at the end of
Default: 1.0 s
High Slip Braking Dwell deceleration.
n3-03 Min: 0.0 s
Time at Stop If this time is set too low, the machine inertia can cause the motor to rotate
Max: 10.0 s
slightly after HSB.
Sets the time required for an HSB overload fault (oL7) to occur when the drive Default: 40 s
High-Slip Braking Overload
n3-04 output frequency does not change during an HSB stop. This parameter does not Min: 30 s
Time
typically require adjustment. Max: 1200 s
Default: 1.10
Overexcitation Deceleration Sets the gain applied to the V/f pattern during Overexcitation Deceleration (L3-
n3-13 Min: 1.00
Gain 04 = 4).
Max: 1.40
High Frequency Injection Default: 0
0: Disabled
n3-14 during Overexcitation Min: 0
1: Enabled
Deceleration Max: 1
Sets output current level at which the drive will start reducing the overexcitation Default: 100%
High-Slip Suppression
n3-21 gain in order to prevent a too high motor slip during Overexcitation Min: 0%
Current Level
Deceleration. Set as a percentage of the drive rated current. Max: 150%
B Parameter List

0: Enabled in both directions Default: 0
Overexcitation Operation
n3-23 1: Enabled only when rotating forward Min: 0
Selection
2: Enabled only when in reverse Max: 2
<35> The upper limit of the setting range is determined by the values set to duty selection (C6-01) and the carrier frequency reduction selection (L8-
38).
■ n5: Feed Forward Control

Default: 0
Feed Forward Control 0: Disabled
n5-01 Min: 0
Max: 1
Default: <9> <14>
Sets the time required to accelerate the motor at the rated torque from stop to
n5-02 Motor Acceleration Time Min: 0.001 s
rated speed.
Max: 10.000 s
Default: 1.00
Sets the ratio between motor and load inertia. Lower this setting if overshoot
n5-03 Feed Forward Control Gain Min: 0.00
occurs at the end of acceleration.
Max: 100.00
■ n6: Online Tuning

0: Disabled
Default: 2
1: Line-to-line resistance tuning
n6-01 Online Tuning Selection Min: 0
2: Voltage correction. Setting not possible when Energy Saving is enabled (b8-
Max: 2
01).
Default: 1.00
Decrease this setting for motors with a relatively large rotor time constant.
n6-05 Online Tuning Gain Min: 0.10
If overload occurs, increase this setting slowly in increments of 0.10.
Max: 5.00
■ n8: PM Motor Control Tuning

Sets the current used for initial rotor position estimation as a percentage of the Default: 50%
Initial Rotor Position
n8-01 motor rated current (E5-03). If the motor nameplate lists an “Si” value, that Min: 0%
Estimation Current
value should be entered here. Max: 100%
Default: 80%
Sets the current during initial polar attraction as a percentage of the motor rated
n8-02 Pole Attraction Current Min: 0%
current. Enter a high value when attempting to increase starting torque.
Max: 150%
0: Pull-in Default: 1
Initial Rotor Position
n8-35 1: High frequency injection Min: 0
Detection Selection
2: Pulse injection Max: 2
Default: 0.80
Speed Feedback Detection
n8-45 Increase this setting if hunting occurs. Decrease to lower the response. Min: 0.00
Control Gain
Max: 10.00
Pull-In Current Sets the time constant to make the pull-in current reference and actual current Default: 5.0 s
n8-47 Compensation Time value agree. Decrease the value if the motor begins to oscillate, and increase the Min: 0.0 s
Constant value if it takes too long for the current reference to equal the output current. Max: 100.0 s
Defines the d-axis current reference during no-load operation at a constant Default: 30%
n8-48 Pull-In Current speed. Set as a percentage of the motor rated current. Increase this setting if Min: 20%
hunting occurs while running at constant speed. Max: 200%
Default: <14>
d-Axis Current for High Sets the d-axis current reference when running a high load at constant speed. Set
n8-49 Min: -200.0%
Efficiency Control as a percentage of the motor rated current.
Max: 0.0%
Sets the d-axis current reference during acceleration/deceleration as a Default: 50%
Acceleration/Deceleration
Parameter List
n8-51 percentage of the motor rated current. Set to a high value when more starting Min: 0%
Pull-In Current
torque is needed. Max: 200%
Adjusts the value when hunting occurs at low speed. If hunting occurs with Default: 1.00 s
Voltage Error Compensation
n8-54 sudden load changes, increase n8-54 in increments of 0.1. Reduce this setting if Min: 0.00 s
Time Constant
oscillation occurs at start. Max: 10.00 s
B
B Parameter List

For large inertia loads or to increase the speed control response, increase this Default: 0
n8-55 Load Inertia setting. Too high of a setting when driving a very light load or load with very Min: 0
low inertia can result in oscillation. Max: 3
0: Disabled. Disable when using an SPM motor. Default: 0
n8-57 High Frequency Injection 1: Enabled. Use this setting to enhance the speed control range when using an Min: 0
IPM motor. Max: 1
Default: 200.0 V
n8-62 Prevents output voltage saturation. Should be set just below the voltage
Output Voltage Limit Min: 0.0 V
<18> provided by the input power supply.
Max: 230.0 V
Speed Feedback Detection Default: 1.50
n8-65 Control Gain during ov Sets the gain used for internal speed feedback detection during ov suppression Min: 0.00
Suppression Max: 10.00
◆ o: Operator Related Settings

The o parameters are used to set up the digital operator displays.
■ o1: Digital Operator Display Selection

Default: 106
o1-01 Selects the content of the last monitor that is shown when scrolling through
Drive Mode Unit Monitor (Monitor U1-06)
Drive Mode display. Enter the last three digits of the monitor parameter number
Selection Min: 104
to be displayed: U-.
Max: 809
1: Frequency reference (U1-01)
o1-02 2: Direction Default: 1
User Monitor Selection after
3: Output frequency (U1-02) Min: 1
Power Up
4: Output current (U1-03) Max: 5
5: User-selected monitor (set by o1-01)
Sets the units the drive should use to display the frequency reference and motor
speed monitors.
0: 0.01 Hz Default: <10>
Digital Operator Display
o1-03 1: 0.01% (100% = E1-04) Min: 0
Selection
2: r/min (calculated using the number of motor poles setting in E2-04, E4-04, or Max: 3
E5-04)
3: User-selected units (set by o1-10 and o1-11)
Default: <10>
0: Hz
o1-04 V/f Pattern Display Unit Min: 0
1: r/min
Max: 1
Default: <36>
User-Set Display Units
o1-10 Min: 1
Maximum Value These settings define the display values when o1-03 is set to 3. Max: 60000
o1-10 sets the display value that is equal to the maximum output frequency.
Default: <36>
User-Set Display Units o1-11 sets the position of the decimal position.
o1-11 Min: 0
Decimal Display
Max: 3
<36> Default setting value is determined by the digital operator display selection (o1-03).
■ o2: Digital Operator Keypad Functions

Default: 1
LO/RE Key Function 0: Disabled
o2-01 Min: 0
Selection 1: Enabled. LO/RE key switches between LOCAL and REMOTE operation.
Max: 1
Default: 1
STOP Key Function 0: Disabled. STOP key is disabled in REMOTE operation.
o2-02 Min: 0
Selection 1: Enabled. STOP key is always enabled.
Max: 1
B Parameter List

0: No change.
1: Set defaults. Saves parameter settings as default values for a User Default: 0
User Parameter Default
o2-03 Initialization. Min: 0
Value
2: Clear all. Clears the default settings that have been saved for a User Max: 2
Initialization.
Default:
Determined by
o2-04 Drive Model Selection Enter the drive model. Setting required only if installing a new control board. drive capacity
Min: –
Max: –
0: ENTER key must be pressed to enter a frequency reference. Default: 0
Frequency Reference Setting
o2-05 1: ENTER key is not required. The frequency reference can be adjusted using Min: 0
Method Selection
the up and down arrow keys only. Max: 1
Operation Selection when Default: 0
0: The drive continues operating if the digital operator is disconnected.
o2-06 Digital Operator is Min: 0
1: A fault is triggered (oPr) and the motor coasts to stop.
Disconnected Max: 1
0: Forward Default: 0
Motor Direction at Power Up
o2-07 1: Reverse Min: 0
when Using Operator
This parameter requires that drive operation be assigned to the digital operator. Max: 1
o2-09 Reserved – –
■ o3: Copy Function

0: No action
1: Read parameters from the drive, saving them onto the digital operator. Default: 0
o3-01 Copy Function Selection 2: Copy parameters from the digital operator, writing them to the drive. Min: 0
3: Verify parameter settings on the drive to check if they match the data saved on Max: 3
the operator.
Default: 0
0: Read operation prohibited
o3-02 Copy Allowed Selection Min: 0
1: Read operation allowed
Max: 1
■ o4: Maintenance Monitor Settings

Default: 0 h
Cumulative Operation Time
o4-01 Sets the value for the cumulative operation time of the drive in units of 10 h. Min: 0 h
Setting
Max: 9999 h
Default: 0
Cumulative Operation Time 0: Logs power-on time
o4-02 Min: 0
Selection 1: Logs operation time when the drive output is active (output operation time).
Max: 1
Default: 0 h
Cooling Fan Operation Time
o4-03 Sets the value of the fan operation time monitor U4-03 in units of 10 h. Min: 0 h
Setting
Max: 9999 h
Default: 0%
Capacitor Maintenance Sets the value of the Maintenance Monitor for the capacitors. See U4-05 to
o4-05 Min: 0%
Setting check when the capacitors may need to be replaced.
Max: 150%
Default: 0%
DC Bus Pre-Charge Relay Sets the value of the Maintenance Monitor for the soft charge bypass relay. See
o4-07 Min: 0%
Maintenance Setting U4-06 to check when the bypass relay may need to be replaced.
Max: 150%
Default: 0%
Sets the value of the Maintenance Monitor for the IGBTs. See U4-07 to check
o4-09 IGBT Maintenance Setting Min: 0%
when the IGBTs may need to be replaced.
Max: 150%
0: U2- and U3- monitor data is not reset when the drive is initialized
Default: 0
(A1-03).
o4-11 U2, U3 Initialization Min: 0
1: U2- and U3- monitor data is reset when the drive is initialized (A1-
Max: 1
03).
Parameter List
0: U4-10 and U4-11 monitor data is not reset when the drive is initialized (A1- Default: 0
o4-12 kWh Monitor Initialization 03). Min: 0
1: U4-10 and U4-11 monitor data is reset when the drive is initialized (A1-03). Max: 1
B
B Parameter List

0: Number of Run commands counter is not reset when the drive is initialized
Default: 0
Number of Run Commands (A1-03).
o4-13 Min: 0
Counter Initialization 1: Number of Run commands counter is reset when the drive is initialized (A1-
Max: 1
03).
◆ q: DriveWorksEZ Parameters
q1-01 to q6- Refer to Help in the
DriveWorksEZ Parameters Reserved for DriveWorksEZ
07 DWEZ software.
◆ r: DriveWorksEZ Connection Parameters

DriveWorksEZ Connection Default: 0
r1-01 to
Parameters 1 to 20 (upper/ DriveWorksEZ Connection Parameters 1 to 20 (upper/lower) Min: 0
r1-40
lower) Max: FFFFH
◆ T: Motor Tuning
Enter data into the following parameters to tune the motor and drive for optimal performance
■ T1: Induction Motor Auto-Tuning

Default: 1
1: Motor 1 (sets E1-, E2-)
T1-00 Motor 1 / Motor 2 Selection Min: 1
2: Motor 2 (sets E3-, E4-)
Max: 2
0: Rotational Auto-Tuning
1: Stationary Auto-Tuning 1
2: Stationary Auto-Tuning for Line-to-Line Resistance
3: Rotational Auto-Tuning for V/f Control (necessary for Energy Savings and Default: 0
T1-01
Auto-Tuning Mode Selection Speed Estimation Speed Search) Min: 0
<37>
4: Stationary Auto-Tuning 2 Max: 4, 8, 9 <10>
8: Inertia Tuning (perform Rotational Auto-Tuning prior to Inertia Tuning)
9: ASR Gain Tuning (perform Rotational Auto-Tuning prior to ASR Gain Auto-
Tuning)
Sets the motor rated power as specified on the motor nameplate. Default: <6>
T1-02 Motor Rated Power Note: Use the following formula to convert horsepower into kilowatts: kW = Min: 0.00 kW
HP x 0.746. Max: 650.00 kW
Default: 200.0 V
T1-03
Motor Rated Voltage Set the motor rated voltage as specified on the motor nameplate. Min: 0.0 V
<18>
Max: 255.0 V
Default: <6>
Min: 10% of drive
T1-04 Motor Rated Current Sets the motor rated current as specified on the motor nameplate. rated current
Max: 200% of drive
rated current
Default: <46>
T1-05 Motor Base Frequency Sets the rated frequency of the motor as specified on the motor nameplate. Min: 0.0 Hz
Max: 400.0 Hz
Default: 4
T1-06 Number of Motor Poles Sets the number of motor poles as specified on the motor nameplate. Min: 2
Max: 48
Default: <47>
T1-07 Motor Base Speed Sets the rated speed of the motor as specified on the motor nameplate. Min: 0 r/min
Max: 24000 r/min
Default: <45>
PG Number of Pulses Per Set the number of pulses per revolution for the PG being used (pulse generator
T1-08 Min: 0 ppr
Revolution or encoder).
Max: 60000 ppr
B Parameter List

Sets the no-load current for the motor.
After setting the motor capacity to T1-02 and the motor rated current to T1-04, Default: –
Motor No-Load Current
T1-09 this parameter will automatically display the no-load current for a standard 4 Min: 0 A
(Stationary Auto-Tuning)
pole Yaskawa motor. Enter the no-load current as indicated on the motor test Max: T1-04
report.
Sets the motor rated slip.
Default: –
Motor Rated Slip After setting the motor capacity to T1-02, this parameter will automatically
T1-10 Min: 0.00 Hz
(Stationary Auto-Tuning) display the motor slip for a standard 4 pole Yaskawa motor. Enter the motor slip
Max: 20.00 Hz
as indicated on the motor test report.
Sets the iron loss for determining the Energy Saving coefficient.
Default: 14 W <38>
The value is set to E2-10 (motor iron loss) set when the power is cycled. If T1-
T1-11 Motor Iron Loss Min: 0 W
02 is changed, a default value appropriate for the motor capacity that was
Max: 65535 W
entered will appear.
<37> The availability of certain Auto-Tuning methods depends on the control mode selected for the drive.
<38> Default setting value differs depending on the motor code value and motor parameter settings.
Setting 600 ppr: Japan (Model code: CIMR-AAA) and Asia (Model code: CIMR-ATA)
Setting 1024 ppr: China (Model code: CIMR-ABA)
Setting 60.0 Hz: Japan (Model code: CIMR-AAA) and Asia (Model code: CIMR-ATA)
Setting 50.0 Hz: China (Model code: CIMR-ABA)
Setting 1750 r/min: Japan (Model code: CIMR-AAA) and Asia (Model code: CIMR-ATA)
Setting 1450 r/min: China (Model code: CIMR-ABA)
■ T2: PM Motor Auto-Tuning

0: PM Motor Parameter Settings
1: PM Stationary Auto-Tuning
2: PM Stationary Auto-Tuning for Stator Resistance
3: Z Pulse Offset Tuning
8: Inertia Tuning
Default: 0
PM Motor Auto-Tuning 9: ASR Gain Auto-Tuning
T2-01 Min: 0
Mode Selection Prior to executing Inertia Tuning or ASR Gain Auto-Tuning, be sure to take the
Max: 3, 8, 9 <10>
following steps:
• perform Auto-Tuning for motor data (T2-01 = 0, 1, or 2) or set the motor code
to E5-01.
• verify all motor data entered to the drive with the motor nameplate or the
motor test report.
Enter the motor code when using a Yaskawa PM motor. Once the motor code is
entered, the drive automatically sets parameters T2-03 through T2-14. When Default: <16>
T2-02 PM Motor Code Selection using a motor that is not supported motor code or a non-Yaskawa motor, set Min: 0000
FFFF here and then adjust the other T2 parameters according the motor Max: FFFF
nameplate or the motor test report.
Default: 1
0: IPM motor
T2-03 PM Motor Type Min: 0
1: SPM motor. Parameter T2-17 will not be displayed with this setting.
Max: 1
Sets the motor rated power. Default: <6>
T2-04 PM Motor Rated Power Note: Use the following formula to convert horsepower into kilowatts: kW = Min: 0.00 kW
HP x 0.746. Max: 650.00 kW
Default: 200.0 V
T2-05
PM Motor Rated Voltage Enter the motor rated voltage as indicated on the motor nameplate. Min: 0.0 V
<18>
Max: 255.0 V
Default: <6>
Min: 10% of drive
T2-06 PM Motor Rated Current Enter the motor rated current as indicated on the motor nameplate. rated current
Max: 200% of drive
Parameter List
rated current
Default: 87.5 Hz
T2-07 PM Motor Base Frequency Enter the motor base frequency as indicated on the motor nameplate. Min: 0.0 Hz
Max: 400.0 Hz
B
B Parameter List

Default: 6
Enter the number of motor poles for the PM motor as indicated on the motor
T2-08 Number of PM Motor Poles Min: 2
nameplate.
Max: 48
Default: 1750 r/min
T2-09 PM Motor Base Speed Enter the base speed for the PM motor as indicated on the motor nameplate. Min: 0 r/min
Max: 24000 r/min
Default: <39>
T2-10 PM Motor Stator Resistance Enter the rotor resistance for the PM motor as indicated on the motor nameplate. Min: 0.000 Ω
Max: 65.000 Ω
Default: <39>
Enter the d-axis inductance for the PM motor as indicated on the motor
T2-11 PM Motor d-Axis Inductance Min: 0.00 mH
nameplate.
Max: 600.00 mH
Default: <39>
Enter the q-axis inductance for the PM motor as indicated on the motor
T2-12 PM Motor q-Axis Inductance Min: 0.00 mH
nameplate.
Max: 600.00 mH
Default: 1
Induced Voltage Constant 0: mV/(r/min). E5-09 will automatically be set to 0.0, and E5-24 will be used.
T2-13 Min: 0
Unit Selection 1: mV/(rad/sec). E5-24 will automatically be set to 0.0, and E5-09 will be used
Max: 1
Default: <39>
PM Motor Induced Voltage Enter the induced voltage coefficient for the PM motor as indicated on the motor
T2-14 Min: 0.1
Constant nameplate.
Max: 2000.0
Default: 30%
Pull-In Current Level for PM Sets the amount of pull-in current to use for Auto-Tuning as a percentage of the
T2-15 Min: 0%
Motor Tuning motor rated current. Increase this setting for high inertia loads.
Max: 120%
PG Number of Pulses Per Default: 1024 ppr
Sets the number of pulses per revolution for the PG being used (pulse generator
T2-16 Revolution for PM Motor Min: 1 ppr
or encoder).
Tuning Max: 15000 ppr
Default: 0.0 deg
T2-17 Encoder Z-Pulse Offset Sets the offset between encoder offset and the rotor magnetic axis. Min: -180.0 deg
Max: 180.0 deg
<39> Default setting is determined by the drive capacity and the motor code selected in T2-02.
■ T3: ASR and Inertia Tuning

Default: 3.0 Hz
T3-01 Sets the frequency of the test signal used during Inertia Tuning and ASR Gain
Test Signal Frequency Min: 0.1 Hz
<40> Auto-Tuning. Reduce this value if the inertia is large or if a fault occurs.
Max: 20.0 Hz
Default: 0.5 rad
T3-02 Sets the amplitude of the test signal used during Inertia and ASR Gain Auto-
Test Signal Amplitude Min: 0.1 rad
<40> Tuning. Reduce this value if the inertia is too large or if a fault occurs.
Max: 10.0 rad
Default: <9> <14>
T3-03
Motor Inertia Sets the motor inertia. Default setting is the inertia of a Yaskawa motor. Min: 0.0001 kgm2
<40>
Max: 600.00 kgm2
Default: 10.0 Hz
T3-04 Sets the response frequency of the mechanical system connected to the motor.
System Response Frequency Min: 0.1 Hz
<40> Oscillation may result if set too high.
Max: 50.0 Hz
<40> Displayed only when performing Inertia Tuning or ASR Gain Auto-Tuning (T1-01 = 9 or T2-01 = 9).
B Parameter List
◆ U: Monitors
Monitor parameters allow the user to view drive status, fault information, and other data concerning drive operation.
■ U1: Operation Status Monitors
Analog Output Unit

No. Name Description Level
10 V: Max
U1-01 Frequency Reference Monitors the frequency reference. Display units are determined by o1-03. 0.01 Hz
frequency
10 V: Max
U1-02 Output Frequency Displays the output frequency. Display units are determined by o1-03. 0.01 Hz
frequency
10 V: Drive rated
U1-03 Output Current Displays the output current. <19> <50>
current
0: V/f Control
1: V/f Control with PG
2: Open Loop Vector Control
No signal output
U1-04 Control Method 3: Closed Loop Vector Control –
available
5: Open Loop Vector Control for PM
6: Advanced Open Loop Vector Control for PM
7: Closed Loop Vector Control for PM
10 V: Max
U1-05 Motor Speed Displays the motor speed feedback. Display units are determined by o1-03. 0.01 Hz
Frequency
Output Voltage 10 V: 200
U1-06 Displays the output voltage. 0.1 Vac
Reference Vrms <18>
U1-07 DC Bus Voltage Displays the DC bus voltage. 10 V: 400 V <18> 1 Vdc
10 V: Drive rated
U1-08 Output Power Displays the output power (this value is calculated internally). <22>
power (kW)
10 V: Motor rated
U1-09 Torque Reference Monitors the internal torque reference. 0.1%
torque
Displays the input terminal status.
YEC_ Digital input 1 (terminal

com- S1 enabled)
mon Digital input 2 (terminal

S2 enabled)
Digital input 3 (terminal
S3 enabled) No signal output
U1-10 Input Terminal Status –
Digital input 4 (terminal available
S4 enabled)
S5 enabled)
S6 enabled)
S7 enabled)
S8 enabled)
Displays the output terminal status.
YEC_
com- Multi-Function
Digital Output
mon (terminal M1-M2)
Multi-Function No signal output
U1-11 Output Terminal Status Photocoupler Output 1 –
(terminal P1) enabled available
Multi-Function
Photocoupler Output 2
(terminal P2) enabled
Not Used
Fault Relay
(terminal MA-MC closed
Parameter List
MA-MC open)
B
B Parameter List
Analog Output
No. Name Description Unit
Level
Verifies the drive operation status.
YEC_ During run

During zero-speed
com- During REV
No signal output
U1-12 Drive Status mon During fault reset –
signal input
available
During speed agree
Drive ready
During alarm
detection
During fault detection
U1-13 Terminal A1 Input Level Displays the signal level to analog input terminal A1. 10 V: 100% 0.1%
Output Frequency after Displays output frequency with ramp time and S-curves. Units determined by 10 V: Max
U1-16 0.01 Hz
Soft Starter o1-03. frequency
Displays the reference value input from the DI-A3 option card.
Display will appear in hexadecimal as determined by the digital card input No signal output
U1-17 DI-A3 Input Status –
selection in F3-01. available
3FFFF: Set (1 bit) + sign (1 bit) + 16 bit
Displays the parameter number that caused the oPE or Err (EEPROM No signal output
U1-18 oPE Fault Parameter –
write error) error. available
Displays the contents of a MEMOBUS/Modbus error.
YEC_
com- CRC Error
Data Length Error
MEMOBUS/Modbus mon No signal output
U1-19 Not Used –
Error Code Parity Error
available
Overrun Error
Framing Error
Timed Out
Not Used
AI-A3 Terminal V1
U1-21 Displays the input voltage to terminal V1 on analog input card AI-A3. 10 V: 100% 0.1%
Input Voltage Monitor
AI-A3 Terminal V2
AI-A3 Terminal V3
Determined by
U1-24 Input Pulse Monitor Displays the frequency to pulse train input terminal RP. 1 Hz
H6-02
No signal output
U1-25 Software Number (Flash) FLASH ID –
available
No signal output
U1-26 Software No. (ROM) ROM ID –
available
<22> The display resolution depends on the rated output power of the drive after the Drive Duty has been set in parameter C6-01. Drives with a
maximum output up to 11 kW will display this value in units of 0.01 kW (two decimal places). Drives with a maximum output greater than 11
kW will display this value in units of 0.1 kW (one decimal place). Refer to Model Number and Nameplate Check on page 17 for details.
<50> When reading the value of this monitor via MEMOBUS/Modbus a value of 8192 is equal to 100% of the drive rated output current.
■ U2: Fault Trace
Analog Output
Level
No signal output
U2-01 Current Fault Displays the current fault. –
available
B Parameter List
Analog Output
Level
No signal output
U2-02 Previous Fault Displays the previous fault. –
available
Frequency Reference at No signal output
U2-03 Displays the frequency reference at the previous fault. 0.01 Hz
Previous Fault available
Output Frequency at No signal output
U2-04 Displays the output frequency at the previous fault. 0.01 Hz
Output Current at No signal output
U2-05 Displays the output current at the previous fault. <19> <50>
Motor Speed at Previous No signal output
U2-06 Displays the motor speed at the previous fault. 0.01 Hz
Fault available
Output Voltage at No signal output
U2-07 Displays the output voltage at the previous fault. 0.1 Vac
DC Bus Voltage at No signal output
U2-08 Displays the DC bus voltage at the previous fault. 1 Vdc
Output Power at No signal output
U2-09 Displays the output power at the previous fault. 0.1 kW
Torque Reference at No signal output
U2-10 Displays the torque reference at the previous fault. 0.1%
Input Terminal Status at No signal output
U2-11 Displays the input terminal status at the previous fault. Displayed as in U1-10. –
Output Terminal Status Displays the output status at the previous fault. Displays the same status No signal output
U2-12 –
at Previous Fault displayed in U1-11. available
Drive Operation Status at Displays the operation status of the drive at the previous fault. Displays the No signal output
U2-13 –
Previous Fault same status displayed in U1-12. available
Cumulative Operation No signal output
U2-14 Displays the cumulative operation time at the previous fault. 1h
Time at Previous Fault available
Soft Starter Speed
No signal output
U2-15 Reference at Previous Displays the speed reference for the soft starter at the previous fault. 0.01 Hz
available
Fault
Motor q-Axis Current at No signal output
U2-16 Displays the q-axis current for the motor at the previous fault. 0.10%
Motor d-Axis Current at No signal output
U2-17 Displays the d-axis current for the motor at the previous fault. 0.10%
Rotor Deviation at Displays the degree of rotor deviation when the most recent fault occurred No signal output
U2-19 0.1 deg
Previous Fault (same status will appear as shown in U6-10). available
Heatsink Temperature at No signal output
U2-20 Displays the temperature of the heatsink when the most recent fault occurred. 1°C
■ U3: Fault History
Analog Output
Level
U3-01 to First to 4th Most Recent No signal output
Displays the first to the fourth most recent faults. –
U3-04 Fault available
Displays the fifth to the tenth most recent faults.
After ten faults have occurred in the drive, data for the oldest fault is deleted.
U3-05 to 5th to 10th Most Recent No signal output
The most recent fault appears in U3-01, with the next most recent fault –
U3-10 Fault available
appearing in U3-02. The data is moved to the next monitor parameter every
time a fault occurs.
Cumulative Operation
U3-11 to Displays the cumulative operation time when the first to the fourth most No signal output
Time at 1st to 4th Most 1h
U3-14 recent faults occurred. available
Recent Fault
Parameter List
Cumulative Operation
U3-15 to Displays the cumulative operation time when the fifth to the tenth most recent No signal output
Time at 5th to 10th Most 1h
U3-20 faults occurred. available
Recent Fault
B
B Parameter List
■ U4: Maintenance Monitors
Analog Output
Level
Displays the cumulative operation time of the drive. The value for the
cumulative operation time counter can be reset in parameter o4-01. Use
Cumulative Operation No signal output
U4-01 parameter o4-02 to determine if the operation time should start as soon as the 1h
Time available
power is switched on or only while the Run command is present. The
maximum number displayed is 99999, after which the value is reset to 0.
Displays the number of times the Run command is entered. Reset the number
Number of Run No signal output
U4-02 of Run commands using parameter o4-13. This value will reset to 0 and start 1 Time
Commands available
counting again after reaching 65535.
Displays the cumulative operation time of the cooling fan. The default value
Cooling Fan Operation No signal output
U4-03 for the fan operation time is reset in parameter o4-03. This value will reset to 1h
Time available
0 and start counting again after reaching 99999.
Cooling Fan Displays main cooling fan usage time in as a percentage of its expected No signal output
U4-04 1%
Maintenance performance life. Parameter o4-03 can be used to reset this monitor. available
Displays main circuit capacitor usage time in as a percentage of their expected No signal output
U4-05 Capacitor Maintenance 1%
performance life. Parameter o4-05 can be used to reset this monitor. available
Soft Charge Bypass Displays the soft charge bypass relay maintenance time as a percentage of its No signal output
U4-06 1%
Relay Maintenance estimated performance life. Parameter o4-07 can be used to reset this monitor. available
Displays IGBT usage time as a percentage of the expected performance life. No signal output
U4-07 IGBT Maintenance 1%
Parameter o4-09 can be used to reset this monitor. available
U4-08 Heatsink Temperature Displays the heatsink temperature. 10 V: 100°C 1°C
No signal output
U4-09 LED Check Lights all segments of the LED to verify that the display is working properly. –
available
Monitors the drive output power. The value is shown as a 9 digit number No signal output
U4-10 kWh, Lower 4 Digits displayed across two monitor parameters, U4-10 and U4-11. 1 kWh
available
Example:
12345678.9 kWh is displayed as:
U4-10: 678.9 kWh No signal output
U4-11 kWh, Upper 5 Digits 1 MWh
U4-11: 12345 MWh available
No signal output 0.01 A

U4-13 Peak Hold Current Displays the highest current value that occurred during run.
available <50>
Peak Hold Output Displays the output frequency when the current value shown in U4-13 No signal output
U4-14 0.01 Hz
Frequency occurred. available
Motor Overload Estimate Shows the value of the motor overload detection accumulator. 100% is equal
U4-16 10 V: 100% 0.1%
(oL1) to the oL1 detection level.
Displays the source for the frequency reference as XY-nn.
X: indicates which reference is used:
1 = Reference 1 (b1-01)
Y-nn: indicates the reference source
0-01 = Digital operator
Frequency Reference 1-01 = Analog (terminal A1) No signal output
U4-18 –
Source Selection 1-02 = Analog (terminal A2) available
1-03 = Analog (terminal A3)
2-02 to 17 = Multi-step speed (d1-02 to 17)
3-01 = MEMOBUS/Modbus communications
4-01 = Communication option card
5-01 = Pulse input
7-01 = DWEZ
Frequency Reference
Displays the frequency reference provided by MEMOBUS/Modbus No signal output
U4-19 from MEMOBUS/ 0.01%
(decimal). available
Modbus Comm.
Option Frequency No signal output
U4-20 Displays the frequency reference input by an option card (decimal). –
Reference available
B Parameter List
Analog Output
Level
Displays the source for the Run command as XY-nn.
X: Indicates which Run source is used:
Y: Input power supply data
0 = Digital operator
1 = External terminals
3 = MEMOBUS/Modbus communications
4 = Communication option card
7 = DWEZ
nn: Run command limit status data
Run Command Source No signal output
U4-21 00: No limit status. –
Selection available
01: Run command was left on when stopped in the PRG mode
02: Run command was left on when switching from LOCAL to REMOTE
operation
03: Waiting for soft charge bypass contactor after power up (Uv or Uv1
flashes after 10 s)
04: Waiting for “Run command prohibited” time period to end
05: Fast Stop (digital input, digital operator)
06: b1-17 (Run command given at power-up)
07: During baseblock while coast to stop with timer
08: Frequency reference is below minimal reference during baseblock
09: Waiting for Enter command
MEMOBUS/Modbus
Displays the drive control data set by MEMOBUS/Modbus communications No signal output
U4-22 Communications –
register no. 0001H as a four-digit hexadecimal number. available
Reference
Communication Option Displays drive control data set by an option card as a four-digit hexadecimal No signal output
U4-23 –
Card Reference number. available
■ U5: PID Monitors
Analog Output Unit

U5-01 PID Feedback Displays the PID feedback value. 10 V: 100% 0.01%
Displays the amount of PID input (deviation between PID setpoint and
U5-02 PID Input 10 V: 100% 0.01%
feedback).
U5-03 PID Output Displays PID control output. 10 V: 100% 0.01%
U5-04 PID Setpoint Displays the PID setpoint. 10 V: 100% 0.01%
PID Differential Displays the 2nd PID feedback value if differential feedback is used (H3-
U5-05 10 V: 100% 0.01%
Feedback = 16).
Displays the difference of both feedback values if differential feedback is used
U5-06 PID Adjusted Feedback (U5-01 - U5-05). If differential feedback is not used, then U5-01 and U5-06 10 V: 100% 0.01%
will be the same.
■ U6: Operation Status Monitors
Analog Output Unit

10 V: Motor
Motor Secondary Displays the value of the motor secondary current (Iq). Motor rated secondary
U6-01 secondary rated 0.1%
Current (Iq) current is 100%.
current
10 V: Motor
Motor Excitation Current Displays the value calculated for the motor excitation current (Id). Motor
U6-02 secondary rated 0.1%
(Id) rated secondary current is 100%.
current
10 V: Max
U6-03 ASR Input
frequency
Parameter List
Displays the input and output values when using ASR control. 10 V: Motor 0.01%
U6-04 ASR Output secondary rated
current
U6-05 Output voltage reference (Vq) for the q-axis. 0.1 Vac
Reference (Vq) Vrms <18>
B
B Parameter List
Analog Output
Level
U6-06 Output voltage reference (Vd) for the d-axis. 0.1 Vac
Reference (Vd) Vrms <18>
Displays the output value for current control relative to motor secondary 10 V: 200
U6-07 q-Axis ACR Output 0.1%
current (q-axis). Vrms <18>
Displays the output value for current control relative to motor secondary 10 V: 200
U6-08 d-Axis ACR Output 0.1%
current (d-axis). Vrms <18>
Advance Phase Displays the degree of forward phase correction after calculating the deviation 10 V: 180 deg
U6-09 0.1 deg
Compensation (Δ θ) of Δθcmp. –10 V: –180 deg
Control Axis Deviation Displays the amount of deviation between the actual d-axis / q-axis and the γ- 10 V: 180 deg
U6-10 0.1 deg
(Δθ) axis / δ-axis used for motor control. –10 V: –180 deg
Flux Position Detection 10 V: 180 deg
U6-13 Monitors the value of the flux position detection (sensor). 0.1 deg
(sensor) –10 V: –180 deg
Flux Position Estimation 10 V: 180 deg
U6-14 Monitors the value of the flux position estimation. 0.1 deg
(observer) –10 V: –180 deg
Speed Detection PG1
U6-18 Monitors the number of pulses for speed detection (PG1). 10 V: 65536 1 pulse
Counter
Speed Detection PG2
U6-19 Monitors the number of pulses for speed detection (PG2). 10 V: 65536 1 pulse
Counter
Frequency Reference 10 V: Max
U6-20 Displays the bias value used to adjust the frequency reference. 0.1%
Bias (Up/Down 2) frequency
U6-21 Offset Frequency Displays the frequency added to the main frequency reference. – 0.1%
10 V: No. of
Zero Servo Pulse Displays how far the rotor has moved from its last position in PG pulses
U6-22 pulses per 1
Movement (multiplied by 4).
revolution
10 V: Motor
U6-25 Feedback Control Output Output monitor for the ASR speed loop. secondary rated 0.01%
current
10 V: Motor
Feed Forward Control
U6-26 Output monitor for Feed Forward control. secondary rated 0.01%
Output
current
■ U8: DriveWorksEZ Monitors
Analog Output
Level
U8-01 to DriveWorksEZ Custom
DriveWorksEZ Custom Monitor 1 to 10 10 V: 100% 0.01%
U8-10 Monitor 1 to 10
U8-11 to DriveWorksEZ Version No signal output
DriveWorksEZ Version Control Monitor 1 to 3 –
U8-13 Control Monitor 1 to 3 available
C Standards Compliance
◆ European Standards
Figure 86
YEC_common
Figure 86 CE Mark
The CE mark indicates compliance with European safety and environmental regulations. It is required for engaging in
business and commerce in Europe.
European standards include the Machinery Directive for machine manufacturers, the Low Voltage Directive for
electronics manufacturers, and the EMC guidelines for controlling noise.
This drive displays the CE mark based on the EMC guidelines and the Low Voltage Directive.
• Low Voltage Directive: 2006/95/EC
• EMC Guidelines: 2004/108/EC
Devices used in combination with this drive must also be CE certified and display the CE mark. When using drives
displaying the CE mark in combination with other devices, it is ultimately the responsibility of the user to ensure
compliance with CE standards. After setting up the device, verify that conditions meet European standards.
■ CE Low Voltage Directive Compliance
This drive has been tested according to European standard IEC61800-5-1, and it fully complies with the Low Voltage
Directive.
To comply with the Low Voltage Directive, be sure to meet the following conditions when combining this drive with
other devices:
Area of Use
Do not use drives in areas with pollution higher than severity 2 and overvoltage category 3 in accordance with IEC664.
Installing Fuses on the Input Side
Always install input fuses. Select fuses according to Table 64.
Table 64 Recommended Input Fuse Selection
Fuse Type
Model Manufacturer: Bussmann
CIMR-A
Model Fuse Ampere Rating (A)
2A0004 FWH-70B 70
2A0006 FWH-70B 70
2A0008 FWH-70B 70
2A0010 FWH-70B 70
2A0012 FWH-70B 70
2A0018 FWH-90B 90
2A0021 FWH-90B 90
2A0030 FWH-100B 100
2A0040 FWH-200B 200
2A0056 FWH-200B 200
2A0069 FWH-200B 200
2A0081 FWH-300A 300
2A0110 FWH-300A 300
2A0138 FWH-350A 350
2A0169 FWH-400A 400
2A0211 FWH-400A 400
Compliance
Standards
2A0250 FWH-600A 600
YASKAWA ELECTRIC TOEP C710616 21C YASKAWA AC Drive - A1000 Quick Start Guide 181 C
Fuse Type
CIMR-A
2A0312 FWH-700A 700
2A0360 FWH-800A 800
2A0415 FWH-1000A 1000
4A0002 FWH-40B 40
4A0004 FWH-50B 50
4A0005 FWH-70B 70
4A0007 FWH-70B 70
4A0009 FWH-90B 90
4A0011 FWH-90B 90
4A0018 FWH-80B 80
4A0023 FWH-100B 100
4A0031 FWH-125B 125
4A0038 FWH-200B 200
4A0044 FWH-250A 250
4A0058 FWH-250A 250
4A0072 FWH-250A 250
4A0088 FWH-250A 250
4A0103 FWH-250A 250
4A0139 FWH-350A 350
4A0165 FWH-400A 400
4A0208 FWH-500A 500
4A0250 FWH-600A 600
4A0296 FWH-700A 700
4A0362 FWH-800A 800
4A0414 FWH-800A 800
4A0515 FWH-1000A 1000
4A0675 FWH-1200A 1200
Guarding Against Harmful Materials

When installing IP00 enclosure drives, use an enclosure that prevents foreign material from entering the drive from
above or below.
Grounding
The drive is designed to be used in T-N (grounded neutral point) networks. If installing the drive in other types of
grounded systems, contact your Yaskawa representative for instructions.
■ EMC Guidelines Compliance
This drive is tested according to European standards EN61800-3: 2004, and complies with the EMC guidelines.
EMC Filter Installation
The following conditions must be met to ensure continued compliance with guidelines. Refer to EMC Filters on
page 185 for EMC filter selection.
Installation Method
Verify the following installation conditions to ensure that other devices and machinery used in combination with this
drive also comply with EMC guidelines.
1. Install an EMC noise filter to the input side specified by Yaskawa for compliance with European standards.
2. Place the drive and EMC noise filter in the same enclosure.
3. Use braided shield cable for the drive and motor wiring, or run the wiring through a metal conduit.
4. Keep wiring as short as possible. Ground the shield on both the drive side and the motor side.
Figure 87
A D C
U/T1 U
V/T2 V
M YEC_common
W/T3 W
E
A – Drive D – Metal conduit
B – 10 m max cable length between drive and motor E – Ground wire should be as short as possible.
C – Motor
Figure 87 Installation Method
5. Ground the largest possible surface area of the shield to the metal conduit when using braided shield cable.
Yaskawa recommends using a cable clamp.
Figure 88
A
YEC_common
C B
A – Braided shield cable C – Cable clamp (conductive)
B – Metal panel
Figure 88 Ground Area
6. Connect a DC reactor to minimize harmonic distortion. See page 186.
Compliance
Standards
Three-Phase 200 V / 400 V Class

Figure 89
L3
L2
K
L1
PE
B
C
D
L3 L2 L1
J
E
D
I
H F
A
G YEC_common
A – Ground the cable shield G – Motor

B – Enclosure panel H – Cable clamp
C – Metal plate I – Ground plate (scrape off any visible paint)
D – Grounding surface (remove any paint or sealant) J – EMC noise filter
E – Drive K – Make sure the ground wire is grounded
F – Motor cable (braided shield cable, max. 10 m)
Figure 89 EMC Filter and Drive Installation for CE Compliance (Three-Phase 200 V / 400 V Class)
EMC Filters
The drive should be installed with the EMC filters listed below in order to comply with the EN61800-3 requirements.
Note: If the Safe Disable function of the drive is part of the safety concept of a machine or installation and used for a safe stop
according to EN60204-1, stop category 0, use only filters manufactured by Schaffner as listed below.
Table 65 EN61800-3 Filters
Filter Data (Manufacturer: Schaffner)
Model Dimensions
CIMR-A Weight
Type Rated Current (A) [W x H x D] YxX Figure
(kg) (mm)
2A0004
2A0006 FS5972-10-07 10 1.2 141 × 330 × 46 115 × 313
2A0008
2A0010
FS5972-18-07 18 1.3 141 × 330 × 46 115 × 313
2A0012
1
2A0018
2A0021 FS5972-35-07 35 2.1 206 × 355 × 50 175 × 336
2A0030
2A0040
FS5972-60-07 60 4.0 236 × 408 × 65 205 × 390
2A0056
2A0069
FS5972-100-35 100 3.4 90 × 330 × 150 65 × 255
2A0081
2A0110
FS5972-170-40 170 6.0 120 × 451 × 170 102 × 365 2
2A0138
2A0169
FS5972-250-37 250 11.7 130 × 610 × 240 90 × 498
2A0211
2A0250
FS5972-410-99 410 10.5 260 × 386 × 115 235 × 120
2A0312
3
2A0360
FS5972-600-99 600 11 260 × 386 × 135 235 × 120
2A0415
4A0002
4A0004
FS5972-10-07 10 1.1 141 × 330 × 46 115 × 313
4A0005
4A0007
4A0009
FS5972-18-07 18 1.7 141 × 330 × 46 115 × 313
4A0011
1
4A0018
4A0023 FS5972-35-07 35 2.1 206 × 355 × 50 175 × 336
4A0031
4A0038
4A0044 FS5972-60-07 60 4 236 × 408 × 65 202 × 390
4A0058
4A0072
FS5972-100-35 100 3.4 90 × 330 × 150 65 × 255
4A0088
4A0103
2
4A0139 FS5972-170-35 170 4.7 120 × 451 × 170 102 × 365
4A0165
4A0208 FS5972-250-37 250 11.7 130 × 610 × 240 90 × 498
4A0250
4A0296 FS5972-410-99 400 10.5 260 × 386 × 115 235 × 120
4A0362
3
4A0414
FS5972-600-99 600 11 260 × 386 × 135 235 × 120
4A0515
Compliance
4A0675 FS5972-800-99 800 31.5 300 × 716 × 160 275 × 210

Standards
Figure 90
W
Y
H
X
X
Y D
W
D
Figure 1 Figure 2
W
Y
X
YEC_common
X
Figure 3
Figure 90 EMC Filter Dimensions

DC Reactors for EN 61000-3-2 Compliance
Table 66 DC Reactors for Harmonics Reduction
Drive Model DC Reactor

CIMR-A Model Rating
200V Three-Phase Units
2A0004 5.4 A
UZDA-B
2A0006 8 mH
400 V Three-Phase Units
4A0002 3.2 A
UZDA-B
4A0004 28 mH
Note: Contact Yaskawa for information about DC reactors for other models.
◆ UL Standards
The UL/cUL mark applies to products in the United States and Canada. It indicates that UL has performed product
testing and evaluation, and determined that their stringent standards for product safety have been met. For a product to
receive UL certification, all components inside that product must also receive UL certification.
Figure 91
Figure 91 UL/cUL Mark
■ UL Standards Compliance
This drive is tested in accordance with UL standard UL508C and complies with UL requirements. The conditions
described below must be met to maintain compliance when using this drive in combination with other equipment:
Installation Area
Do not install the drive to an area greater than pollution severity 2 (UL standard).
Main Circuit Terminal Wiring
Cable Connectors
Yaskawa recommends using UL-listed copper wires (rated at 75°C), and closed-loop connectors or CSA-certified ring
connectors sized for the selected wire gauge to maintain proper clearances when wiring the drive. Use the correct crimp
tool to install connectors per manufacturer recommendation. Table 67 lists a suitable closed-loop connector
manufactured by JST Corporation.
Table 67 Closed-Loop Crimp Terminal Size (JIS C 2805) (same for 200 V and 400 V)
Wire Gauge Terminal Crimp Terminal Model Tightening Torque
mm2 (AWG) Screws Numbers Nxm (lbxin.)
M3.5 R1.25-3.5 0.8 to 1.0 (7.1 to 8.9)
0.75 (18)
M4 R1.25-4 1.2 to 1.5 (10.6 to 13.3)
M3.5 R1.25-3.5 0.8 to 1.0 (7.1 to 8.9)
1.25 (16)
M4 R1.25-4 1.2 to 1.5 (10.6 to 13.3)
M3.5 R2-3.5 0.8 to 1.0 (7.1 to 8.9)
M4 R2-4 1.2 to 1.5 (10.6 to 13.3)
2 (14)
M5 R2-5 2.0 to 2.5 (17.7 to 22.1)
M6 R2-6 4.0 to 5.0 (35.4 to 44.3)
M4 R5.5-4 1.2 to 1.5 (10.6 to 13.3)
M5 R5.5-5 2.0 to 2.5 (17.7 to 22.1)
3.5/5.5 (12/10)
M6 R5.5-6 4.0 to 5.0 (35.4 to 44.3)
M8 R5.5-8 9.0 to 11.0 (79.7 to 97.4)
M4 8-4 1.2 to 1.5 (10.6 to 13.3)
M5 R8-5 2.0 to 2.5 (17.7 to 22.1)
8 (8)
M6 R8-6 4.0 to 5.0 (35.4 to 44.3)
M8 R8-8 9.0 to 11.0 (79.7 to 97.4)
M4 14-4 <1> 1.2 to 1.5 (10.6 to 13.3)
M5 R14-5 2.0 to 2.5 (17.7 to 22.1)
14 (6)
M6 R14-6 4.0 to 5.0 (35.4 to 44.3)
M8 R14-8 9.0 to 11.0 (79.7 to 97.4)
M10 R22-10 18.0 to 23.0 (159.0 to 204.0)
22 (4)
M12 R22-12 32.0 to 40.0 (284.0 to 354.0)
30/38 (3/2) M12 R38-12 32.0 to 40.0 (284.0 to 354.0)
50/60 (1/ 1/0) M12 R60-12 32.0 to 40.0 (284.0 to 354.0)
80 (2/0) M12 R80-12 32.0 to 40.0 (284.0 to 354.0)
100 (4/0) M12 R100-12 32.0 to 40.0 (284.0 to 354.0)
Compliance
Standards
Wire Gauge Terminal Crimp Terminal Model Tightening Torque

mm2 (AWG) Screws Numbers Nxm (lbxin.)
M10 150-10 18.0 to 23.0 (159.0 to 204.0)
150 (250/300MCM)
M12 150-12 32.0 to 40.0 (284.0 to 354.0)
M10 200-10 18.0 to 23.0 (159.0 to 204.0)
200 (400MCM)
M12 R200-12 32.0 to 40.0 (284.0 to 354.0)
325 (600/650MCM) M12 325-12 32.0 to 40.0 (284.0 to 354.0)
<1> Use the specified crimp terminals (Model 14.NK4) when using CIMR-A2A0030, 2A0040, 4A0018, and 4A0023 with 14 mm2 (6 AWG).
Note: Use crimp insulated terminals or insulated shrink tubing for wiring connections. Wires should have a continuous maximum
allowable temperature of 75°C 600 Vac UL-approved vinyl-sheathed insulation.
Input Fuse Installation
The installation manual specifies that branch circuit protection should be provided by any of the following:
• Non-time delay Class J, T, or CC fuses sized at 300% of the drive input rating
• Time delay Class J, T, or CC fuses sized at 175% of the drive input rating
• Time-delay Class RK5 fuses sized at 225% of the drive input rating
Table 68 Recommended Input Fuse Selection
Fuse Type
CIMR-A
2A0004 FWH-70B 70
2A0006 FWH-70B 70
2A0008 FWH-70B 70
2A0010 FWH-70B 70
2A0012 FWH-70B 70
2A0018 FWH-90B 90
2A0021 FWH-90B 90
2A0030 FWH-100B 100
2A0040 FWH-200B 200
2A0056 FWH-200B 200
2A0069 FWH-200B 200
2A0081 FWH-300A 300
2A0110 FWH-300A 300
2A0138 FWH-350A 350
2A0169 FWH-400A 400
2A0211 FWH-400A 400
2A0250 FWH-600A 600
2A0312 FWH-700A 700
2A0360 FWH-800A 800
2A0415 FWH-1000A 1000
4A0002 FWH-40B 40
4A0004 FWH-50B 50
4A0005 FWH-70B 70
4A0007 FWH-70B 70
4A0009 FWH-90B 90
4A0011 FWH-90B 90
4A0018 FWH-80B 80
4A0023 FWH-100B 100
4A0031 FWH-125B 125
4A0038 FWH-200B 200
4A0044 FWH-250A 250
4A0058 FWH-250A 250
Fuse Type
CIMR-A
4A0072 FWH-250A 250
4A0088 FWH-250A 250
4A0103 FWH-250A 250
4A0139 FWH-350A 350
4A0165 FWH-400A 400
4A0208 FWH-500A 500
4A0250 FWH-600A 600
4A0296 FWH-700A 700
4A0362 FWH-800A 800
4A0414 FWH-800A 800
4A0515 FWH-1000A 1000
4A0675 FWH-1200A 1200
Low Voltage Wiring for Control Circuit Terminals

Wire low voltage wires with NEC Class 1 circuit conductors. Refer to national state or local codes for wiring. Use a class
2 (UL listed) power supply for the control circuit terminal when not using the drives internal control power supply.
Table 69 Control Circuit Terminal Power Supply
Input / Output Terminal Signal Power Supply Specifications
Multi-function photocoupler output P1, P2, PC Requires class 2 power supply
Multi-function digital inputs S1, S2, S3, S4, S5, S6, S7, S8, SC
Multi-function analog inputs +V, –V, A1, A2, A3, AC
Use the internal control power supply of the drive or an
Pulse train input RP, AC
external class 2 power supply.
Pulse train output MP, AC
Safe disable inputs H1, H2, HC
Safe disable outputs DM+, DM- Requires class 2 power supply
Drive Short-Circuit Rating

This drive has undergone the UL short-circuit test, which certifies that during a short circuit in the power supply, the
current flow will not rise above 100,000 amps at 240 V for 200 V class drives and 480 V for 400 V class drives.
• The MCCB, breaker protection, and fuse ratings shall be equal to or greater than the short-circuit tolerance of the
power supply being used.
• Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes for 240 V in 200
V class drives (up to 480 V for 400 V class drives) motor overload protection.
■ Drive Motor Overload Protection
Set parameter E2-01 (motor rated current) to the appropriate value to enable motor overload protection. The internal
motor overload protection is UL listed and in accordance with the NEC and CEC.
E2-01 Motor Rated Current
Setting Range: Model Dependent
Default Setting: Model Dependent
Parameter E2-01 (motor rated current) protects the motor if parameter L1-01 is not set to 0 (default is 1, enabling
protection for standard induction motors).
If Auto-Tuning has been performed successfully, the motor data entered to T1-04 is automatically written into parameter
E2-01. If Auto-Tuning has not been performed, manually enter the correct motor rated current to parameter E2-01.
Compliance
Standards
L1-01 Motor Overload Protection Selection

The drive has an electronic overload protection function (oL1) based on time, output current, and output frequency,
which protects the motor from overheating. The electronic thermal overload function is UL-recognized, so it does not
require an external thermal relay for single motor operation.
This parameter selects the motor overload curve used according to the type of motor applied.
Table 70 Overload Protection Settings
Setting Description
0 Disabled Disabled the drive’s internal motor overload protection.
Selects protection characteristics for a standard self cooled motor with limited cooling
1 Standard fan cooled motor (default) capabilities when running below the rated speed. The motor overload detection level (oL1) is
automatically reduces when running below the motor rated speed.
Selects protection characteristics for a motor with self-cooling capability within a speed
Drive duty motor with a speed range of
2 range of 10:1. The motor overload detection level (oL1) is automatically reduced when
1:10
running below 1/10 of the motor rated speed.
Selects protection characteristics for a motor capable of cooling itself at any speed —
3 Vector motor with a speed range of 1:100 including zero speed (externally cooled motor). The motor overload detection level (oL1) is
constant over the entire speed range.
Permanent Magnet motor with variable Selects protection characteristics for a variable torque PM motor. The motor overload
4
torque detection level (oL1) is automatically reduces when running below the motor rated speed.
Permanent Magnet motor with constant Selects protection characteristics for a constant torque PM motor. The motor overload
5
torque detection level (oL1) is constant over the whole speed range.
Selects protection characteristics for a standard self cooled motor with limited cooling
6 Standard fan cooled motor (50 Hz) capabilities when running below the rated speed. The motor overload detection level (oL1) is
automatically reduces when running below the motor rated speed.
When connecting the drive to more than one motor for simultaneous operation, disable the electronic overload protection
(L1-01 = 0) and wire each motor with its own motor thermal overload relay.
Enable the motor overload protection (L1-01 = 1 to 5) when connecting the drive to a single motor, unless another motor
overload preventing device is installed. The drive electronic thermal overload function causes an oL1 fault, which shuts
off the output of the drive and prevents additional overheating of the motor. The motor temperature is continually
calculated as long as the drive is powered up.
L1-02 Motor Overload Protection Time
Setting Range: 0.1 to 5.0 min
Factory Default: 1.0 min
Parameter L1-02 determines how long the motor is allowed to operate before the oL1 fault occurs when the drive is
running at 60 Hz and at 150% of the full load amp rating (E2-01) of the motor. Adjusting the value of L1-02 can shift the
set of oL1 curves up the y axis of the diagram below, but will not change the shape of the curves.
Figure 92
Time (min)
10
7
3
Cold Start
1
0.4
Hot Start
0.1 Motor Current (%)

0 100 150 200 (E2-01=100 %)
Figure 92 Motor Overload Protection Time
◆ Safe Disable Input Function

■ Specifications
Two Safe Disable inputs and 1 EDM output according to EN61800-5-1, EN954-1/
Inputs / Outputs
ISO13849 Cat. 3, IEC/EN61508 SIL2, Insulation coordination: class 1.
Operation Time Time from input open to drive output stop is less than 1 ms.
Demand Rate Low PFD = 5.15E-5
Failure Probability Demand Rate High/
PFH = 1.2E-9
Continuous
The Safe Disable Inputs satisfy all requirements of Performance Level (PL) d according to
Performance Level
ISO13849-1. (Note: DC from EDM considered.)
■ Precautions
DANGER! Improper use of the Safe Disable function can result in serious injury or even death.
Make sure the whole system or machinery that the Safe Disable function is used in complies with safety requirements. When
implementing the Safe Disable function into the safety system of a machine, a thorough risk assessment for the whole system has to
be carried out to assure it complies with relevant safety norms (e.g., EN954/ISO13849, IEC61508, EN/IEC62061,...).
DANGER! When using a PM motor, even if the drive output is shut off by the Safe Disable function, a break down of two output
transistors can cause current to flow through the motor winding, resulting in a rotor movement for a maximum angle of 180 degree
(electrically). Make sure such a situation would have no effect on the safety of the application when using the Safe Disable function.
This is not a concern with induction motors.
DANGER! The Safe Disable function can switch off the drive output, but does not cut the drive power supply and cannot electrically
isolate the drive output from the input. Always shut off the drive power supply when performing maintenance or installations on the
drive input side as well as the drive output side.
DANGER! When using the Safe Disable inputs, make sure to remove the wire links between terminals H1, H2, and HC that were
installed prior to shipment. Failing to do so will keep the Safe Disable circuit from operating properly and can cause injury or even
death.
DANGER! All safety features (including Safe Disable) should be inspected daily and periodically. If the system is not operating
normally, there is a risk of serious personal injury.
DANGER! Only a qualified technician with a thorough understanding of the drive, the instruction manual, and safety standards should
be permitted to wire, inspect, and maintain the Safe Disable input.
NOTICE: From the moment terminal inputs H1 and H2 have opened, it takes up to 1 ms for drive output to shut off completely. The
sequence set up to trigger terminals H1 and H2 should make sure that both terminals remain open for at least 1 ms in order to properly
interrupt drive output.
NOTICE: The Safe Disable Monitor (output terminals DM+ and DM-) should not be used for any other purpose than to monitor the
Safe Disable status or to discover a malfunction in the Safe Disable inputs. The monitor output is not considered a safe output.
When utilizing the Safe Disable function, use only the EMC filters recommended in .
■ Using the Safe Disable Function
The Safe Disable inputs provide a stop function in compliance with Stop Category 0 as defined in the EN60204-1
(uncontrolled stop by power removal), and “Safe Torque Off” as defined in the IEC61800-5-2. Safe Disable inputs have
been designed to meet the requirements of the EN954-1/ISO13849-1, Category 3 and EN61508, SIL2.
A Safe Disable Status Monitor for error detection in the safety circuit is also provided.
Safe Disable Circuit
The Safe Disable circuit consists of two independent input channels that can block the output transistors. In addition, it
provides a monitoring channel that indicates the status of those two input channels.
The input can either use the drive internal power supply or an external power supply. Both modes, Sink mode and Source
mode are supported. The mode that is selected for the digital input terminals S1 to S8 by switch S3 will also be used for
the Safe Disable inputs. Refer to Sinking/Sourcing Mode Switch for Digital Inputs on page 48.
The Safe Disable Monitor uses a single channel photocoupler output. Refer to Output Terminals on page 44 for signal
specifications when using this output.
Compliance
Standards
Figure 93
Main Power
24 Vdc Control
Safety Relay or PLC HC Circuit
with safety functionality
Safety Jumper S3
Outputs Setting:
Feedback
SINK
H1 Gate Block 1
N Power Module P
H2 Gate Block 2
DM+
>=1
DM-
Drive
YEC_common
M
Figure 93 Safe Disable Function Wiring Example (SINK Mode)

Disabling and Enabling the Drive Output (“Safe Torque Off”)
Figure 94 illustrates the Safe Disable input operation.
Figure 94
Motor coasts
Output to stop
Frequency Run Command must be
released to deactivate
Safe Disable Drive is ready for
operation
Run Command Run Stop
H1, H2 Input ON (Safe Disable off) OFF (Safe Disable activated)
Drive Output Normal operation Safe Torque-Off Baseblock (Not Safe!)

Figure 94 Safe Disable Operation
Entering the “Safe Torque Off” State
Whenever either one Safe Disable input or both inputs open, the motor torque is shut off by switching off the drive
output. If the motor was running before the Safe Disable inputs opened, then the motor will coast to stop, regardless of
the stopping method set in parameter b1-03.
Notice that the “Safe Torque Off” state can only be achieved using the Safe Disable function. Removing the Run
command stops the drive and shuts the output off (baseblock), but does not create a “Safe Torque Off” status.
Note: To avoid an uncontrolled stop during normal operation, make sure that the Safe Disable inputs are opened first when the motor
has completely stopped.
Returning to Normal Operation after Safe Disable
The Safe Disable function can only be deactivated when a Run command is not active.
When Safe Disable was activated during stop, normal operation can be resumed by simply turning on both Safe Disable
inputs (i.e., by deactivating “Safe Torque Off”).
When Safe Disable was activated during run, first the Run command has to be removed and then the Safe Disable inputs
have to be turned on before the drive can be restarted.
Safe Disable Monitor Output Function and Digital Operator Display

Table 71 explains the drive output and Safe Disable monitor state depending on the Safe Disable inputs.
Table 71 Safety Input and EDM Terminal Status
Safe Disable Input Status Safe Disable Status
Monitor, Drive Output Status Digital Operator Display
Input 1, H1-HC Input 2, H2-HC DM+ - DM-
Safely disabled, “Safe
OFF OFF OFF Hbb (flashes)
Torque Off”
ON OFF ON HbbF (flashes)
Torque Off”
OFF ON ON HbbF (flashes)
Torque Off”
Baseblock, ready for
ON ON ON Normal display
operation
Safe Disable Status Monitor

With the Safe Disable monitor output (terminals DM+ and DM-), the drive provides a safety status feedback signal. This
signal should be read by the device that controls the Safe Disable inputs (PLC or a safety relay) in order to prohibit
leaving the “Safe Torque Off” status in case the safety circuit malfunctions. Refer to the instruction manual of the safety
device for details on this function.
Digital Operator Display
When both Safe Disable inputs are open, “Hbb” will flash in the digital operator display.
Should only one of the Safe Disable channels be on while the other is off, “HbbF” will flash in the display to indicate that
there is a problem in the safety circuit or in the drive. This display should not appear under normal conditions if the Safe
Disable circuit is utilized properly. Refer to Alarm Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions on page 110 to resolve
possible errors.
Compliance
Standards
Revision History
The revision dates and the numbers of the revised manuals appear on the bottom of the back cover.
MANUAL NO. TOEP C710616 21C

Published in Japan June 2010 08-9 3 -1
WEB revision number

Revision number
Date of original publication
Date of publication
Date of Revision WEB Revision Section Revised Content

Publication Number Number
− TOEP C710616 21C<3>-1, available on the Web.
July 2010 4 0
Back cover Revision: Address
June 2010 1 Appendix A Correction: Ambient Temperature
3
April 2010 0 Back cover Revision: Address
Addition: Larger drive capacities added along with corresponding data
August 2009 2 0 All Three-phase 400 V: CIMR-A4A0414 to 0675
Revision: Review and corrected entire documentation
Addition: x Larger drive capacities added along with corresponding data
Three-phase 200 V: CIMR-A2A0250 to 0415
February 2009 1 0 All Three-phase 400 V: CIMR-A4A0208 to 0362
x H1- = 47 (Node Setup)
Revision: Review and corrected entire documentation
September 2008 − − − First Edition
YASKAWA AC Drive A1000
High Performance Vector Control Drive
Quick Start Guide
DRIVE CENTER (INVERTER PLANT)

2-13-1, Nishimiyaichi, Yukuhashi, Fukuoka, 824-8511, Japan
Phone: 81-930-25-3844 Fax:81-930-25-4369
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION

New Pier Takeshiba South Tower, 1-16-1, Kaigan, Minatoku, Tokyo, 105-6891, Japan
Phone: 81-3-5402-4502 Fax: 81-3-5402-4580
http://www.yaskawa.co.jp
YASKAWA AMERICA, INC.

2121 Norman Drive South, Waukegan, IL 60085, U.S.A.
Phone: (800) YASKAWA (800-927-5292) or 1-847-887-7000 Fax: 1-847-887-7310
http://www.yaskawa.com
YASKAWA ELÉTRICO DO BRASIL COMÉRCIO LTDA.

Avenda Fagundes Filho, 620 Bairro Saude, São Paulo, SP04304-000, Brasil
Phone: 55-11-3585-1100 Fax: 55-11-5581-8795
http://www.yaskawa.com.br
YASKAWA EUROPE GmbH

Hauptstraβe 185, 65760 Eschborn, Germany
Phone: 49-6196-569-300 Fax: 49-6196-569-398
YASKAWA ELECTRIC UK LTD.

1 Hunt Hill Orchardton Woods, Cumbernauld, G68 9LF, United Kingdom
Phone: 44-1236-735000 Fax: 44-1236-458182
YASKAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CORPORATION

7F, Doore Bldg. 24, Yeoido-dong, Youngdungpo-Ku, Seoul, 150-877, Korea
Phone: 82-2-784-7844 Fax: 82-2-784-8495
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD.

151 Lorong Chuan, #04-02A, New Tech Park, 556741, Singapore
Phone: 65-6282-3003 Fax: 65-6289-3003
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SHANGHAI) CO., LTD.

No. 18 Xizang Zhong Road, Room 1702-1707, Harbour Ring Plaza, Shanghai, 200001, China
Phone: 86-21-5385-2200 Fax: 86-21-5385-3299
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SHANGHAI) CO., LTD. BEIJING OFFICE

Room 1011A, Tower W3 Oriental Plaza, No. 1 East Chang An Ave.,
Dong Cheng District, Beijing, 100738, China
Phone: 86-10-8518-4086 Fax: 86-10-8518-4082
YASKAWA ELECTRIC TAIWAN CORPORATION

9F, 16, Nanking E. Rd., Sec. 3, Taipei, Taiwan
Phone: 886-2-2502-5003 Fax: 886-2-2505-1280
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
YASKAWA
In the event that the end user of this product is to be the military and said product is to be employed in any weapons systems or the manufacture
thereof, the export will fall under the relevant regulations as stipulated in the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Regulations. Therefore, be sure
to follow all procedures and submit all relevant documentation according to any and all rules, regulations and laws that may apply.
Specifications are subject to change without notice for ongoing product modifications and improvements.
© 2008-2010 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
MANUAL NO. TOEP C710616 21C

Published in Japan July 2010 08-9 4 -0
10-6-4

Toep A1000

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Toep A1000

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Toep A1000

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

YASKAWA AC Drive A1000

High Performance Vector Control Drive

Easily Set Parameters for Specific Applications

Run a Motor One-Frame Larger

Drive a Synchronous PM Motor

Maintenance Check Using Drive Monitors

Fault Display and Troubleshooting

Three-Phase 200 V Class Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125

Revision History .........................................................................................................................194

i Preface & General Safety

A1000 Series AC Drive Quick Start Guide (this book)

REV DRV FOUT

TOBCC71061621), and is also available for download on our documentation website, e-

mechatronics.com. This manual provides detailed information on parameter settings, drive

4000 Power supply harmonics

Figure 1 Installing a Reactor

Selecting a Circuit Breaker or Leakage Circuit Breaker

25% ED (or 15 min)

Figure 2 Allowable Load Characteristics for a Yaskawa Motor

■ Drive Label Warnings

DIGITAL OPERATOR JVOP-182 ALM

REV DRV FOUT

WARNING AVERTISSMENT NPJT31470-1

Figure 4 Warning Information Position

Normal Duty Amps / Heavy Duty Amps

AC drive model MODEL : CIMR-AA2A0021FAA

FILE NO : E131457 IP20

Figure 5 Nameplate Information

YEC_common 2 3-phase, 200-240 Vac S Vibration-resistant

Refer to the following page.

Normal Duty Heavy Duty

Normal Duty Heavy Duty

■ Installation Orientation and Spacing

OK Not Good Not Good

Figure 6 Correct Installation Orientation

Single Drive Installation

YEC_common Side Clearance Top/Bottom Clearance

A – 50 mm minimum C – 120 mm minimum

Multiple Drive Installation (Side-by-Side Installation)

YEC_common Line up the tops of the drives.

IP20/NEMA Type 1 Enclosure Drives

Table 2 Dimensions for IP20/NEMA Type 1 Enclosure: 200 V Class

Table 3 Dimensions for IP20/NEMA Type 1 Enclosure: 400 V Class

IP00 Enclosure Drives

Table 4 Dimensions for IP00 Enclosure: 200 V Class

Table 5 Dimensions for IP00 Enclosure: 400 V Class

Figure 10 Drive Standard Connection Diagram (example: CIMR-A2A0040) Electrical Installation

◆ Main Circuit Connection Diagram

■ Three-Phase 200 V Class (CIMR-A 2A0004 to 0081)

Braking Resistor Unit

3 Phase power supply R/L1 U/T1

Figure 11 Connecting Main Circuit Terminals

■ Three-Phase 200 V Class (CIMR-A 2A0110, 0138)

Braking Resistor Unit

3 Phase power supply R/L1 U/T1

Figure 12 Connecting Main Circuit Terminals

■ Three-Phase 200 V Class (CIMR-A 2A0169 to 0415)

Braking Resistor Unit

Figure 13 Connecting Main Circuit Terminals

Figure 10 Drive Standard Connection Diagram (example: CIMR-A2A0040) Electrical Installation

■ Three-Phase 200 V Class (CIMR-A2A0004 to 0081)

■ Three-Phase 200 V Class (CIMR-A2A0110, 0138)

■ Three-Phase 200 V Class (CIMR-A2A0169 to 0415)

■ CIMR-A2A0110 to 0415, 4A0058 to 0675 (IP00 Enclosure)